S800 I/O, Modules And Termination Units DP840 3BSE020924 CIO
User Manual: DP840
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 578
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
IndustrialIT 800xA - Control and I/O S800 I/O Version 4.1 Modules and Termination Units IndustrialIT 800xA - Control and I/O S800 I/O Version 4.1 Modules and Termination Units NOTICE The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. In no event shall ABB be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any nature or kind arising from the use of this document, nor shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of any software or hardware described in this document. This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor used for any unauthorized purpose. The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license. This product meets the requirements specified in EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and in Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC. Copyright © 2003 - 2005 by ABB. All rights reserved. Release: Document number: June 2005 3BSE 020 924R4101 TRADEMARKS Registrations and trademarks used in this document include: Windows Registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Industrial IT Trademark of ABB. Advant Registered trademark of ABB. Advant Fieldbus Trademark of ABB. PROFIBUS Registered trademark of Profibus International (P.I.) PROFIBUS-DP Registered trademark of Profibus International (P.I.) HART Registered trademark of HART Communication Foundation. TABLE OF CONTENTS About This Book 0.1 General ......................................................................................................................21 0.2 Use of Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons ..............................................22 0.3 Terminology...............................................................................................................24 0.4 Applicable Specifications ..........................................................................................25 0.5 Related Documentation .............................................................................................26 Section 1 - Introduction 1.1 Product Overview ......................................................................................................28 1.1.1 Module Termination Units and Terminal Units ..........................................28 1.1.1.1 TU805 Terminal Unit for 50 Volt Applications ......................33 1.1.1.2 TU810 Compact MTU for 50 Volt Applications ....................34 1.1.1.3 TU811 Compact MTU for 250 Volt Applications...................34 1.1.1.4 TU812 Compact MTU for 50 Volt Applications and 25 pin D-sub for Process Connections .........................34 1.1.1.5 TU813 Compact MTU for 250 V Applications ......................34 1.1.1.6 TU814 Compact MTU for 50 Volt Applications ....................34 1.1.1.7 TU830 Extended MTU for 50 Volt Applications....................34 1.1.1.8 TU831 Extended MTU for 250 Volt Applications..................35 1.1.1.9 TU833 Extended MTU for 50 Volt Applications....................35 1.1.1.10 TU835 Extended MTU, Individually Fused per Channel for 50 Volt Applications ...............................................35 1.1.1.11 TU836 Extended MTU, Individually Fused per Channel for 250 Volt Applications .............................................35 1.1.1.12 TU837 Extended MTU, Individually Fused per Channel for 250 Volt Applications .............................................36 3BSE 020 924R4101 5 Table of Contents 1.1.1.13 TU838 Extended MTU, Individually Fused per Channel for 50 Volt Applications ............................................... 36 1.1.1.14 TU842 Redundant Horizontal MTU for 50 V Applications. 36 1.1.1.15 TU843 Redundant Vertical MTU for 50 V Applications ..... 37 1.1.1.16 TU844 Redundant Horizontal MTU for 50 V Applications. 37 1.1.1.17 TU845 Redundant Vertical MTU for 50 V Applications ..... 37 1.1.1.18 TY801 Shunt Stick................................................................ 37 1.1.1.19 TY804 Shunt Stick................................................................ 37 1.1.2 S800 I/O Modules ....................................................................................... 38 1.1.2.1 AI810 Analog Input Module, 0...20 mA, 0...10 V.................. 38 1.1.2.2 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V ........................................................... 38 1.1.2.3 AI825 Galvanic Isolated Analog Input Module, -20...+20 mA, 0(4)...+20 mA, -10...+10 V, 0(2)...+10 V ..................... 39 1.1.2.4 AI830 RTD Input Module....................................................... 39 1.1.2.5 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module ................................ 39 1.1.2.6 AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module, for Single or Redundant Applications ............................................... 39 1.1.2.7 AI845 Analog Input Module, for Single or Redundant Applications ............................................... 39 1.1.2.8 AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module for Single or Redundant Configuration ............................. 40 1.1.2.9 A0810 Analog Output Module, 0...20 mA ............................. 40 1.1.2.10 AO820 Bipolar Analog Output Module, -20 mA...+20 mA, -10 V...+10 V ................................................................ 40 1.1.2.11 AO845 Analog Output Module, for Single or Redundant Applications ................................................................. 40 1.1.2.12 DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking ............ 41 1.1.2.13 DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking ............ 41 1.1.2.14 DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing .......... 41 1.1.2.15 DI820 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c......................... 41 1.1.2.16 DI821 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c......................... 42 1.1.2.17 DI825 Digital Input Module, 125 V d.c. with SOE .............. 42 6 3BSE 020 924R4101 Table of Contents 1.1.2.18 DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking ............................................................42 1.1.2.19 DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking ............................................................43 1.1.2.20 DI840 Digital Input Module, for Single or Redundant Applications..................................................................43 1.1.2.21 DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module, for Single or Redundant Configuration .............................................43 1.1.2.22 DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V/48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking ............................................................43 1.1.2.23 DO810 Digital Output Module, 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sourcing ..........................................................44 1.1.2.24 DO814 Digital Output Module, 24 V, 0.5 A .........................44 1.1.2.25 DO815 Digital Output Module, 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing ..........................................................44 1.1.2.26 DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Open ........45 1.1.2.27 DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Closed......45 1.1.2.28 DO840 Digital Output Module, for Single or Redundant Applications..................................................................45 1.1.2.29 DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module, for Single or Redundant Configuration .............................................45 1.1.2.30 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module...........................46 1.1.2.31 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module, for Single or Redundant Applications ...............................................46 1.1.3 S800L I/O Modules.....................................................................................46 1.1.3.1 AI801 Analog Input Module, 0...20 mA .................................47 1.1.3.2 AO801 Analog Output Module, 0...20 mA.............................48 1.1.3.3 DI801 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking...............48 1.1.3.4 DI802 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c., Current Sinking48 1.1.3.5 DI803 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c., Current Sinking48 1.1.3.6 DO801 Digital Output Module, 24 V, 0.5 V, Current Sinking 48 1.1.3.7 DO802 Digital Output Module, 24-250 V, Relay Normally Open ............................................................................49 1.2 Prerequisites and Requirements ................................................................................49 3BSE 020 924R4101 7 Table of Contents Section 2 - Configuration 2.1 Module Termination Units (MTU)............................................................................ 51 2.2 I/O Modules .............................................................................................................. 53 2.2.1 S800 I/O Modules ....................................................................................... 53 2.2.2 S800L I/O Modules .................................................................................... 53 Section 3 - Maintenance 3.1 Preventive Maintenance ............................................................................................ 55 3.2 Hardware Indicators .................................................................................................. 55 3.2.1 S800 I/O Module LEDs .............................................................................. 55 3.2.2 S800L I/O Module LED ............................................................................. 58 3.3 Error Messages.......................................................................................................... 61 3.4 Fault Finding and User Repair .................................................................................. 61 3.4.1 S800 I/O Module Replacement................................................................... 61 3.4.1.1 General.................................................................................... 61 3.4.1.2 Practical Execution ................................................................. 62 3.4.1.3 Additional Aspects on Individual S800 I/O Modules............. 63 3.4.2 S800L I/O Module Replacement ................................................................ 66 3.4.2.1 General.................................................................................... 66 3.4.2.2 Practical Execution ................................................................. 66 3.4.2.3 Additional Aspects on Individual S800L I/O Modules .......... 67 Appendix A - Specifications A.1 AI801 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA ............................................................. 69 A.1.0.1 Features .................................................................................. 69 A.1.0.2 Description ............................................................................. 70 A.1.0.3 Technical Data........................................................................ 71 A.1.0.4 Block Diagram AI801............................................................ 73 A.1.0.5 Process Connections .............................................................. 74 A.2 AI810 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA, 0(2)...10 V.......................................... 76 A.2.0.1 Features .................................................................................. 76 A.2.0.2 Description ............................................................................. 76 A.2.0.3 Technical Data ....................................................................... 78 8 3BSE 020 924R4101 Table of Contents A.2.0.4 Block Diagram AI810 ...........................................................80 A.2.0.5 Process Connections...............................................................81 A.3 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V (4...20 mA, 2...10 V, 1...5 V)..................................88 A.3.0.1 Features ..................................................................................88 A.3.0.2 Description .............................................................................88 A.3.0.3 Technical Data........................................................................90 A.3.0.4 Block Diagram AI820 ............................................................92 A.3.0.5 Process Connections...............................................................93 A.4 AI825 Galvanic Isolated Analog Input Module .......................................................98 A.4.0.1 Features ..................................................................................98 A.4.0.2 Description .............................................................................98 A.4.0.3 Technical Data......................................................................100 A.4.0.4 Block Diagram AI825 ..........................................................102 A.4.0.5 Process Connections.............................................................103 A.5 AI830 RTD Input Module ......................................................................................106 A.5.0.1 Features ................................................................................106 A.5.0.2 Description ...........................................................................106 A.5.0.3 Technical Data .....................................................................108 A.5.0.4 Block Diagram AI830 .......................................................... 111 A.5.0.5 Process Connections.............................................................112 A.6 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module................................................................117 A.6.0.1 Features ................................................................................117 A.6.0.2 Description ...........................................................................117 A.6.0.3 Technical Data......................................................................119 A.6.0.4 Block Diagram AI835 ..........................................................123 A.6.0.5 Process Connections.............................................................124 A.7 AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module................................................................130 A.7.0.1 Features ................................................................................130 A.7.0.2 Description ...........................................................................130 A.7.0.3 Technical Data......................................................................132 A.7.0.4 Block Diagram AI843 ..........................................................136 3BSE 020 924R4101 9 Table of Contents A.7.0.5 Process Connections ............................................................ 137 A.8 AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant ................................................. 142 A.8.0.1 Features ................................................................................ 142 A.8.0.2 Description ........................................................................... 142 A.8.0.3 Technical Data...................................................................... 144 A.8.0.4 Block Diagram AI845.......................................................... 147 A.8.0.5 Process Connections ............................................................ 148 A.9 AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module ............................................ 156 A.9.0.1 Features ................................................................................ 156 A.9.0.2 Description ........................................................................... 156 A.9.0.3 Technical Data...................................................................... 158 A.9.0.4 Block Diagram AI880/AI880A............................................ 160 A.9.0.5 Process Connections ............................................................ 161 A.10 AO801 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA ..................................................... 164 A.10.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 164 A.10.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 164 A.10.0.3 Technical Data ................................................................... 166 A.10.0.4 Power Dissipation Calculation........................................... 168 A.10.0.5 Block Diagram AO801 ...................................................... 169 A.10.0.6 Process Connections .......................................................... 169 A.11 AO810 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA ..................................................... 172 A.11.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 172 A.11.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 172 A.11.0.3 Technical Data ................................................................... 174 A.11.0.4 Block Diagram AO810 ...................................................... 176 A.11.0.5 Process Connections........................................................... 177 A.12 AO820 Galvanically Isolated Bipolar Analog Output Module............................ 182 A.12.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 182 A.12.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 182 A.12.0.3 Technical Data ................................................................... 184 A.12.0.4 Block Diagram AO820 ...................................................... 186 A.12.0.5 Process Connections .......................................................... 187 10 3BSE 020 924R4101 Table of Contents A.13 AO845 Analog Output Module, single or redundant ...........................................192 A.13.0.1 Features ..............................................................................192 A.13.0.2 Description .........................................................................192 A.13.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................195 A.13.0.4 Block Diagram AO845.......................................................197 A.13.0.5 Process Connections...........................................................198 A.14 DI801 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking ............................................204 A.14.0.1 Features ..............................................................................204 A.14.0.2 Description .........................................................................204 A.14.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................206 A.14.0.4 Block Diagram DI801 ........................................................208 A.14.0.5 Process Connections ..........................................................209 A.15 DI802 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking .............................211 A.15.0.1 Features ..............................................................................211 A.15.0.2 Description .........................................................................211 A.15.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................213 A.15.0.4 Block Diagram DI802 ........................................................215 A.15.0.5 Process Connections ..........................................................216 A.16 DI803 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking .............................218 A.16.0.1 Features ..............................................................................218 A.16.0.2 Description .........................................................................218 A.16.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................220 A.16.0.4 Block Diagram DI803 ........................................................222 A.16.0.5 Process Connections...........................................................223 A.17 DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking ............................................225 A.17.0.1 Features ..............................................................................225 A.17.0.2 Description .........................................................................225 A.17.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................227 A.17.0.4 Block Diagram DI810 ........................................................229 A.17.0.5 Process Connections ..........................................................230 A.18 DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking ............................................236 A.18.0.1 Features ..............................................................................236 3BSE 020 924R4101 11 Table of Contents A.18.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 236 A.18.0.3 Technical Data ................................................................... 238 A.18.0.4 Block Diagram DI811 ........................................................ 240 A.18.0.5 Process Connections .......................................................... 241 A.19 DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing.......................................... 247 A.19.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 247 A.19.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 247 A.19.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 249 A.19.0.4 Block Diagram DI814........................................................ 251 A.19.0.5 Process Connections .......................................................... 252 A.20 DI820 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c ........................................................ 258 A.20.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 258 A.20.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 258 A.20.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 260 A.20.0.4 Block Diagram DI820........................................................ 262 A.20.0.5 Process Connections .......................................................... 263 A.21 DI821 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c. ....................................................... 266 A.21.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 266 A.21.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 266 A.21.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 268 A.21.0.4 Block Diagram DI821........................................................ 270 A.21.0.5 Process Connections .......................................................... 271 A.22 DI825 Digital Input Module, 125 V d.c with SOE .............................................. 274 A.22.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 274 A.22.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 274 A.22.0.3 Event Recording................................................................. 275 A.22.0.4 Simple Digital Input........................................................... 275 A.22.0.5 Technical Data.................................................................... 276 A.22.0.6 Block Diagram DI825........................................................ 278 A.22.0.7 Process Connections .......................................................... 279 A.23 DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking.................................................................................................. 282 12 3BSE 020 924R4101 Table of Contents A.23.0.1 Features ..............................................................................282 A.23.0.2 Description .........................................................................282 A.23.0.3 Event Recording .................................................................283 A.23.0.4 Simple Digital Input ...........................................................283 A.23.0.5 Technical Data....................................................................284 A.23.0.6 Block Diagram DI830 ........................................................286 A.23.0.7 Process Connections ..........................................................287 A.24 DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking ..................................................................................................293 A.24.0.1 Features ..............................................................................293 A.24.0.2 Description .........................................................................293 A.24.0.3 Event Recording .................................................................294 A.24.0.4 Simple Digital Input ...........................................................294 A.24.0.5 Technical Data....................................................................295 A.24.0.6 Block Diagram DI831 ........................................................297 A.24.0.7 Process Connections ..........................................................298 A.25 DI840 Digital Input Module .................................................................................304 A.25.0.1 Features ..............................................................................304 A.25.0.2 Description .........................................................................304 A.25.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................306 A.25.0.4 Block Diagram DI840 ........................................................308 A.25.0.5 Process Connections...........................................................309 A.26 DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module .........................................................316 A.26.0.1 Features ..............................................................................316 A.26.0.2 Description .........................................................................316 A.26.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................319 A.26.0.4 Block Diagram DI880 ........................................................321 A.26.0.5 Process Connections...........................................................322 A.27 DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V /48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking ..................................................................................................329 A.27.0.1 Features ..............................................................................329 A.27.0.2 Description .........................................................................329 A.27.0.3 Event Recording .................................................................330 3BSE 020 924R4101 13 Table of Contents A.27.0.4 Simple Digital Input........................................................... 330 A.27.0.5 Channel Supervision .......................................................... 331 A.27.0.6 Sensor Power Supply and Supervision .............................. 331 A.27.0.7 Supported Sensor Types..................................................... 331 A.27.0.8 Technical Data ................................................................... 333 A.27.0.9 Block Diagram DI885........................................................ 335 A.27.0.10 Process Connections ........................................................ 336 A.28 DO801 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sourcing............................ 340 A.28.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 340 A.28.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 340 A.28.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 342 A.28.0.4 Block Diagram DO801 ...................................................... 344 A.28.0.5 Process Connections .......................................................... 345 A.29 DO802 Digital Output Module, 24-250 V, Relay Normally Open ...................... 347 A.29.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 347 A.29.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 347 A.29.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 349 A.29.0.4 Block Diagram DO802 ...................................................... 351 A.29.0.5 Process Connections .......................................................... 352 A.30 DO810 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A Current Sourcing............................. 354 A.30.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 354 A.30.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 354 A.30.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 356 A.30.0.4 Block Diagram DO810 ...................................................... 358 A.30.0.5 Process Connections .......................................................... 359 A.31 DO814 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sinking.............................. 364 A.31.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 364 A.31.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 364 A.31.0.3 Technical Data ................................................................... 366 A.31.0.4 Block Diagram DO814 ...................................................... 368 A.31.0.5 Process Connections .......................................................... 369 A.32 DO815 Digital Output Module 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing............................... 375 14 3BSE 020 924R4101 Table of Contents A.32.0.1 Features ..............................................................................375 A.32.0.2 Description .........................................................................375 A.32.0.3 Technical Data ...................................................................378 A.32.0.4 Block Diagram DO815.......................................................380 A.32.0.5 Process Connections...........................................................381 A.33 DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Open .......................................386 A.33.0.1 Features ..............................................................................386 A.33.0.2 Description .........................................................................386 A.33.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................388 A.33.0.4 Block Diagram DO820.......................................................390 A.33.0.5 Process Connections...........................................................391 A.34 DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Closed .....................................396 A.34.0.1 Features ..............................................................................396 A.34.0.2 Description .........................................................................396 A.34.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................398 A.34.0.4 Block Diagram DO821.......................................................400 A.34.0.5 Process Connections...........................................................401 A.35 DO840 Digital Output Module.............................................................................406 A.35.0.1 Features ..............................................................................406 A.35.0.2 Description .........................................................................406 A.35.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................409 A.35.0.4 Block Diagram DO840.......................................................411 A.35.0.5 Process Connections...........................................................412 A.36 DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module .....................................................418 A.36.0.1 Features ..............................................................................418 A.36.0.2 Description .........................................................................419 A.36.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................421 A.36.0.4 Block Diagram DO880.......................................................424 A.36.0.5 Process Connections...........................................................425 A.37 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module ..........................................................431 A.37.0.1 Features ..............................................................................431 A.37.0.2 Description .........................................................................431 3BSE 020 924R4101 15 Table of Contents A.37.0.3 Transducer Connection ...................................................... 431 A.37.0.4 Pulse Encoding................................................................... 432 A.37.0.5 Pulse Count (Length/Position) Measurement .................... 434 A.37.0.6 Gated Count Mode ............................................................. 435 A.37.0.7 Frequency (speed) Measurement. ...................................... 436 A.37.0.8 Digital Output .................................................................... 437 A.37.0.9 OSP Function ..................................................................... 438 A.37.0.10 LED Indicators................................................................. 439 A.37.0.11 Technical Data.................................................................. 440 A.37.0.12 Block Diagram DP820 ..................................................... 444 A.37.0.13 Process Connections ........................................................ 445 A.38 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module.......................................................... 452 A.38.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 452 A.38.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 452 A.38.0.3 Transducer Connection ...................................................... 453 A.38.0.4 Pulse Count Measurement ................................................. 454 A.38.0.5 Frequency (speed) Measurement. ...................................... 454 A.38.0.6 Redundant Applications..................................................... 455 A.38.0.7 Technical Data.................................................................... 456 A.38.0.8 Block Diagram DP840 ....................................................... 460 A.38.0.9 Process Connections .......................................................... 461 A.39 TU805 Terminal Unit ........................................................................................... 469 A.39.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 469 A.39.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 469 A.39.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 470 A.39.0.4 Block Diagram TU805....................................................... 471 A.40 TU810 Compact MTU ......................................................................................... 472 A.40.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 472 A.40.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 472 A.40.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 474 A.40.0.4 Connections........................................................................ 476 A.40.0.5 Block Diagram TU810....................................................... 477 16 3BSE 020 924R4101 Table of Contents A.41 TU811 Compact MTU..........................................................................................478 A.41.0.1 Features ..............................................................................478 A.41.0.2 Description .........................................................................478 A.41.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................480 A.41.0.4 Connections ........................................................................481 A.41.0.5 Block Diagram TU811 .......................................................482 A.42 TU812 Compact MTU..........................................................................................483 A.42.0.1 Features ..............................................................................483 A.42.0.2 Description .........................................................................483 A.42.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................485 A.42.0.4 Connections ........................................................................486 A.42.0.5 Block Diagram TU812 .......................................................488 A.43 TU813 Compact MTU..........................................................................................489 A.43.0.1 Features ..............................................................................489 A.43.0.2 Description .........................................................................489 A.43.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................491 A.43.0.4 Connections ........................................................................493 A.43.0.5 Block Diagram TU813 .......................................................494 A.44 TU814 Compact MTU..........................................................................................495 A.44.0.1 Features ..............................................................................495 A.44.0.2 Description .........................................................................495 A.44.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................497 A.44.0.4 Connections ........................................................................499 A.44.0.5 Block Diagram TU814 .......................................................500 A.45 TU830 Extended MTU .........................................................................................501 A.45.0.1 Features ..............................................................................501 A.45.0.2 Description .........................................................................502 A.45.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................503 A.45.0.4 Connections ........................................................................505 A.45.0.5 Block Diagram TU830 .......................................................506 A.46 TU831 Extended MTU .........................................................................................507 A.46.0.1 Features ..............................................................................507 3BSE 020 924R4101 17 Table of Contents A.46.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 507 A.46.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 509 A.46.0.4 Connections........................................................................ 510 A.46.0.5 Block Diagram TU831....................................................... 511 A.47 TU833 Extended MTU......................................................................................... 512 A.47.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 512 A.47.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 512 A.47.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 514 A.47.0.4 Connections........................................................................ 516 A.47.0.5 Block Diagram TU833....................................................... 517 A.48 TU835 Extended MTU......................................................................................... 518 A.48.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 518 A.48.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 518 A.48.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 520 A.48.0.4 Connections........................................................................ 521 A.48.0.5 Block Diagram TU835....................................................... 523 A.49 TU836 Extended MTU......................................................................................... 524 A.49.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 524 A.49.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 524 A.49.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 526 A.49.0.4 Block Diagram TU836....................................................... 529 A.50 TU837 Extended MTU......................................................................................... 530 A.50.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 530 A.50.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 530 A.50.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 532 A.50.0.4 Connections ....................................................................... 534 A.50.0.5 Block Diagram TU837....................................................... 536 A.51 TU838 Extended MTU......................................................................................... 537 A.51.0.1 Features .............................................................................. 537 A.51.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 538 A.51.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 539 A.51.0.4 Connections........................................................................ 541 18 3BSE 020 924R4101 Table of Contents A.51.0.5 Block Diagram TU838 .......................................................542 A.52 TU842 Redundant Horizontal MTU.....................................................................543 A.52.0.1 Features ..............................................................................543 A.52.0.2 Description .........................................................................543 A.52.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................545 A.52.0.4 Connections ........................................................................546 A.52.0.5 Block Diagram TU842 .......................................................548 A.53 TU843 Redundant Vertical MTU .........................................................................549 A.53.0.1 Features ..............................................................................549 A.53.0.2 Description .........................................................................549 A.53.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................551 A.53.0.4 Connections ........................................................................552 A.53.0.5 Block Diagram TU843 .......................................................554 A.54 TU844 Redundant Horizontal MTU.....................................................................555 A.54.0.1 Features ..............................................................................555 A.54.0.2 Description .........................................................................555 A.54.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................557 A.54.0.4 Connections ........................................................................558 A.54.0.5 Block Diagram TU844 .......................................................560 A.55 TU845 Redundant Vertical MTU .........................................................................561 A.55.0.1 Features ..............................................................................561 A.55.0.2 Description .........................................................................561 A.55.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................563 A.55.0.4 Connections ........................................................................564 A.55.0.5 Block Diagram TU845 .......................................................566 A.56 TY801 Shunt Stick ...............................................................................................567 A.56.0.1 Features ..............................................................................567 A.56.0.2 Description .........................................................................567 A.56.0.3 Technical Data....................................................................568 A.56.0.4 Block Diagram TY801 .......................................................569 A.57 TY804 Shunt Stick ...............................................................................................570 A.57.0.1 Features ..............................................................................570 3BSE 020 924R4101 19 Table of Contents A.57.0.2 Description ......................................................................... 570 A.57.0.3 Technical Data.................................................................... 571 A.57.0.4 Block Diagram TY804....................................................... 572 INDEX ........................................................................................................................ 573 20 3BSE 020 924R4101 About This Book 0.1 General This book provides a description of S800 I/O modules and termination units. It provides instructions for site planning and installation, start-up and shutdown procedures, and information regarding capacity and performance. This book is not intended to be the sole source of instruction for the S800 I/O system. This section provides introductory and background information including guidelines how to find information in the manual related documentation. Section 1, Introduction provides a product and functional overview. Section 2, Configuration will give you the information needed to obtain the desired function. The main information is structured as follow: • Design considerations and guidelines are given. • Capacity and performance. Section 3, Maintenance focus is on fault finding supported by built in diagnostics and use of system status displays in operator station and LEDs on I/O modules. In Appendix A, Specifications you will find data sheets of all components of S800 I/O. They are listed in alphabetical order. 3BSE 020 924R4101 21 Use of Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons About This Book In general, the data sheet contains the following information: • Features • Description • Front view • Technical data • Process connections. Index will offer you an easy way of finding information. Those people involved in system engineering should attend the applicable system engineering or maintenance courses offered by ABB Automation University. 0.2 Use of Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons This publication includes Warning, Caution, and Information where appropriate to point out safety related or other important information. It also includes Tip to point out useful hints to the reader. The corresponding symbols should be interpreted as follows: Electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in electrical shock. Warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in personal injury. Caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment/property. Information icon alerts the reader to pertinent facts and conditions. Tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or how to use a certain function 22 3BSE 020 924R4101 About This Book Use of Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons Although Warning hazards are related to personal injury, and Caution hazards are associated with equipment or property damage, it should be understood that operation of damaged equipment could, under certain operational conditions, result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore, comply fully with all Warning and Caution notices. 3BSE 020 924R4101 23 Terminology About This Book 0.3 Terminology The following is a list of terms associated with S800 I/O that you should be familiar with. The list contains terms and abbreviations that are unique to ABB or have a usage or definition that is different from standard industry usage. Term 24 Description FCI The Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) device contains the interface to the fieldbus (for example PROFIBUS or AF100). G3 compliant The module withstand more severe environmental conditions according to ISA-S71.04. I/O cluster An I/O cluster can have up to 12 I/O devices. I/O device A complete I/O device consists of one MTU and one I/O module. I/O module Is an active, electronic and signal conditioning unit. Can be a part of an I/O device or a S800L I/O module. I/O station An I/O station consists of one or two FCI(s), 1-7 I/O clusters and up to 24 I/O devices. ModuleBus Is an incremental, electrical or optical, bus for interconnection of I/O devices. ModuleBus master ModuleBus master can be a controller (AC 800M) or a FCI. A ModuleBus master contains a ModuleBus interface and power regulators. The FCI module can manage 24 I/O devices and the controller up to 96 I/O modules (up to 12 directly and to the others in 1 to 7 I/O clusters). MTU The Module Termination Unit is a passive base unit containing process terminals and a part of the ModuleBus. OSP Outputs Set as Predetermined. A user configurable action on an output module when communications is lost to the FCI or Controller 3BSE 020 924R4101 About This Book Applicable Specifications RTD Resistance Temperature Detector SOE Sequence of events. Time stamping of status changes for digital inputs. TC Thermocouple 0.4 Applicable Specifications This product meets the requirements specified in EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and in Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC. 3BSE 020 924R4101 25 Related Documentation About This Book 0.5 Related Documentation The following is a listing of all documentation related to the S800 I/O system. Title S800 I/O General Information and Installation Description Describes the general installation and configuration information for the S800 I/O system S800 I/O Modules and Termination Units Describes I/O modules and termination with Intrinsic Safety Interface units with I.S. interface in the S800 I/O system 26 S800 I/O Fieldbus Communication Interface for AF100 User’s Guide Describes the AF100 FCI in the S800 I/O system S800 I/O Fieldbus Communication Interface for PROFIBUS-DP/DPV1 Describes the PROFIBUS-DP FCI in the S800 I/O system S800 I/O PROFIBUS-DP Fieldbus Communication Interface Reference Manual Describes the memory mapping on PROFIBUS for the S800 I/O system Interference-free Electronics Describes the rule for the installation of equipment to ensure the correct operation of equipment in environments where disturbance are present 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 1 Introduction The S800 I/O is distributed modular I/O which communicates with numerous controllers over a Advant Fieldbus 100 (AF100), PROFIBUS-DP or directly. The S800 I/O provides easy installation of the I/O modules and process cabling. It is highly modularized and flexible so that I/O modules can be combined to suit many applications. The S800 I/O can be mounted in many configurations to fit most requirements. Figure 1-1 S800 I/O Fieldbus Communication Interface with an I/O Module on Compact and Extended MTUs and an S800L Module 3BSE 020 924R4101 27 Product Overview Section 1 Introduction 1.1 Product Overview The S800 I/O provides easy installation of the I/O modules and process cabling. It is highly modularized and flexible so that the I/O modules can be combined to suit many applications. The S800 I/O modules and a Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) are combined to form an I/O Station. The S800 I/O can be used in both single and redundant applications. For more overview information please see S800 I/O General Information and Installation. Module Termination Units (MTU) and two types of I/O modules; S800 I/O and S800L I/O modules. S800 I/O modules are designed to be used together with a Module Termination Unit. S800L I/O modules are designed to be directly mounted on a standard DIN rail. The module also contains terminals for connections. 1.1.1 Module Termination Units and Terminal Units The Module Termination Units (MTU) are passive base units used to house the I/O modules. They contain the process wiring terminals and a section of the ModuleBus. The Module Termination Units (MTU) distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. 28 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 1 Introduction Module Termination Units and Terminal Units The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. The top part of the MTU can be removed to replace the termination board even with the system running. Such a need can be caused by a damaged terminal screw. The MTUs are available in tree versions (Compact, Extended and Redundant). The Compact MTU version typically provides for a compact installation of the I/O modules using 1 wire connections. The Extended MTU version provides for a more complete installation on the MTU, including 3 wire connection, fuses and field circuit power distribution. See Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-4 for an illustration of the MTUs together with the I/O modules. The Redundant MTUs are used in redundant I/O applications. There is space on the MTU for two I/O modules on separate ModuleBuses. See Figure 1-5. 3BSE 020 924R4101 29 Module Termination Units and Terminal Units Section 1 Introduction The Terminal Unit is a passive unit that enables 2- and 3-wire connections of process signals. The Terminal Unit is mounted direct on an S800L I/O module. See Figure 1-2, S800L I/O module with terminal unit TU805. 58.5 Figure 1-2 S800L Module with TU805 30 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 1 Introduction Module Termination Units and Terminal Units See Table 2-1 for information about the combination between MTU and I/O modules and to specifications in Appendix A, Specifications for more information. 122 mm 7 mm (.27”) (4.8”) 67.5 mm (2.66”) E F A D 99.5 mm (3.92”) E F A D B C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 B C 162 mm (6.37”) F R W DI810 24V 7 mm (.27”) 5 mm (0.2”) 31.5 mm (1.24") 58.5 mm (2.3”) 40 mm (1.57”) Figure 1-3 Typical Compact MTU with I/O Module 3BSE 020 924R4101 31 Module Termination Units and Terminal Units Section 1 Introduction 122 mm 7 mm (.27”) 5 mm (0.2”) 7 mm (.27”) 45 mm (1.77”) (2.66”) (1.85”) 46.5 mm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 67.5 mm DI810 24V A E F F R W B C D D 109 mm (4.3”) B C E F A (4.8”) 31.5 mm (1.24") 120.5 mm (4.74”) 80 mm (3.15”) Figure 1-4 Typical Extended MTU with I/O Module 32 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 1 Introduction Module Termination Units and Terminal Units Figure 1-5 Typical Redundant MTU with I/O Module 1.1.1.1 TU805 Terminal Unit for 50 Volt Applications The TU805 is a 16 channel terminal unit. Used to enable 2- and 3-wire connections on DI801 or DO801. The Terminal Unit is mounted direct on DI801 or DO801. 3BSE 020 924R4101 33 Module Termination Units and Terminal Units Section 1 Introduction 1.1.1.2 TU810 Compact MTU for 50 Volt Applications The TU810 is a 16 channel compact module termination unit. The TU810 has three rows of terminals for field signals and process power connections. The module is also available in a version that withstand more severe environmental conditions according to ISA-S71.04. This is indicated with a “Z” in the type designation. 1.1.1.3 TU811 Compact MTU for 250 Volt Applications The TU811 is an 8 channel compact module termination unit. The TU811 has three rows of terminals for field signals and process power connection. The module is also available in a version that withstand more severe environmental conditions according to ISA-S71.04. This is indicated with a “Z” in the type designation. 1.1.1.4 TU812 Compact MTU for 50 Volt Applications and 25 pin D-sub for Process Connections The TU812 is a 16 channel compact module termination unit. The TU812 has a 25 pin D-Sub connector for signals and process power connections. 1.1.1.5 TU813 Compact MTU for 250 V Applications The TU813 is a 8 channel compact module termination unit. The TU813 has three rows of crimp snap-in connectors for field signals and process power connections. 1.1.1.6 TU814 Compact MTU for 50 Volt Applications The TU814 is a 16 channel compact module termination unit. The TU814 has three rows of crimp snap-in connectors for field signals and process power connections. 1.1.1.7 TU830 Extended MTU for 50 Volt Applications The TU830 is a 16 channel extended module termination unit. The TU830 has three rows of terminals for field signals and process power connection. 34 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 1 Introduction Module Termination Units and Terminal Units 1.1.1.8 TU831 Extended MTU for 250 Volt Applications The TU831 is an 8 channel extended module termination unit. TU831 has two rows of terminals for field signals and process power connection. 1.1.1.9 TU833 Extended MTU for 50 Volt Applications The TU833 is a 16 channel extended module termination unit. The TU833 has three rows of spring-case terminals for field signals and process power connection. 1.1.1.10 TU835 Extended MTU, Individually Fused per Channel for 50 Volt Applications The TU835 is an 8 channel extended module termination unit. The TU835 has two rows of terminals for process power connection and a single row of process signal connections. Each channel has one fused (3 A max.) transmitter power terminal and one signal connection. Process voltage can be connected to 2 individually isolated groups. 1.1.1.11 TU836 Extended MTU, Individually Fused per Channel for 250 Volt Applications The TU836 is an 8 channel extended module termination unit. The TU836 has two rows of terminals for field signals and process power connection. Each channel has one fused (3 A max.) power outlet terminal and one signal return connection. Process voltage can be connected to 2 individually isolated groups. The standard fuse holder that comes with the TU836 can be changed to an indicating fuse holder. This indicating fuse holder can be ordered from Phoenix Contact: 15-30 VDC type, order 3118119 110-250 VAC type, order 3118106. 3BSE 020 924R4101 35 Module Termination Units and Terminal Units Section 1 Introduction Standard Optional fuse holder with fuse holder fuse status indication for 15-30 VDC or 110-250 VAC Figure 1-6 Exchange of Standard Fuse Holder for Indication Type 1.1.1.12 TU837 Extended MTU, Individually Fused per Channel for 250 Volt Applications The TU837 is an 8 channel extended module termination unit. The TU837 has two rows of terminals for field signals and process power connection. Each channel has one fused (3 A max.) power outlet terminal and one process power connection. Process voltage return can be connected to 2 individually isolated groups. 1.1.1.13 TU838 Extended MTU, Individually Fused per Channel for 50 Volt Applications The TU838 is an 16 channel extended module termination unit. The TU838 has two rows of terminals for process power connection. Each channel has one fused (3 A max.) transmitter power terminal and one signal connection. Process voltage can be connected to 2 individually isolated groups. 1.1.1.14 TU842 Redundant Horizontal MTU for 50 V Applications The TU842 is a 16 channel, 50 V, redundant module termination unit. It is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules and intended for mounting on a horizontal DIN rail. The Redundant MTUs are used in redundant I/O applications. There is space on the MTU for two I/O modules on separate ModuleBuses. 36 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 1 Introduction Module Termination Units and Terminal Units 1.1.1.15 TU843 Redundant Vertical MTU for 50 V Applications The TU843 is a 16 channel, 50 V, redundant module termination unit. It is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules and intended for mounting on a vertical DIN rail. The Redundant MTUs are used in redundant I/O applications. There is space on the MTU for two I/O modules on separate ModuleBuses. 1.1.1.16 TU844 Redundant Horizontal MTU for 50 V Applications The TU844 is a 8 channel, 50 V, redundant module termination unit. It is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules and intended for mounting on a horizontal DIN rail. 8 shunt sticks are needed for configuration of signal type. The Redundant MTUs are used in redundant I/O applications. There is space on the MTU for two I/O modules on separate ModuleBuses. 1.1.1.17 TU845 Redundant Vertical MTU for 50 V Applications The TU845 is a 8 channel, 50 V, redundant module termination unit. It is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules and intended for mounting on a vertical DIN rail. 8 shunt sticks are needed for configuration of signal type. The Redundant MTUs are used in redundant I/O applications. There is space on the MTU for two I/O modules on separate ModuleBuses. 1.1.1.18 TY801 Shunt Stick The TY801 is a shunt stick for current or voltage signals together with AI845 or AI880 and TU844 or TU845. 1.1.1.19 TY804 Shunt Stick The TY804 is a shunt stick for NAMUR signals together with DP840 and TU844 or TU845. 3BSE 020 924R4101 37 S800 I/O Modules Section 1 Introduction 1.1.2 S800 I/O Modules The I/O modules have open ventilated plastic enclosures. On the front of all I/O modules there are at least three LEDs (FAULT, RUN and WARNING) indicating the module status. Additionally some modules have LEDs indicating OSP or PRIMARY, see Table 3-1 and Table 3-2. I/O modules may be replaced in a fully operational I/O station. Mechanical keying on modules and MTUs protect I/O modules from being inserted in positions where they could be damaged by excessive voltage or current. An electronic type designation ID in each module keeps the I/O module from being taken into operation by the ModuleBus master, if a module’s ID doesn’t match the configured module type definition. There are modules for both single and redundant applications. Please refer to specifications in Appendix A, Specifications for more information. 1.1.2.1 AI810 Analog Input Module, 0...20 mA, 0...10 V The AI810 Analog Input Module has 8 current and voltage inputs. The inputs are independent for each channel, in that either voltage or current can be measured. The current input is able to handle a short circuit to the transmitter supply without damage. The input withstand HART communication. Nominal input ranges are: 0(4)... +20 mA, 0(2)... +10 V. 1.1.2.2 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V The AI820 Differential Analog Input Module has 4 differential, bipolar current/voltage inputs. This module is suitable for applications requiring high common mode rejection ratings, and/or bipolar voltage or current inputs. Nominal input ranges are: -20...+20 mA, 0(4)...+20 mA, -10...+10 V, 0(2)...+10 V, -5...+5 V and 0(1)...+5 V. The current input is able to handle a short circuit to the transmitter supply without damage. The input withstand HART communication. 38 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 1 Introduction S800 I/O Modules 1.1.2.3 AI825 Galvanic Isolated Analog Input Module, -20...+20 mA, 0(4)...+20 mA, -10...+10 V, 0(2)...+10 V The AI825 Galvanic Isolated Analog Input Module has 4 individually galvanic isolated channels. This module is suitable for applications requiring galvanic isolated channels, and/or bipolar voltage or current inputs. Nominal input ranges are: -20...+20 mA, 0(4)...+20 mA, -10...+10 V, 0(2)...+10 V. The current input is able to handle a short circuit to the transmitter supply without damage. The input withstand HART communication. 1.1.2.4 AI830 RTD Input Module The AI830 Analog Input, RTD Module has 8 RTD (Pt100, Cu10, Ni100 and Ni120 and resistor) inputs. The inputs allow 3-wire connection to RTDs. Inputs are monitored for open-circuit, short-circuit. Reference channel and internal supply are also monitored. 1.1.2.5 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module The AI835 Analog Input, Thermocouple/mV Module has 8 differential inputs for TC/mV measurements. One channel (channel 8) can be configured for “Cold Junction” (ambient) temperature measurement, thus serving as the CJ-channel for the other channels on the module. All 8 channels can be used if no CJ-temperature measurement is needed. The inputs can be connected to a variety of thermocouples with the following characteristics: B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S and T. 1.1.2.6 AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module, for Single or Redundant Applications The AI843 Analog Input, Thermocouple/mV Module has 8 differential inputs for TC/mV measurements. A separate channel is used for Cold Junction (ambient) temperature measurement. The input can be connected to a variety of thermocouples with the following characteristics: B, C, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U. 1.1.2.7 AI845 Analog Input Module, for Single or Redundant Applications The AI845 Analog Input Module has 8 analog inputs. Each channel can be either a voltage or current input. Nominal input range is 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 0...5 V, 3BSE 020 924R4101 39 S800 I/O Modules Section 1 Introduction 1...5 V. The module has advanced on-board diagnostics and HART pass-through functionality. It can be used in both single and redundant application. 1.1.2.8 AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module for Single or Redundant Configuration The AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module is TÜV certified for EN 61508-SIL3, DIN V 19250/DIN V VDE 0801- AK6 and EN954-1 Category 4. The AI880/AI880A has 8 analog inputs. The channels are for current input. Nominal input range is 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA. The module has advanced on-board diagnostics. It can be used in both single and redundant configuration. The AI880/AI880A complies with the NAMUR recommendation NE43, and supports configurable over- and under range limits. AI880A has support for HART pass-through communication. 1.1.2.9 A0810 Analog Output Module, 0...20 mA The AO810 Analog Output Module has 8 current outputs. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a communication error is detected. Nominal output range is: 0(4)... 20 mA. 1.1.2.10 AO820 Bipolar Analog Output Module, -20 mA...+20 mA, -10 V...+10 V The AO820 Bipolar Analog Output Module has 4 bipolar current or voltage outputs. The choice of either current or voltage output is configurable per channel. Outputs are individually galvanically isolated. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a communication error is detected. Nominal output range are: -20... +20 mA, 0(4)... +20 mA, -10... +10 V, 0(2)... +10 V. 1.1.2.11 AO845 Analog Output Module, for Single or Redundant Applications The AO845 Analog Output Module has 8 analog outputs. Nominal output range is 4...20 mA. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a communication error is detected. The module has advanced on-board diagnostics and HART pass-through functionality. It can be used in both single and redundant applications. 40 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 1 Introduction S800 I/O Modules 1.1.2.12 DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking The DI810 Digital Input Module has 16 channels for 24 volt d.c. digital inputs. The inputs are divided into two isolated groups of eight channels with a voltage supervision input for each group. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. The module is also available in a version that withstand more severe environmental conditions according to ISA-S71.04. This is indicated with a “Z” in the type designation. 1.1.2.13 DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking The DI811 Digital Input Module has 16 channels for 48 volt d.c. digital inputs. The inputs are divided into two isolated groups of eight channels with a voltage supervision input for each group. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. 1.1.2.14 DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing The DI814 Digital Input Module has 16 channels for 24 volt d.c. current source digital inputs. The inputs are divided into two isolated groups of eight channels with a voltage supervision input for each group. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. 1.1.2.15 DI820 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c. The DI820 Digital Input Module has 8 channels for 120 volt a.c./d.c. digital inputs. The inputs are individually isolated. Channel 1 can be used as voltage supervisor for channels 2 - 4, and channel 8 can be used for channels 5 - 7. If voltage supervision is disabled, channels 1 and 8 can be used as normal inputs. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator, noise filter and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. 3BSE 020 924R4101 41 S800 I/O Modules Section 1 Introduction The module is also available in a version that withstand more severe environmental conditions according to ISA-S71.04. This is indicated with a “Z” in the type designation. 1.1.2.16 DI821 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c. The DI821 Digital Input Module has 8 channels for 230 volt a.c./d.c. digital inputs. The inputs are individually isolated. Channel 1 can be used as voltage supervisor for channels 2 - 4, and channel 8 can be used for channels 5 - 7. If voltage supervision is disabled, channels 1 and 8 can be used as normal inputs. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator, noise filter and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. The module is also available in a version that withstand more severe environmental conditions according to ISA-S71.04. This is indicated with a “Z” in the type designation. 1.1.2.17 DI825 Digital Input Module, 125 V d.c. with SOE The DI825 Digital Input Module had 8 channels for 125 V d.c. digital inputs and sequence of events (SOE) handling capabilities. The sequence of events time stamp has a resolution of 0.4 ms for each input channel. The inputs are individually isolated. Channel 1 can be used as voltage supervisor for channels 2 - 4, and channel 8 can be used for channels 5 - 7. If voltage supervision is disabled, channels 1 and 8 can be used as normal inputs. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator, noise filter and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. 1.1.2.18 DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking The DI830 Digital Input Module has 16 channels for 24 volt d.c. digital inputs and sequence of events (SOE) handling capabilities. The sequence of events time stamp has a resolution of 0.4 ms for each input channel. The inputs are divided into two isolated groups of eight channels with a voltage supervision input for each group. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. 42 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 1 Introduction S800 I/O Modules 1.1.2.19 DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking The DI831 Digital Input Module has 16 channels for 48 volt d.c. digital inputs and sequence of events (SOE) handling capabilities. The sequence of events time stamp has a resolution of 0.4 ms for each input channel. The inputs are divided into two isolated groups of eight channels with a voltage supervision input for each group. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. 1.1.2.20 DI840 Digital Input Module, for Single or Redundant Applications The DI840 Digital Input Module has 16 channels for 24 V d.c. digital inputs and sequence of events (SOE) handling capabilities. The sequence of events time stamp has a resolution of 1 ms for each input channel. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. The module has advanced on-board diagnostics. It can be used in both single and redundant applications. 1.1.2.21 DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module, for Single or Redundant Configuration The DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module is TÜV certified for EN 61508-SIL3, DIN V 19250/DIN V VDE 0801-AK6 and EN954-1 Category 4 for normally closed signal loops. The DI880 has 16 channels for 24 V d.c. digital inputs and sequence of events (SOE) handling capabilities. The sequence of events time stamp has a resolution of 1 ms for each input channel. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus.The input voltage range is 18 to 30 V d.c. and the input current is 7 mA at 24 V d.c. The module has advanced on-board diagnostics. It can be used in both single and redundant configuration. 1.1.2.22 DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V/48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking The DI885 Digital Input Module has 8 channels for 48 volt d.c. digital inputs with or without open-circuit monitoring (wire break supervision), or 24 volt d.c. electronic inputs without open-circuit monitoring; and sequence of events (SOE) 3BSE 020 924R4101 43 S800 I/O Modules Section 1 Introduction handling capabilities. The sequence of events time stamp has a resolution of 1 ms for each input channel. The inputs are arranged in one group of 8 channels. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. The DI885 also has the capability to monitor an internal or external sensor power supply (60 V d.c. max.). 1.1.2.23 DO810 Digital Output Module, 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sourcing The DO810 Digital Output Module has 16 channels for 24 volt d.c., 0.5 A, digital outputs. The outputs are divided into two isolated groups of eight channels with a voltage supervision input for each group. Each output channel provides protection against short circuits to ground, over-voltage, over-temperature, EMC protection, output state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a communications lost error is detected. The module is also available in a version that withstand more severe environmental conditions according to ISA-S71.04. This is indicated with a “Z” in the type designation. 1.1.2.24 DO814 Digital Output Module, 24 V, 0.5 A The DO814 Digital Output Module has 16 channels for 24 volt d.c., 0.5 A, current sinking digital outputs. The outputs are divided into two isolated groups of eight channels with a voltage supervision input for each group. Each output channel provides protection against short circuits to power supply, over-temperature, EMC protection, output state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a communications lost error is detected. 1.1.2.25 DO815 Digital Output Module, 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing The DO815 Digital Output Module has 8 channels, 24 volt d.c., 2 A, digital outputs. The outputs are divided into two isolated groups of four channels with a voltage supervision input for each group. Each output channel provides protection against short circuits to ground, over-temperature, EMC protection, output state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a communications lost error is detected. 44 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 1 Introduction S800 I/O Modules The module is also available in a version that withstand more severe environmental conditions according to ISA-S71.04. This is indicated with a “Z” in the type designation. 1.1.2.26 DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Open The DO820 Digital Output Module has 8 channels for 230 volt a.c./d.c. relay outputs. The outputs are individually isolated. Each output channel provides a relay contact (NO - Normal Open), EMC protection, output state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a communications lost error is detected. Internal voltage is supervised. The module is also available in a version that withstand more severe environmental conditions according to ISA-S71.04. This is indicated with a “Z” in the type designation. 1.1.2.27 DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Closed The DO821 Digital Output Module has 8 channels for 230 volt a.c./d.c. relay outputs. The outputs are individually isolated. Each output channel provides a relay contact (NC - Normal Closed), EMC protection, output state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a communications lost error is detected. Internal voltage is supervised. 1.1.2.28 DO840 Digital Output Module, for Single or Redundant Applications The DO840 Digital Output Module has 16 channels for 24 V d.c. The maximum continuos output current is 0.5 mA. The module has advanced on-board diagnostics. It can be used in both single and redundant applications. 1.1.2.29 DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module, for Single or Redundant Configuration The DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module is TÜV certified for EN 61508-SIL3, DIN V 19250/DIN V VDE 0801-AK6 and EN954-1 Category 4. 3BSE 020 924R4101 45 S800L I/O Modules Section 1 Introduction The DO880 has 16 channels for 24 V d.c. The maximum continuous output current is 0.5 A. The module has advanced on-board diagnostics. It can be used in both single and redundant configuration. The DO880 is suitable for both NE (Normally Energized) and ND (Normally De-energized) outputs, in both high demand, low demand and Continuos Control (CC) applications. 1.1.2.30 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module DP820 is an two-channel pulse counting module for incremental pulse transmitters up to 1.5 MHz. Each channel contains counters and registers for position/length and speed/frequency measurement. Each channel provides three balanced inputs for connection of a pulse transmitter, one digital input and one digital output. Pulse transmitters with RS422, +5 V, +12 V, +24 V and 13 mA interfaces can be connected to DP820. 1.1.2.31 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module, for Single or Redundant Applications DP840 has 8 channels and each channel can be configured for pulse count or frequency measurement. The maximum frequency of input signals is 20 kHz. The inputs can also be read as digital input signals. Input signal range NAMUR, 12 V and 24 V. The module is also available in a version that withstand more severe environmental conditions according to ISA-S71.04. This is indicated with a “Z” in the type designation. 1.1.3 S800L I/O Modules The I/O modules have open ventilated plastic enclosures and a bottom of sheet metal. On the front of each I/O module there is one LED (STATUS) indicating the module status and digital I/O modules have one status LED for each channel. Refer to Hardware Indicators on page 55 for the status indication of the LEDs. An electronic type designation ID in each module keeps the I/O module from being taken into operation by the ModuleBus master, if a module’s ID doesn’t match the configured module type definition. 46 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 1 Introduction S800L I/O Modules Please refer to specifications in s for more information. The module can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. The module is locked to the DIN rail by using the locking screw. The process connection is done via detachable connectors. The I/O module distributes the ModuleBus to the next module. It also generate the correct address to the next module by shifting the outgoing position signals. 58.45 mm (2.3”) 67.5 mm (2.66”) Center of DIN rail 110 mm (4.3”) 86.1 mm (3.4”) 136 mm (5.35”) DO801 46.5 mm (1.83”) 5 mm (0.2”) 57.2 mm (2.25”) Figure 1-7 Dimensions for S800L Modules 1.1.3.1 AI801 Analog Input Module, 0...20 mA The AI801 Analog Input Module has 8 current inputs. The current input is able to handle a short circuit to the transmitter supply without damage. The input withstand HART communication. Nominal input ranges are: 0(4)... +20 mA. 3BSE 020 924R4101 47 S800L I/O Modules Section 1 Introduction 1.1.3.2 AO801 Analog Output Module, 0...20 mA The AO801 Analog Output Module has 8 current outputs. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a communications error is detected. Nominal output range is: 0(4)... 20 mA. 1.1.3.3 DI801 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking The DI801 Digital Input Module has 16 channels for 24 volt d.c. digital inputs. One input channel can be used for sensor voltage supervision. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. 1.1.3.4 DI802 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c., Current Sinking The DI802 Digital Input Module has 8 channels for 120 volt a.c./d.c. digital inputs. Channel 8 can be used for sensor voltage supervision. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. 1.1.3.5 DI803 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c., Current Sinking The DI803 Digital Input Module has 8 channels for 230 volt a.c./d.c. digital inputs. Channel 8 can be used for sensor voltage supervision. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. 1.1.3.6 DO801 Digital Output Module, 24 V, 0.5 V, Current Sinking The DO801 Digital Output Module has 16 channels for 24 volt d.c., 0.5 A, digital outputs. Each output channel provides protection against short circuits to ground, over-voltage, over-temperature, EMC protection, output state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a communications lost error is detected. 48 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 1 Introduction Prerequisites and Requirements 1.1.3.7 DO802 Digital Output Module, 24-250 V, Relay Normally Open The DO802 Digital Output Module has 8 channels for 24-250 volt d.c., digital outputs. Each output channel provides protection against short circuits to ground, over-voltage, over-temperature, EMC protection, output state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a communications lost error is detected. 1.2 Prerequisites and Requirements When the S800 I/O is used with controllers as part of their I/O system, the controllers need to have an interface to the fieldbus network. The fieldbus network will connect to a Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI) with S800 I/O installed. 3BSE 020 924R4101 49 Prerequisites and Requirements 50 Section 1 Introduction 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 2 Configuration 2.1 Module Termination Units (MTU) Each MTU is used with certain types of I/O Modules. Refer to Table 2-1 for a crossreference between MTU and I/O Modules. Each MTU has two mechanical keys that have to be set for the type of I/O module that will be installed on it. Table 2-1 MTU Usage and Key Settings Module Type TU810 TU812 TU814 Compact TU811 TU813 TU830 TU833 Compact Extended TU831 TU835 Extended Extended TU836 TU837 Extended TU838 Extended TU842 TU843 TU844 TU845 Redundant Redundant Mech. Key Setting Key 1 Key 2 AI810 X - X - X - X - - A E AI820 X - X - - - - - - B B AI825 - X - X - - - - - D A AI830 X - X - - - - - - A F AI835 X - X - - - - - - B A AI843 - - X - - - - X - B A AI845 X - X - X - X - X C C AI880 - - - - - - - - X F F AO810 X - X - - - - - - A E AO820 X - X - - - - - - B C AO845 X - X - - - - X - C C DI810 X - X - - - X - - A A 3BSE 020 924R4101 51 Module Termination Units (MTU) Section 2 Configuration Table 2-1 MTU Usage and Key Settings (Continued) Module Type TU810 TU812 TU814 Compact TU811 TU813 TU830 TU833 Compact Extended TU831 TU835 Extended Extended TU836 TU837 Extended TU838 Extended TU842 TU843 TU844 TU845 Redundant Redundant Mech. Key Setting Key 1 Key 2 DI811 X - X - - - X - - B D DI814 X - X - - - X - - B E DI820 - X - X - - - - - A B DI821 - X - X - - - - - A C DI825 - X - X - - - - - A B DI830 X - X - - - X - - A A DI831 X - X - - - X - - B D DI840 X - X - - - X X - C D DI880 X - X - - - X X - F F DI885 X - X - - - - - - B F DO810 X - X - - - - - - A A DO814 X - X - - - - - - B E DO815 X (1) - X - - - - - - A A DO820 - X - X - X - - - A D DO821 - X - X - X - - - C A DO840 X - X - - - - X - C E DO880 X - X - - - - X - F E DP820 X - X - - - - - - C B DP840 X - X - - - - X X C F (1) TU812 not recommended due to the maximum rated current. 52 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 2 Configuration I/O Modules Connecting an MTU to the ModuleBus master, cluster modem or to another MTU automatically sets-up the address selection of that MTU. There are no jumpers or switches that need to be set before installing an I/O module. MTUs are placed on the DIN rails and then connected to the preceding MTU, ModuleBus master or cluster modem. Once connected, the MTU is locked in place by the bottom latch which also bonds it to the chassis ground. 2.2 I/O Modules 2.2.1 S800 I/O Modules Each I/O module is installed onto an MTU. See Table 2-1 for which MTU to use with each I/O module type. I/O modules do not have any jumpers or switches that need to be set before installing on an MTU. Refer to Appendix A, Specifications for more information. I/O modules are installed by aligning the connectors of the MTU and I/O module and then pushing the units together. After connected to the MTU, the I/O module is then locked in place by the I/O Module Lock/Switch which also activates a switch to enable power to the I/O module. 2.2.2 S800L I/O Modules The I/O modules are installed directly on the DIN rail and locked with the locking screw. The process signal are connected to a pluggable connector on the module. There are no jumpers or switches that need to be set. The I/O module automatically set up the address for the next I/O module. To enable 2- and 3-wire connection to 16 channels DI and DO modules, TU805 is used. TU805 is mounted direct on the module. 3BSE 020 924R4101 53 S800L I/O Modules 54 Section 2 Configuration 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 3 Maintenance 3.1 Preventive Maintenance Please see the S800 I/O General Information and Installation manual. 3.2 Hardware Indicators 3.2.1 S800 I/O Module LEDs Figure 3-1 shows examples of front panels for different types of I/O modules. On the front of all I/O modules there are at least three LEDs (FAULT, RUN and WARNING) indicating the module status. Additionally some modules have LEDs indicating OSP or PRIMARY, see description below and Table 3-1 and Table 3-2. The FAULT LED shall indicate when the I/O module detect a fatal error or before first access after power up. The RUN LED shall indicate when the I/O module is operational. The WARNING LED shall indicate when a non-fatal error is detected and the module continues to run. The OSP LED shall indicate when the I/O module is in OSP state, that is, when the module is commanded to OSP or when automatically set to OSP state due to communication error. The PRIMARY LED shall indicate when the I/O module is primary (in a redundant pair). In a redundant configuration, the primary module is scanned at the specified cycle time to supply input values to the application, while the backup module is scanned at a low cycle for diagnostic purpose. The input values from the backup module is not used by the application. 3BSE 020 924R4101 55 S800 I/O Module LEDs Section 3 Maintenance Each digital channel has one LED indicating current state (on/off). Table 3-1 Standard LEDs on I/O Modules Marking Color Description F (Fault) Red Internal fault in the module affecting all channels (1) R (Run) Green Operational state W (Warning) Yellow External fault or internal channel error O (OSP) Yellow OSP state (Outputs Set as Predetermined) P (Primary) Yellow LED indicating that the module is operating as primary in a redundant pair. Channel status Yellow (+red) This LED shows both value (Yellow ON/OFF) and error (red) (1) Modules without self test function: The F-LED will switch on at power up or restart of the module and switch off after the first successful access to the module. Modules with self test function: The F-LED will switch on at power up, restart of the module or when the module goes to Error state. If the module has not gone to Error state it will switch off the F-LED after the first successful access to the module. Table 3-2 I/O Module LED Indications in Different States Module state Init Run Fault Warning OSP Primary Off On Off Off Off DI On/Off (1), DO Off On/Off On/Off Off Off DI On/Off (1), DO Off DI On/Off, DO Off Not Flashing/ Configured Off Ready Operational 56 (2) Flashing/ Off Off On/Off Off Off On Off On/Off Off On/Off Channel status On/Off 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 3 Maintenance S800 I/O Module LEDs Table 3-2 I/O Module LED Indications in Different States (Continued) Module state Run Fault Warning OSP Primary OSP On Off On/Off On On/Off Error Off On On/Off Off Off Channel status On/Off DI On/Off, DO Off (1) The DI signal status for module DI830, DI831, DI880, DI885, DP820 is only OFF. (2) Will be switched off after the first successful access to the module. Normally when an I/O module has been removed from the configuration, the ModuleBus master will do a restart of the module. The module will end up in the NOT CONFIGURED state. F R W O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 F R W F R W O F R W F R W O PX1 UP1 ST1 DI1 SY1 DO1 TP1 UL1 PX2 UP2 ST2 DI2 SY2 DO2 TP2 UL2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DO810 DI810 AO810 AI810 DP820 Figure 3-1 Examples of S800 I/O Module LED Locations 3BSE 020 924R4101 57 S800L I/O Module LED Section 3 Maintenance 3.2.2 S800L I/O Module LED Figure 3-2 shows examples of front panels for different types of I/O modules. On the front of each I/O module there is one LED indicating the module status. See Table 3-3 and Table 3-4 for information on the meaning and indications for these modules. For modules with special LED indications see respectively module in Appendix A, Specifications. The LED shall indicate red when the I/O module detect a fatal error or before first access after power up. The LED shall indicate green when the I/O module is operational. Each digital channel has one LED indicating current state (on/off). Table 3-3 Standard LED on I/O Modules Marking Color S (Status) Description Red Fault in the module (1) Green Operational state (1) Modules without self test function, for example, DI/DO modules: The S-LED will switch on to red at power up or restart of the module and switch off after the first successful access to the module. Modules with self test function for example, AI/AO modules: The S-LED will switch on to red at power up, restart of the module or when the module goes to Error state. If the module has not gone to Error state it will switch off the S-LED after the first successful access to the module. Table 3-4 I/O Module LED Indications in Different States Module state Init 58 Status Red Channel status Off (1) Off Not Configured Red/off Ready Off DI On/Off, DO Off Operational Green On/Off 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 3 Maintenance S800L I/O Module LED Table 3-4 I/O Module LED Indications in Different States (Continued) Module state Status Channel status OSP Green On/Off Error Red DI On/Off, DO Off (1) Will be switched off after the first successful access to the module. Normally when an I/O module has been removed from the configuration, the ModuleBus master will do a restart of the module. The module will end up in the NOT CONFIGURED state. 3BSE 020 924R4101 59 S800L I/O Module LED Section 3 Maintenance S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15 16 STATUS STATUS S AI801 0(4)...20 mA DO801 24 V 0.5 A L+ L- 24 V L+ L- 24 V + 1 I + 2 I 3 + I + 4 I + 5 I + 6 I + 7 I + 8 I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Figure 3-2 Examples of S800L I/O Module LED Locations 60 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 3 Maintenance Error Messages 3.3 Error Messages Please see the relevant controller manuals. 3.4 Fault Finding and User Repair 3.4.1 S800 I/O Module Replacement 3.4.1.1 General All I/O modules can be exchanged on-line and with the process power supply connected, except for relay outputs with normally closed contacts. This is possible because the module deactivates when the I/O module lock switch is turned to unlock. It is important to understand the consequences of a module exchange on-line and how it affects the process. Replacement of an S800 I/O module affects all channels on the module. It also sometimes indirectly affects the outputs via some application function, on another module. The system software in the ModuleBus master checks automatically that all I/O modules function correctly. In the event of module fault, and module exchange, the module and associated signals are marked as faulty. The system software checks that the module is inserted and correct. If this is the case, the Fault-indicator (LED) extinguishes and RUN LED is activated and the module resumes its normal function. The following headings include general instructions for replacement of modules and aspects on the handling of individual modules are presented in Table 3-5. 3BSE 020 924R4101 61 S800 I/O Module Replacement Section 3 Maintenance 3.4.1.2 Practical Execution Replace faulty or suspect I/O modules in the following way: 1. Read S800 I/O General Information and Installation. 2. Special restrictions apply to each module type. See descriptions in Table 3-5 for useful information on individual module types. 3. Check that the new module can replace the old. 4. Provide access to the module by loosening the module locking. 5. Grip the module firmly and extract the module. 6. Insert the new module carefully. 7. Store extracted modules in envelopes. 8. Ensure that the module contacts mate properly with the contacts in the MTU and activate the locking mechanism in place. 9. Modules initialized automatically by the system and the fault indicating LED extinguishes and RUN LED is activated. 10. Perform a function test on the new module. 62 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 3 Maintenance S800 I/O Module Replacement 3.4.1.3 Additional Aspects on Individual S800 I/O Modules Table 3-5 lists S800 I/O modules. Descriptions of these types are referred individually in the table below. Table 3-5 Replacement Aspects of S800 I/O Modules Module Type - Settings AI810, AI820, AI825, AI830, AI835, AI843, AI845, AI880, AI890, AI895 Analog Input No settings AO810, AO820, AO845, AO890, AO895 Analog Output No settings Comments Replacement with power applied is possible. Turning locking mechanism deactivates the module. Replacement with power applied is possible. It may be necessary to set the process device manually to a safe state before the module is extracted. Turning locking mechanism deactivates the module. DI810, DI811, DI814, DI820, DI821, DI890 Digital Input No settings DI825, DI830, DI831, DI840, DI880, DI885 Digital Input with SOE No settings 3BSE 020 924R4101 Replacement with power applied is possible. Turning locking mechanism deactivates the module. Replacement with power applied is possible. Turning locking mechanism deactivates the module. 63 S800 I/O Module Replacement Section 3 Maintenance Table 3-5 Replacement Aspects of S800 I/O Modules (Continued) Module Type - Settings DO810, DO814 DO815, DO840, DO880, DO890 Digital Output No settings Comments Replacement with power applied is possible. It may be necessary to set the process device manually to a safe state before the module is extracted. Turning locking mechanism deactivates the module. If DO880 is removed from the MTU, the connected outputs is automatically turned to safe state (de-energized). DO820 Digital Output No settings Replacement with power applied is possible. It may be necessary to set the process device manually to a safe state before the module is extracted. Turning locking mechanism deactivates the module. DO821 Digital Output No settings Replacement with system power applied is possible. Caution! Since the module has normally closed relay contacts the field power must be removed before replacement. It may be necessary to set the process device manually to a safe state before the module is extracted. Turning locking mechanism deactivates the module, that is, relay contacts will close. 64 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 3 Maintenance S800 I/O Module Replacement Table 3-5 Replacement Aspects of S800 I/O Modules (Continued) Module Type - Settings DP820, DP840 Pulse Counter No settings Comments Replacement with power applied is possible. It may be necessary to set the process device manually to a safe state before the module is extracted. Turning locking mechanism deactivates the module. TU810, TU811, TU812, TU813, TU814, TU830, TU831, TU833, TU835, TU836, TU837, TU838, TU842, TU843, TU844, TU845 MTUs 3BSE 020 924R4101 No settings Cannot be replaced or repaired with power applied. Disconnecting an MTU breaks the ModuleBus communications bus and removes power to the MTUs that follow. MTUs mounted in the middle (between the ModuleBus master, cluster modem and the number 12 MTU) need to have the preceding or following MTUs moved in order to disconnect the ModuleBus connector. 65 S800L I/O Module Replacement Section 3 Maintenance 3.4.2 S800L I/O Module Replacement 3.4.2.1 General I/O modules can not be exchanged on-line. The power must be switched off to the I/O station and the module before exchanging the I/O module. It is important to understand the consequences of a power switch off to an I/O station and how it affects the process. A power switch off to an I/O station affects all modules and channels in the station. It also sometimes indirectly affects outputs in other I/O stations via some application functions. The system software checks that the module is inserted and correct. If this is the case, the Fault indication extinguishes and after configuration and enter operation mode the Run indication is activated and the module resumes its normal function. The following headings include general instructions for replacement of modules and aspects on the handling of individual modules are presented in Table 3-6. 3.4.2.2 Practical Execution Replace faulty or suspect I/O modules in the following way: 1. Read S800 I/O General Information and Installation. 2. Special restrictions apply to each module type. See descriptions in Table 3-6 for useful information on individual module types. 3. Check that the new module can replace the old. 4. Switch off the power to the I/O station. 5. Remove the power supply connector from the I/O module. 6. Remove the process connector from the I/O module. 7. Provide access to the module by loosening the module locking. 8. Slide the module to the right and extract the module. 9. Insert the new module. 10. Store extracted modules in envelopes. 66 3BSE 020 924R4101 Section 3 Maintenance S800L I/O Module Replacement 11. Ensure that the module contacts properly mate with the module to the left and lock the module with the locking screw. 12. Switch on the power to the I/O station. 13. Connect the power supply to the I/O module. 14. Connect the process connector to the I/O module. 15. Modules are automatically initialized by the system and the status indicating LED extinguishes from red to off and to green when the module is in normal operation. 16. Perform a function test on the new module. 3.4.2.3 Additional Aspects on Individual S800L I/O Modules Table 3-6 lists S800L I/O modules. Descriptions of these types are referred individually in the table below. Table 3-6 Replacement Aspects of S800L I/O Modules Module Type - Settings Comments AI801, DI801, DI802, DI803 No settings Switch the power off before replacement. AO801, DO801, DO802 No settings Switch the power off before replacement. TU805 No settings 3BSE 020 924R4101 It may be necessary to set the process device manually to a safe state before the the power switch off. Can be replaced with power applied. It may be necessary to set the process device manually to a safe state before replacing the TU805. 67 S800L I/O Module Replacement 68 Section 3 Maintenance 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications A.1 AI801 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA A.1.0.1 Features • 8 channels for 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA d.c., single ended unipolar inputs • 1 group of 8 channels isolated from ground • 12 Bit resolution • Input shunt resistors protected to 30 V by PTC resistor • Analog inputs are short circuit secured to ZP or +24 V • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting • The input withstand HART communication. • Process and power connections via detachable connectors 3BSE 020 924R4101 STATUS S AI801 0(4)...20mA L+ L- 24V + 1 I + 2 I 3 + I + 4 I + 5 I + 6 I + 7 I + 8 I 69 AI801 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA Appendix A Specifications A.1.0.2 Description The AI801 Analog Input Module has 8 channels for current input. The current input is able to handle a short circuit to the transmitter supply at least 30 V d.c without damage. Current limiting is performed with a PTC resistor. The input resistance of the current input is 250 ohm, PTC included. The EMC protection is placed on the module. The module distributes the external transmitter supply to each channel. This adds a simple connection to distribute the supply to 2-wire transmitters. There are no current limiting on the transmitter power terminals. All eight channels are isolated from the ModuleBus in one group. Power to the input stages is converted from the external 24 V. One STATUS LED indicates module status. The STATUS LED can be Green, off or Red. The STATUS LED Green indicates normal operation. The STATUS LED Red indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not configured state the STATUS LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the POWOK signal is active. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. 70 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI801 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA A.1.0.3 Technical Data Table A-1 AI801 Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C AI801 Analog Input Module Feature Number of channels 8 Type of input Unipolar single ended Measurement range 0...20 mA, 4... 20 mA(1) Under/over range -0% / +15% Input impedance (at current input) (including PTC) ≥230 Ω, ≤270 Ω Maximum field cable length 600 meters, (656 yd.) Voltage input, maximum non-destructive 30 V d.c. NMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz >40 dB Error Max. 0.1% Resolution 12 bit Temperature drift Typ. 50 ppm/°C Max. 80 ppm/°C Update cycle time 1 ms Current consumption 24 V external 30 mA Current consumption 5 V 70 mA Power dissipation 1.1 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) Input filter cut off frequency Second order filter 3.5Hz Input filter (rise time 0-90%) 140 ms 3BSE 020 924R4101 71 AI801 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA Appendix A Specifications Table A-1 AI801 Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) AI801 Analog Input Module Feature Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.05-2.5mm2, 30-12 AWG Stranded: 0.05-1.5mm2, 30-12 AWG Recommended torque: 0.8 Nm Stripping length: 6-7.5 mm, 0.24-0.30 in Width 86.1 mm (3.4”) Depth 58.5 mm (2.3”) Height 110 mm (4.33”) Weight 0.24 kg (0.53 lbs.) (1) 4...20 mA handled by the FCI or controller (2) 40° C (104 ° F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O modules or S800L modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 72 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI801 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA A.1.0.4 Block Diagram AI801 STATUS Pos 1+ 1I LP Block 2+ 2I LP Mux MBI # 5VS 5V 0V 7I LP Power_ok 8+ 8I LP L+ L- EM 3BSE 020 924R4101 73 AI801 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA Appendix A Specifications A.1.0.5 Process Connections Table A-2 AI801 Process Connections Process Terminal Process Connection 74 Ch1, L1+ 1+ Ch1, Current Input 1I Ch 2, L1+ 2+ Ch 2, Current Input 2I Ch 3, L1+ 3+ Ch 3, Current Input 3I Ch 4, L1+ 4+ Ch 4, Current Input 4I Ch 5, L2+ 5+ Ch 5, Current Input 5I Ch 6, L2+ 6+ Ch 6, Current Input 6I Ch 7, L2+ 7+ Ch 7, Current Input 7I Ch 8, L2+ 8+ Ch 8, Current Input 8I 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI801 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA Figure A-1 shows the process connections for the AI801. AI801 Process L1+ 1+ Ch1 1I L1+ 2+ Ch2 2I L1+ 3+ 0 - 20mA Ch3 3I L1+ 4+ 0 - 20mA Ch4 4I L2+ 5+ Ch5 5I L2+ 6+ Ch6 6I L2+ 7+ Ch7 7I 0 - 20mA 0 - 20mA 0 - 20mA 0 - 20mA 0 - 20mA Mux. 8+ 0 - 20mA Ch8 8I +24v L+ 0v L- Chx I = Current Input EM Figure A-1 AI801 Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 75 AI810 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA, 0(2)...10 V Appendix A Specifications A.2 AI810 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA, 0(2)...10 V A.2.0.1 Features • 8 channels for 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 0...10 V or 2...10 V d.c., single ended unipolar inputs • 1 group of 8 channels isolated from ground • 12 Bit resolution • Input shunt resistors protected to 30 V by PTC resistor F R W 1 2 • Analog inputs are short circuit secured to ZP or +24 V • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting 5 • The input withstand HART communication. 6 A.2.0.2 Description The AI810 Analog Input Module has 8 channels. Each channel can be either a voltage or current input. The current input is able to handle a short circuit to the transmitter supply at least 30 V d.c without damage. Current limiting is performed with a PTC resistor. The input resistance of the current input is 250 ohm, PTC included. 3 4 7 8 AI810 0..20 mA, 0..10 V The voltage input is able to withstand an over or undervoltage of at least 30 V d.c. Input resistance is 290 kohm. The EMC protection is placed on the module. Transmitter supply can be connected to L1+, L1- and/or L2+, L2-. The module distributes the external transmitter supply to each channel. This adds a simple connection to distribute the supply to 2- or 3-wire transmitters. There are no current limiting on the transmitter power terminals. Fused MTUs TU830, TU835 and TU838 provides groupwise and channelwise fusing. 76 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI810 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA, 0(2)...10 V All eight channels are isolated from the ModuleBus in one group. Power to the input stages is converted from the 24 V on the ModuleBus. Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. Five different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 24 V process voltage inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of 24 V power supply to the field devices. The extended MTU, TU835, and TU838 provides a fuse (3 A max.) per channel for process power out. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. 3BSE 020 924R4101 77 AI810 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA, 0(2)...10 V Appendix A Specifications A.2.0.3 Technical Data Table A-3 AI810 Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C AI810 Analog Input Module Feature Number of channels 8 Type of input Unipolar single ended Measurement range 0...20 mA, 0...10 V, 4... 20 mA(1), 2... 10 V (1) Under/over range -5% / +15% Input impedance (at voltage input) 290K Ω Input impedance (at current input) (including PTC) ≥230 Ω, ≤275 Ω Maximum field cable length 600 meters, (656 yd.) Voltage input, maximum non-destructive 30 V d.c. NMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz >40 dB Error Max. 0.1% Resolution 12 bit Temperature drift Current Typ. 50 ppm/°C Max. 80 ppm/°C Temperature drift Voltage Typ. 70 ppm/°C Max. 100 ppm/°C Update cycle time 8 ms Current consumption 24 V 40 mA Current consumption 5 V 70 mA Power dissipation 1.5 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) 78 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI810 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA, 0(2)...10 V Table A-3 AI810 Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) AI810 Analog Input Module Feature Voltage supervision Internal power supply Fusing of transmitter supply on MTU (TU830 max 1 AT per group) Sensor power distribution Max 1 A per connection Input filter (rise time 0-90%) 140 ms Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Module termination units TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830, TU835 or TU838 MTU keying code AE Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.2 kg (0.44 lbs.) (1) Handled by the FCI or controller. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 79 AI810 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA, 0(2)...10 V Appendix A Specifications A.2.0.4 Block Diagram AI810 FAULT RUN WARNING L1+ ZP L1+ I1U I1I ZP L1+ I4U I4I ZP Pos LP Block Mux FCI LP # 5 VS 5V 0V L2+ I5U I5I ZP L2+ I8U I8I ZP Power_ok LP +UPInt ZP -UPInt +24 V 0 V 24 V LP L2+ ZP EM 80 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI810 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA, 0(2)...10 V A.2.0.5 Process Connections Table A-4 AI810 Process Connections TU810 (or TU814) Terminal Process Connection TU812 D-Sub 25 male Connector (1) TU830/ TU833 Terminal TU835 Terminal TU838 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ (2) L1+ (2) 0 V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- (2) L1- (2) Ch1, L1+ - - B1, B2 11 (F1) A1 (F1) Ch1, Voltage Input C1 3 C1 - B1 Ch1, Current Input B1 16 C2 12 B2 Ch1, Return (ZP) A1 - A1, A2 - A2 Ch 2, L1+ - - B3, B4 21 (F2) A3 (F2) Ch 2, Voltage Input C2 4 C3 - B3 Ch 2, Current Input B2 17 C4 22 B4 Ch 2, Return (ZP) A2 - A3, A4 - A4 Ch 3, L1+ - - B5, B6 31 (F3) A5 (F3) Ch 3, Voltage Input C3 5 C5 - B5 Ch 3, Current Input B3 18 C6 32 B6 Ch 3, Return (ZP) A3 - A5, A6 - A6 Ch 4, L1+ - - B7, B8 41 (F4) A7 (F4) Ch 4, Voltage Input C4 6 C7 - B7 Ch 4, Current Input B4 19 C8 42 B8 Ch 4, Return (ZP) A4 - A7, A8 - A8 Ch 5, L2+ - - B9, B10 51 (F5) A9 (F5) Ch 5, Voltage Input C5 7 C9 - B9 3BSE 020 924R4101 81 AI810 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA, 0(2)...10 V Appendix A Specifications Table A-4 AI810 Process Connections (Continued) TU810 (or TU814) Terminal Process Connection TU812 D-Sub 25 male Connector (1) TU830/ TU833 Terminal TU835 Terminal TU838 Terminal Ch 5, Current Input B5 20 C10 52 B10 Ch 5, Return (ZP) A5 - A9, A10 - A10 Ch 6, L2+ - - B11, B12 61 (F6) A11 (F6) Ch 6, Voltage Input C6 8 C11 - B11 Ch 6, Current Input B6 21 C12 62 B12 Ch 6, Return (ZP) A6 - A11, A12 - A12 Ch 7, L2+ - - B13, B14 71 (F7) A13 (F7) Ch 7, Voltage Input C7 9 C13 - B13 Ch 7, Current Input B7 22 C14 72 B14 Ch 7, Return (ZP) A7 - A13, A14 - A14 Ch 8, L2+ - - B15, B16 81 (F8) A15 (F8) Ch 8, Voltage Input C8 10 C15 - B15 Ch 8, Current Input B8 23 C16 82 B16 Ch 8, Return (ZP) A8 - A15, A16 - A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ (2) L2+ (2) 0 V d.c. (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (2) L2- (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 82 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI810 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA, 0(2)...10 V Figure A-2 shows the process connections for the Analog Input Module AI810 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. Process TU830/TU833 +24v Pwr. Source 0v L1+ 4 - 20mA Ch1 I 4 - 20mA Ch2 I 0 - 10V Ch3 V 2 - Wire XMTRs L1+ ZP 4 - Wire XMTRs 0 - 20mA Ch4 I ZP L2+ 0 - 20mA Ch5 I ZP L2+ 4 - 20mA 3 - Wire XMTRs Ch6 I ZP 0 - 10V L2+ Ch7 V 0 - 10V ZP L2+ Ch8 V ZP +24v Chx V = Voltage Input Chx I = Current Input 0v L1+ L1+ L1L1B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 6.3A * Fuse AI810 L1+ LL1+ I1U I1I ZP B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 L1+ I2U I2I ZP B5,B6 C5 C6 A5,A6 L1+ I3U I3I ZP B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 L1+ I4U I4I ZP L2+ I5U I5I ZP B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 L2+ I6U I6I ZP B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,B16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ I7U I7I ZP L2+ I8U I8I ZP L2+ L2+ L2L2- 6.3A * Fuse Mux. L2+ LEM * Max 1 AT in combination with AI810 Figure A-2 AI810 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 83 AI810 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA, 0(2)...10 V Appendix A Specifications Figure A-3 shows the process connections for the AI810 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Process TU810 (or TU814) +24V Pwr. Sup. 0V L1+ ZP Ch1 I C1 B1 A1 L1+ I1U I1I ZP 4 - 20mA Ch2 I C2 B2 A2 L1+ I2U I2I ZP 0 - 10V Ch3 V C3 B3 A3 L1+ I3U I3I ZP 4 - 20mA ZP ZP C4 B4 A4 0 - 20mA Ch5 I ZP C5 B5 A5 L1+ I4U I4I ZP L2+ I5U I5I ZP 4 - 20mA Ch6 I ZP C6 B6 A6 L2+ I6U I6I ZP 0 - 10V Ch7 V 0 - 10mA Ch4 V ZP 0 - 10V Ch8 V ZP Chx V = Voltage Input Chx I = Current Input L1+ L1+ L1- AI810 Pwr. Sup. 24V 0V C7 B7 A7 C8 B8 A8 L2+ L2+ L2- Mux. L2+ I7U I7I ZP L2+ I8U I8I ZP L2+ ZP EM Figure A-3 AI810 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 84 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI810 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA, 0(2)...10 V Figure A-4 shows the process connections for the AI810 when installed on a TU835 Extended MTU. Process TU835 X11 +24v 0v 4 - 20mA L1+ L1+ L1L1- L1+ X12 11 Ch1 I 12 L1+ 21 Ch2 I 22 L1+ 31 Ch3 I 32 L1+ 41 Ch4 I 42 L2+ 51 Ch5 I 52 L2+ 61 Ch6 I 62 L2+ 71 Ch7 I 72 L2+ 81 Ch8 I 82 Fn=100mA 4 - 20mA 4 - 20mA 4 - 20mA 4 - 20mA 4 - 20mA 4 - 20mA +24v F1 0v Chx I = Current Input F3 F4 X13 L2+ L2+ L2L2- L1+ L- F2 4 - 20mA AI810 F5 F6 F7 F8 L1+ I1U I1I ZP L1+ I2U I2I ZP L1+ I3U I3I ZP Mux. L1+ I4U I4I ZP L2+ I5U I5I ZP L2+ I6U I6I ZP L2+ I7U I7I ZP L2+ I8U I8I ZP L2+ LEM Figure A-4 AI810 with TU835 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 85 AI810 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA, 0(2)...10 V Appendix A Specifications Figure A-5 shows the process connections for the AI810 when installed on a TU838 Extended MTU. Process TU838 +24v 0 - 20mA Ch4 I ZP L2+ L1+ L1+ L1L1F1 A1 B1 B2 A2 F2 A3 B3 B4 A4 F3 A5 B5 B6 A6 F4 A7 B7 B8 A8 F5 A9 0 - 20mA Ch5 I ZP B9 B10 A10 Pwr. Source 0v L1+ 4 - 20mA 2 - Wire XMTRs Ch1 I L1+ 4 - 20mA Ch2 I 0 - 10V Ch3 V ZP 4 - Wire XMTRs L2+ 4 - 20mA 3 - Wire XMTRs Ch6 I ZP 0 - 10V L2+ Ch7 V 0 - 10V ZP L2+ Ch8 V ZP +24v Chx V = Voltage Input Chx I = Current Input 0v A11 B11 B12 A12 A13 B13 B14 A14 A15 B15 B16 A16 L2+ L2+ L2L2- F6 F7 F8 AI810 L1+ LL1+ I1U I1I ZP L1+ I2U I2I ZP L1+ I3U I3I ZP Mux. L1+ I4U I4I ZP L2+ I5U I5I ZP L2+ I6U I6I ZP L2+ I7U I7I ZP L2+ I8U I8I ZP L2+ LEM Figure A-5 AI810 with TU838 Extended MTU Process Connections 86 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI810 Analog Input Module, 0(4)...20 mA, 0(2)...10 V Figure A-6 shows the process connections for the AI810 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. TU812 Process Connection 1 1 UP1 14 14 UP1 2 2 ZP1 15 15 ZP1 3 3 S1 Ch1 V 16 16 S2 Ch1 I 4 4 S3 Ch2 V 17 17 S4 Ch2 I 5 5 S5 Ch3 V 18 18 S6 Ch3 I 6 6 S7 Ch4 V 19 19 S8 Ch4 I 7 7 S9 Ch5 V 20 20 S10 Ch5 I 8 8 S11 Ch6 V 21 21 S12 Ch6 I +24V L0V 9 9 S13 Ch7 V 22 22 S14 Ch7 I 10 10 S15 Ch8 V 23 23 S16 Ch8 I 11 11 UP2 +24V 24 24 UP2 12 12 ZP2 25 25 ZP2 13 13 EM AI810 L1+ 0V L1+ I1U I1I ZP L1+ I2U I2I ZP L1+ I3U I3I ZP Mux. L1+ I4U I4I ZP L2+ I5U I5I ZP L2+ I6U I6I ZP L2+ I7U I7I ZP L2+ I8U I8I ZP L2+ L- EM EM Chx V = Voltage Input Chx I = Current Input Figure A-6 AI810 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 87 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V (4...20 mA, 2...10 V, 1...5 V) A.3 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V (4...20 mA, 2...10 V, 1...5 V) A.3.0.1 Features • 4 channels for -20...+20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, -10...+10 V, 0...10 V, 2...10 V, -5...+5 V, 0...5 V, 1...5 V d.c. bipolar differential inputs • One group of 4 channels isolated from ground • Configurable on a per channel basis • 14 Bit resolution plus sign • Input shunt resistors protected to 30 V d.c. • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting • The input withstand HART communication. A.3.0.2 Description The AI820 Analog Input Module has 4 differential, bipolar current/voltage inputs. Each channel can be either a voltage or current input. F R W 1 2 3 4 AI820 ±20 mA, ±10 V Diff The current inputs can withstand an accidental maximum normal mode 30 V d.c. connection. To protect the current input circuit against dangerous input levels, that is, by accidentally connecting a 24 V source, the resistor rating of the 250Ω current sense resistors is about 5 Watts. This is intended only to temporarily protect one channel at a time. The module distributes the external transmitter supply to each channel. This adds a simple connection (with extended MTUs) to distribute the supply to external 2 wire transmitters. There is no current limiting on the transmitter power terminals. All 4 channels are isolated from the ModuleBus in one group. Power to the input stages is converted from the 24 V on the ModuleBus. 88 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any diagnostic condition is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 24 V process voltage inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of 24 V power supply to the field devices. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. 3BSE 020 924R4101 89 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V (4...20 mA, 2...10 V, 1...5 V) A.3.0.3 Technical Data Table A-5 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C AI820 Analog Input Module Feature 90 Number of channels 4 Type of input Bipolar differential Measurement ranges (nominal) -20...+20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA (1), -10...+10 V, 0...10 V, 2...10 V (1), -5...+5 V, 0...5 V, 1...5 V (1) d.c. Over/under range ± 15% Input impedance (at voltage input) 200kΩ +/− 25% Common mode 800kΩ +/− 25% Normal mode Input impedance (at current input) 250 Ω Maximum field cable length 600 meters, (656 yd.) Max. Differential d.c. input (Fault) 30 V Common mode voltage input 50 V d.c. CMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz 80 dB (>60 dB d.c.) NMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz 33 dB Error Max. 0,1% Resolution 14 bit plus sign Temperature drift, Current Max.50 ppm/°C Temperature drift, Voltage Max.70 ppm/°C Update cycle time (all four channels) <26 ms Current consumption 24 V 70 mA Current consumption 5 V 80 mA Power dissipation 1.7W 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V Table A-5 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) AI820 Analog Input Module Feature Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) Voltage supervision Internal process supply Input filter (rise time) 40 ms Fusing of transmitter supply on Extended MTU Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Module termination units TU810, TU812, TU814 or TU830 MTU keying code BB Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.2 kg (0.44 lbs.) (1) Handled by the FCI or controller. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 91 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V (4...20 mA, 2...10 V, 1...5 V) A.3.0.4 Block Diagram AI820 FAULT RUN WARNING L1+ L1L1+ L1- Pos I1U+ I1I+ I1- AMP + LPF Block PGA CLK +/- Mux MBI-2 G=1/2 L1+ L1- 5 VS I2U+ I2IB I2I+ I2- CPU AMP + LPF I3U+ I3IB I3I+ I3- Data +/- # ModuleBus I1IB AMP + LPF 5V 0V Power_ok +UPInt ZP -UPInt +24 V +0 V 24 L2+ L2- I4U+ I4IB I4I+ I4L2+ L2L2+ L2- AMP + LPF ZP EM 92 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V A.3.0.5 Process Connections Table A-6 AI820 Process Connections TU812 D-Sub 25 male Connector(1) TU810 (or TU814) Terminal Process Connection TU830/TU833 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ 1, 14 L1+ 0 V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- Ch1, L1+ - - B1, B2 3 C1 Ch1V, Voltage Input + C1 (2) B1 16 C2 Ch1, L1- A1 - A1, A2 Ch 1, L1+ - - B3, B4 C2 4 C3 B2 17 C4 Ch 1, L1- A2 - A3, A4 Ch 2, L1+ - - B5, B6 5 C5 Ch1IB Ch 1I, Current Input + Ch 1-, Return - (2) Ch 2V, Voltage Input + C3 (2) B3 18 C6 Ch 2, L1- A3 - A5, A6 Ch 2, L1+ - - B7, B8 C4 6 C7 B4 19 C8 Ch 2, L1- A4 - A7, A8 Ch 3, L2+ - - B9, B10 7 C9 Ch 2IB Ch 2I, Current Input + Ch 2-, Return - (2) Ch 3V, Voltage Input + C5 3BSE 020 924R4101 93 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V (4...20 mA, 2...10 V, 1...5 V) Table A-6 AI820 Process Connections (Continued) TU812 D-Sub 25 male Connector(1) TU810 (or TU814) Terminal Process Connection TU830/TU833 Terminal Ch 3IB (2) B5 20 C10 Ch 3, L2- A5 - A9, A10 Ch 3, L2+ - - B11, B12 Ch 3I, Current Input + C6 8 C11 Ch 3-, Return - (2) B6 21 C12 Ch 3, L2- A6 - A11, A12 Ch 4, L2+ - - B13, B14 Ch 4V, Voltage Input + C7 9 C13 Ch 4IB (2) B7 22 C14 Ch 4, L2- A7 - A13, A14 Ch 4, L2+ - - B15, B16 Ch 4I, Current Input + C8 10 C15 Ch 4-, Return - (2) B8 23 C16 Ch 4, L2- A8 - A15, A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ 11, 24 L2+ 0 V d.c. (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. (2) When connect current signal current bridge must be connected to the voltage Input. If 2-wire transmitter also connect Return- to L1- or L2-. 94 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V Figure A-7 shows the process connections for the Differential Analog Input Module AI820 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. L1+ I1I+ I1L1- B5,B6 C5 C6 A5,A6 L1+ I2U+ I2IB L1- B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 L1+ I2I+ I2L1- B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 L2+ I3U+ I3IB L2- Ch3 I Ch3 - B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 L2+ I3I+ I3L2- CH4 V B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 L2+ I4U+ I4IB L2- B15,B16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ I4I+ I4L2- 4 - 20mA L1+ Ch2V Ch2IB Ch2 I Ch2L1Ch3V Ch3IB 0 - 20mA 4 Wire XTMR 0 - 10V L2+ L2+24v Chx V = Voltage Input Chx I = Current Input L1- B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 Ch1 - 3 Wire XTMR L1+ L1+ I1U+ I1IB L1- 4 Wire XTMR Pwr. Source Fuse B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 Ch1 V 2 Wire XTMR 6.3A 0v L2+ L2+ L2L2- 6.3A Fuse 250W Compensation 250W 0v 0 - 10V L1+ L1+ L1L1- Diff. Amp + LPF 250W +24v AI820 Diff. Amp + LPF 250W Pwr. Source TU830/TU833 Diff. Amp + LPF 250W Process Diff. Amp + LPF 250W Compensation 250W Compensation 250W Compensation L2+ LPF = Low Pass Filter L2EM Figure A-7 AI820 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 95 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V (4...20 mA, 2...10 V, 1...5 V) Figure A-8 shows the process connections for the AI820 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Local Gnd. 0 - 10V L1+ L1+ L1- L1+ I1U+ I1IB L1- C2 B2 A2 L1+ I1I+ I1L1- C3 B3 A3 L1+ I2U+ I2IB L1- C4 B4 A4 L1+ I2I+ I2L1- C5 B5 A5 L2+ I3U+ I3IB L2- Ch3 I Ch3 - C6 B6 A6 L2+ I3I+ I3L2- CH4 V C7 B7 A7 L2+ I4U+ I4IB L2- C8 B8 A8 L2+ I4I+ I4L2- 4 Wire XTMR Ch1 4 - 20mA Ch2V Ch2IB Ch2 I Ch2 L1- Pwr. Source Ch3V Ch3IB 0 - 20mA 4 Wire XTMR 0 - 10V 3 Wire XTMR Chx V = Voltage Input Chx I = Current Input Ch4 - +24v 0v L1- C1 B1 A1 Ch1 V 2 Wire XTMR L1+ L2+ L2+ L2- 250W Compensation 250W Compensation 250W Compensation 250W Compensation L2+ L2- 250W Pwr. Source AI820 250W TU810 (or TU814) 250W +24V 0V 250W Process Diff. Amp + LPF Diff. Amp + LPF Diff. Amp + LPF Diff. Amp + LPF LPF = Low Pass Filter EM Figure A-8 AI820 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 96 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V Figure A-9 shows the process connections for the AI820 when installed on a TU812. TU812 2 ZP1 15 15 ZP1 3 L1+ 0V L1- 3 S1 Ch1 V 16 16 S2 Ch1 IB L1+ I1U+ I1IB L1- 4 4 S3 Ch1 I 17 17 S4 Ch1 R 5 5 S5 Ch2 V 18 18 S6 Ch2 IB 6 6 S7 19 19 S8 Ch2 R 7 7 S9 Ch3 V 20 20 S10 Ch3 IB Ch2 I L1+ I1I+ I1L1L1+ I2U+ I2IB L1- L2+ I3U+ I3IB L2- 8 S11 21 21 S12 Ch3 R 9 9 S13 Ch4 V 22 22 S14 Ch4 IB 10 10 S15 Ch4 I 23 23 S16 Ch4 R 11 11 UP2 +24V 24 24 UP2 12 12 ZP2 25 25 ZP2 L2+ 13 13 EM L2- 0V Diff. Amp + LPF Diff. Amp + LPF 250W Compensation L2+ I3I+ I3L2L2+ I4U+ I4IB L2- Diff. Amp + LPF 250W Compensation L1+ I2I+ I2L1- 8 Ch3 I 250W Compensation 250W 14 UP1 2 250W 14 +24V 250W 1 UP1 250W Compensation L2+ I4I+ I4L2- 250W Process Connection 1 AI820 Diff. Amp + LPF LPF = Low Pass Filter EM Figure A-9 AI820 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 97 AI825 Galvanic Isolated Analog Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.4 AI825 Galvanic Isolated Analog Input Module A.4.0.1 Features • 4 channels individually galvanic isolated inputs for +20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, +10 V, 0...10 V, 2...10 V • 14 Bit resolution plus sign • Input shunt resistors protected to 30 V d.c. • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting • The input withstand HART communication. A.4.0.2 Description The AI825 Analog Input Module has 4 individually galvanic isolated, bipolar current/voltage inputs. Each channel can be either a voltage or current input. The module has a direct current input that withstand up to 6.3 V and a over voltage protected current input that withstand up to +30 V d.c. The current is limited by a PTC resistor. Power to the input stages is converted from the 24 V on the ModuleBus. Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any diagnostic condition is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. 98 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI825 Galvanic Isolated Analog Input Module Three different types of MTUs can be used; TU831 Extended MTU, TU811 or TU813 Compact MTU. The TU813 Compact MTU has crimped snap-in connectors for connection to the process. 3BSE 020 924R4101 99 AI825 Galvanic Isolated Analog Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.4.0.3 Technical Data Table A-7 AI825 Galvanic Isolated Input Module Specifications at 25°C AI825 Analog Input Module Feature Number of channels 4 Type of input Galvanic isolated channel to channel channel to ground Measurement ranges (nominal) -20...+20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, -10...+10 V, 0...10 V, 2...10 V d.c. Over/under range ± 15% Input impedance at voltage input (I x U) 10 MΩ Input impedance at current input (I x I) 50 Ω Over voltage protected current input (I x IP) 50 Ω + 125 Ω Maximum field cable length 600 meters, (656 yd.) Max. Differential d.c. input (Fault) Voltage input Over voltage protected current input Current input 100 30 V 30 V 6.3 V CMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz 120 dB NMRR >40 dB at 50 Hz, >55 dB at 60 Hz Error Max. 0,1% Resolution 14 bit plus sign Temperature drift Max 57 ppm/°C (± 20 mA) Max 34 ppm/°C (± 10 V) Max 78 ppm/°C (0...20 mA) Max 47 ppm/°C (0...10 V) Update cycle time (all four channels) <10 ms 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI825 Galvanic Isolated Analog Input Module Table A-7 AI825 Galvanic Isolated Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) AI825 Analog Input Module Feature Current consumption 24 V Typ 90 mA, max 110 mA Current consumption 5 V Typ 70 mA, max 100 mA Power dissipation Typ 2.5 W, max 3.2 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(1) Voltage supervision Internal supplies Input filter (0 to 90%) 130 ms at current input 115 ms at voltage input Module termination units TU811, TU813 or TU831 MTU keying code DA Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 250 V Dielectric test voltage between channels 1900 V d.c. channel to ground and MB24V 3250 V d.c. MB24V to ground 720 V d.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.22 kg (0.48 lbs.) (1) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 101 AI825 Galvanic Isolated Analog Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.4.0.4 Block Diagram AI825 FAULT RUN WARNING Pos I1U I1I ZP1 AMP + LPF Block # CLK +/MBI-2 5 VS I2U I2IP I2I ZP2 Data +/- ModuleBus I1IP CPU AMP + LPF 5V 0V # Power_ok I3U I3IP I3I ZP3 AMP + LPF # Ch1 +24 V Ch2 I4U I4IP I4I ZP4 +0 V 24 AMP + LPF Ch3 # Ch4 EM 102 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI825 Galvanic Isolated Analog Input Module A.4.0.5 Process Connections Table A-8 AI825 Process Connections TU811 or TU813 Terminal Process Connection TU831 Terminal Ch1V, Voltage Input + B1 B1 Ch1 IP, Current input+ protected C2 B2 Ch 1I, Current Input + A2 A2 Ch 1-, Return - (ZP1) A1 A1 Ch 2V, Voltage Input + B3 B3 Ch2 IP, Current input+ protected C4 B4 Ch 2I, Current Input + A4 A4 Ch 2-, Return - (ZP2) A3 A3 Ch 3V, Voltage Input + B5 B5 Ch3 IP, Current input+ protected C6 B6 Ch 3I, Current Input + A6 A6 Ch 3-, Return - (ZP3) A5 A5 Ch 4V, Voltage Input + B7 B7 Ch4 IP, Current input+ protected C8 B8 Ch 4I, Current Input + A8 A8 Ch 4-, Return - (ZP4) A7 A7 3BSE 020 924R4101 103 AI825 Galvanic Isolated Analog Input Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-7 shows the process connections for the Galvanic Isolated Analog Input Module AI825 when installed on a TU811 or TU813 Compact MTU. Process +10 V Ch1 V Ch1 ZP +20 mA Ch2 IP Ch2 ZP AI825 B1 I1U C2 I1IP A2 I1I A1 ZP1 B3 I2U C4 I2IP A4 I2I A3 ZP2 B5 I3U C6 I13IP Ch3 I A6 I3I Ch3 ZP A5 ZP3 B7 I4U C8 I4IP 4-20 mA Ch4 I A8 I4I Ch4 ZP A7 ZP4 +20 mA - TU811/TU813 + EM Figure A-10 AI825 with TU811 or TU813 Compact MTU Process Connections 104 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI825 Galvanic Isolated Analog Input Module Figure A-8 shows the process connections for the AI825 when installed on a TU831 Extended MTU. Process +10 V Ch1 V AI825 B1 I1U B2 I1IP A2 I1I Ch1 ZP A1 ZP1 B3 I2U +20 mA Ch2 IP B4 I2IP A4 I2I A3 ZP2 B5 I3U B6 I13IP Ch3 I A6 I3I Ch3 ZP A5 ZP3 Ch2 ZP +20 mA - TU831 + B7 I4U B8 I4IP 4-20 mA Ch4 I A8 I4I Ch4 ZP A7 ZP4 EM Figure A-11 AI825 with TU831 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 105 AI830 RTD Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.5 AI830 RTD Input Module A.5.0.1 Features • 8 channels for RTD (Pt100, Cu10, Ni100 and Ni120 and resistor) inputs F R • 3-wire connection to RTDs • 14 Bit resolution • Inputs are monitored for open-circuit, shortcircuit and has a input grounded sensor 2 • EMC protection 3 • DIN rail mounting. W 1 A.5.0.2 Description The AI830 RTD Input Module has 8 channels for measurement of temperature with resistive elements (RTDs). With 3-wire connections. All the RTDs must be isolated from ground. 4 5 6 7 8 The AI830 can be used with Pt100, Cu10, Ni100, Ni120 or resistive sensors. Linearization and conversion of the temperature to Centigrade or Fahrenheit is performed on the module. Every channel can be individually configured. AI830 RTD The MainsFreq parameter is used to set mains frequency filter cycle time. This will give a notch filter at the frequency specified (50 Hz or 60 Hz). Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state, Error state or Not configured state. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. 106 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI830 RTD Input Module The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU and the TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU enables three wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. 3BSE 020 924R4101 107 AI830 RTD Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.5.0.3 Technical Data Table A-9 AI830 RTD Input Module Specifications at 25°C AI830 RTD Input Module Feature Number of channels 8 Type of input 3-wire RTD: Pt100, Cu10, Ni100, Ni120 and resistive potentiometer Measurement range See Table A-10 Maximum field cable resistance 55 Ω Error dependent of the field cable resistance Rerr = R x (0.005 + ∆R/100) Rerr =Error in ohm Terr°C = Rerr / (R0 x TCR) Terr°F = Terr°C x 1.8 R =Wire resistance ∆R =Difference in % between resistance in field cables, see Figure A-12. CMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz >120 dB(1) NMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz >60 dB Error (IEC 51-1)(2) See Table A-10 Resolution See Table A-10 Temperature drift See Table A-10 Update cycle time 150 ms + n x 95 ms (3) Current consumption 24 V 50 mA Current consumption 5 V 70 mA Power dissipation 1.6 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(4) Supervision 108 Open-circuit, short-circuit(5), reference channel, internal power supply 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI830 RTD Input Module Table A-9 AI830 RTD Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) AI830 RTD Input Module Feature Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814 or TU830 MTU keying code AF Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.22 kg (0.49 lbs.) At 10 Ω load, e.g. Cu 10. CMMR is >80 dB at <400 Ω load and >110 dB at 100 Ω. Without error dependent of the field cable resistance n=Number of active channels 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. (5) For Cu10, not short circuit. (1) (2) (3) (4) R1 Pt100 R2 AI830 ∆R=Difference between R1 and R2 R1, R2, Rzp=Field cable resistance Rzp Figure A-12 Error dependency of the field cable resistance 3BSE 020 924R4101 109 AI830 RTD Input Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-10 AI830 Signal Range Temperature Range Sensor Type (1) Max Error 50 Hz 60 Hz Resolution 50 Hz 60 Hz MaxTemp Drift 0.095°C 0.11°C 0.025°C 0.030°C 0.0017°C/°C Pt100(1) 0.17°F 0.19°F 0.046°F 0.055°F 0.003°F/°F -200...250°C Pt100(1) 0.14°C 0.15°C 0.026°C 0.031°C 0.0025°C/°C -328...482°F Pt100(1) 0.25°F 0.27°F 0.046°F 0.055°F 0.0045°F/°F -200...850°C (1) 0.22°C 0.24°C 0.056°C 0.067°C 0.005°C/°C -328...1562°F Pt100(1) 0.39°F 0.43°F 0.10°F 0.12°F 0.009°F/°F -60...180°C Ni100(2) 0.10°C 0.12°C 0.031°C 0.037°C 0.0021°C/°C -76...356°F Ni100(2) 0.19°F 0.21°F 0.056°F 0.067°F 0.0038°F/°F -80...260°C Ni120 (3) 0.27°C 0.29°C 0.022°C 0.026°C 0.0029°C/°C -112...500°F Ni120(3) 0.49°F 0.51°F 0.039°F 0.046°F 0.0053°F/°F -100...260°C Cu10(4) 0.60°C 0.69°C 0.26°C 0.31°C 0.024°C/°C -148...500°F Cu10(4) 1.1°F 1.3°F 0.46°F 0.56°F 0.0043°F/°F 0...400 Ω Resistor 0.083 Ω 0.091 Ω 0.020 Ω 0.024 Ω 0.0020 Ω/°C 0...400 Ω Resistor 0.083 Ω 0.091 Ω 0.020 Ω 0.024 Ω 0.0036 Ω/°F -80...80°C Pt100 -112...176°F Pt100 (1) According to IEC 751, TCR = 0.003850 (2) According to DIN 43760, TCR = 0.00617 (3) According to MIL-T-24388C, TCR = 0. 00672 Ro = 120 Ω (MINCO) (4) According to TCR = 0.00427, R25 = 10 Ω (MINCO) 110 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI830 RTD Input Module A.5.0.4 Block Diagram AI830 FAULT RUN WARNING ZP Pos LP Block Mux I4+ I4ZP CPU MBI # LP 5VS 5V I5+ I5ZP I8+ I8ZP 0V LP LP Power_ok +12V ZP -12V ModuleBus I1+ I1ZP +24 V 0 V 24 V Ref:s ZP EM 3BSE 020 924R4101 111 AI830 RTD Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.5.0.5 Process Connections Table A-11 AI830 Process Connections 112 TU812 D-Sub 25 male Connector (1) TU810 (or TU814) Terminal Process Connection TU830/TU833 Terminal - L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) 0 V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) - - - B1, B2 Ch1, + Input C1 3 C1 Ch1, - Input B1 16 C2 Ch1, Return (ZP) A1 - A1, A2 - - - B3, B4 Ch 2, + Input C2 4 C3 Ch 2, - Input B2 17 C4 Ch 2, Return (ZP) A2 - A3, A4 - - - B5, B6 Ch 3, + Input C3 5 C5 Ch 3, - Input B3 18 C6 Ch 3, Return (ZP) A3 - A5, A6 - - - B7, B8 Ch 4, + Input C4 6 C7 Ch 4, - Input B4 19 C8 Ch 4, Return (ZP) A4 - A7, A8 - - - B9, B10 Ch 5, + Input C5 7 C9 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI830 RTD Input Module Table A-11 AI830 Process Connections (Continued) TU812 D-Sub 25 male Connector (1) TU810 (or TU814) Terminal Process Connection TU830/TU833 Terminal Ch 5, - Input B5 20 C10 Ch 5, Return (ZP) A5 - A9, A10 - - - B11, B12 Ch 6, + Input C6 8 C11 Ch 6, - Input B6 21 C12 Ch 6, Return (ZP) A6 - A11, A12 - - - B13, B14 Ch 7, + Input C7 9 C13 Ch 7, - Input B7 22 C14 Ch 7, Return (ZP) A7 - A13, A14 - - - B15, B16 Ch 8, + Input C8 10 C15 Ch 8, - Input B8 23 C16 Ch 8, Return (ZP) A8 - A15, A16 - L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) 0 V dc (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 3BSE 020 924R4101 113 AI830 RTD Input Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-13 shows the process connections for the RTD Input Module AI830 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. Process TU830/TU833 0V 6.3A Fuse ZP Ch1+ Ch1ZP B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 I1+ I1ZP Ch2+ Ch2ZP B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 I2+ I2ZP Ch3+ Ch3ZP B5,B6 C5 C6 A5,A6 I3+ I3ZP T T T T Ch5+ Ch5ZP B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 Ch6+ Ch6ZP B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 Ch4+ Ch4ZP T T T Ch7+ Ch7ZP T L1+ L1+ L1L1- AI830 Ch8+ Ch8ZP 0V I4+ I4ZP I5+ I5ZP I6+ I6ZP B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,B16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ L2+ L2L2- I7+ I7ZP I8+ I8+ ZP 6.3A Fuse ZP EM Note: No external power supply should be connected Figure A-13 AI830 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 114 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI830 RTD Input Module Figure A-14 shows the process connections for the AI830 when installed on a TU810 of TU814 Compact MTU. Process TU810 (or TU814) 0V L1+ L1+ L1- AI830 ZP T Ch1+ Ch1ZP C1 B1 A1 I1+ I1ZP Ch2+ Ch2ZP C2 B2 A2 I2+ I2ZP Ch3+ Ch3ZP C3 B3 A3 I3+ I3ZP Ch4+ Ch4ZP C4 B4 A4 I4+ I4ZP Ch5+ Ch5ZP C5 B5 A5 I5+ I5ZP Ch6+ Ch6ZP C6 B6 A6 I6+ I6ZP Ch7+ Ch7ZP C7 B7 A7 I7+ I7ZP Ch8+ Ch8ZP C8 B8 A8 I8+ I8+ ZP L2+ L2+ L2- ZP T T T T T T T 0V EM Note: No external power supply should be connected Figure A-14 AI830 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 115 AI830 RTD Input Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-15 shows the connections for the AI830 when installed on a TU812. TU812 Process Connection 1 1 UP1 14 14 UP1 2 2 ZP1 15 15 ZP1 3 3 S1 Ch1 + 16 16 S2 Ch1 - 4 4 S3 Ch2 + 17 17 S4 Ch2 - 5 5 S5 Ch3 + 18 18 S6 Ch3 - 6 6 S7 Ch4 + 19 19 S8 Ch4 - 7 7 S9 Ch5 + 20 20 S10 Ch5 - 8 8 S11 Ch6 + 21 21 S12 Ch6 - AI830 +24V 0V ZP 9 9 S13 Ch7 + 22 22 S14 Ch7 - 10 10 S15 Ch8 + 23 23 S16 Ch8 - 11 11 UP2 +24V 24 24 UP2 12 12 ZP2 25 25 ZP2 13 13 EM 0V I1+ I1ZP I2+ I2ZP I3+ I3ZP I4+ I4ZP I5+ I5ZP I6+ I6ZP I7+ I7ZP I8+ I8ZP ZP EM Figure A-15 AI830 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 116 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module A.6 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module A.6.0.1 Features • 8 differential input channels for thermocouple/mV F R • Channel 8 can be designated as the CJ-channel (4-wire Pt100 RTD) W • Variety of thermocouples with the following characteristics: B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S and T 1 • 15 Bit resolution (A/D) 3 • Inputs are monitored for wire-break open-circuit 4 • EMC protection 5 • DIN rail mounting. A.6.0.2 Description The AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module is part of the S800 I/O. It provides 8 differential input channels for Thermocouple/mV measurements. Measurement ranges configurable per channel are: -30 mV to +75 mV linear, or TC Types B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S and T. 2 6 7 8 AI835 TC/mV One of the channels (Channel 8) may be configured for “Cold Junction” (ambient) temperature measurements, thus serving as CJ-channel for Ch. 1...7. The junction temperature may be measured locally on the MTUs screw terminals, or on a connection unit distant form the device. Alternatively, a fix junction temperature for the module may be set by the user (as parameter). Channel 8 may be used in the same manner as Ch. 1...7 when no CJ-temperature measurement is needed. Each input-channel can measure a mV type of signal source (Thermocouple or linear), and may be grounded or ungrounded. 3BSE 020 924R4101 117 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Appendix A Specifications Full self-calibration is obtained by means of 0V, 50 mV and 100 ohm references, which are regularly updated. Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state, Error state or Not configured state. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU or the TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU enables three wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. 118 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module A.6.0.3 Technical Data Table A-12 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Specifications at 25°C Feature AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Number of channels 8 (Differential) Type of input -30 mV to 75 mV linear, or TC types B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S and T Measurement range See Table A-13 Input impedance > 1 MΩ CJ-temperature measurement reference 4-wire connected IEC-751/Pt100 RTD Maximum field cable length 600 meters (656 yd.) CMV between channels, max. 12 V d.c. CMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz 120 dB NMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz >60 dB(1) Resolution (A/D) 15 bits Error 0.1% Temperature drift Typ. 15 ppm/°C Max. 35 ppm/°C Filter, analog (1st order Low-pass) 10 Hz Filter (integration) 50 Hz or 60 Hz Update cycle time, max. 280 ms + n x 80 ms at 50 Hz 250 ms + n x 70 ms at 60 Hz (n = active channels) 3BSE 020 924R4101 119 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-12 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) Feature Supervision AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Module: reference channels, power supply low Channel TC: open-circuit Linear: none Pt100 (CH8): <-40°C (-40°F) and >100°C (212°F) Current consumption 24 V 50 mA Current consumption 5 V 75 mA Power dissipation 1.6 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) 120 Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Module termination units TU810, TU812, TU814 or TU830 MTU keying code BA Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Table A-12 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) Feature AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.22 kg (0.49 lbs.) (1) >40 dB at 50 Hz and 60 Hz ±1% (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 121 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-13 AI835 Range/Linearization Input Type Temperature Range TC type B (1) 44...1820oC, 111...3308oF TC type C 0...2300oC, 32...4172oF TC type E (1) -270...1000oC, -454...1832oF TC type J (1) -210...1200oC, -346...2192oF TC type K (1) -270...1372oC, -454...2501oF TC type N (1) -270...1300oC, -454...2372oF TC type R (1) -50...1768oC, -58...3214oF TC type S (1) -50...1768oC, -58...3214oF TC type T (1) -270...400oC, -454...752oF Linear range Pt100 RTD (for CJC) -30...75 mV (2) -40...100oC, -40...212oF (1) Linearization per IEC 584-1 1995, and following ITS 90 requirements. (2) Sensor Type applies to Channel 8 only, for the measuring of the Cold Junction Compensation temperature. From the 11 Sensor Types above, one choice is to be selected by the user per channel. 122 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module A.6.0.4 Block Diagram AI835 Fault MB = Modulebus FIC = Full protocol module Interface Circuity MTI = Main Timer Interface SPI = Serial Peripheral Interface REFs Run Warning +CH1 -CH1 +CH2 -CH2 EMC/ LP EMC/ LP Data Differential A/D ANALOG CLK # MUX +CH7 -CH7 Amplifier CTRL (MTI) EMC/ LP ADR(SPI) +CH8 Pos(6:0) pow_ok +5V +PCJC Pt100 MB FIC (low) EMC/ LP 0V -CH8 ² +UPint ² GNDA ² -UPint ² ² -PCJC ZP EM 3BSE 020 924R4101 +24V 0V_24V 123 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.6.0.5 Process Connections Table A-14 AI835 Process Connections TU810 (or TU814) Terminal Process Connection 124 TU812 D-Sub 25 male Connector (1) TU830/TU833 Terminal Pt100, PCJC- L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) - L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) - - - B1, B2 Ch1, + Input C1 3 C1 Ch1, - Input B1 16 C2 Ch1, Return (ZP) A1 - A1, A2 - - - B3, B4 Ch 2, + Input C2 4 C3 Ch 2, - Input B2 17 C4 Ch 2, Return (ZP) A2 - A3, A4 - - - B5, B6 Ch 3, + Input C3 5 C5 Ch 3, - Input B3 18 C6 Ch 3, Return (ZP) A3 - A5, A6 - - - B7, B8 Ch 4, + Input C4 6 C7 Ch 4, - Input B4 19 C8 Ch 4, Return (ZP) A4 - A7, A8 - - - B9, B10 Ch 5, + Input C5 7 C9 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Table A-14 AI835 Process Connections (Continued) TU810 (or TU814) Terminal Process Connection TU812 D-Sub 25 male Connector (1) TU830/TU833 Terminal Ch 5, - Input B5 20 C10 Ch 5, Return (ZP) A5 - A9, A10 - - - B11, B12 Ch 6, + Input C6 8 C11 Ch 6, - Input B6 21 C12 Ch 6, Return (ZP) A6 - A11, A12 - - - B13, B14 Ch 7, + Input C7 9 C13 Ch 7, - Input B7 22 C14 Ch 7, Return (ZP) A7 - A13, A14 - - - B15, B16 Ch 8, + Input C8 10 C15 Ch 8, - Input B8 23 C16 Ch 8, Return (ZP) A8 - A15, A16 Pt100, PCJC+ L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) - L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 3BSE 020 924R4101 125 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-16 shows the process connections for the TC/mV Input Module AI835 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. Process TU830/TU833 Ch1+ Ch1Thermocouple isolated from ground PCJC- Fuse I1+ I1ZP B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 I2+ I2ZP Ch3+ Ch3- B5,B6 C5 C6 A5,A6 I3+ I3ZP Ch5+ Ch5- Ch6+ Ch6- Ch7+ Ch7Pt100 6.3A Ch2+ Ch2- Ch4+ Ch4- Thermocouple connected to ground L1+ L1+ L1L1B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 AI835 Ch8+ Ch8- B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 I4+ I4ZP I5+ I5ZP B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 I6+ I6ZP B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,B16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ L2+ L2L2- I7+ I7ZP I8+ I8+ ZP 6.3A PCJC+ Fuse EM Note: No external power supply should be connected Figure A-16 AI835 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 126 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Figure A-17 shows the process connections for the AI835 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Process TU810 (or TU814) L1+ L1+ L1- Thermocouple isolated from ground Thermocouple connected to ground Pt100 AI835 PCJC- Ch1+ Ch1- C1 B1 A1 I1+ I1ZP Ch2+ Ch2- C2 B2 A2 I2+ I2ZP Ch3+ Ch3- C3 B3 A3 I3+ I3ZP Ch4+ Ch4- C4 B4 A4 I4+ I4ZP Ch5+ Ch5- C5 B5 A5 I5+ I5ZP Ch6+ Ch6- C6 B6 A6 I6+ I6ZP Ch7+ Ch7- C7 B7 A7 I7+ I7ZP Ch8+ Ch8- C8 B8 A8 I8+ I8+ ZP L2+ L2+ L2- PCJC+ EM Note: No external power supply should be connected Figure A-17 AI835 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 127 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-18 shows the AI835 connections through a remote junction box. TU810 (or TU814) Process Multi-conductor (Cu) shielded cables Thermocouple connected to ground L1+ L1+ L1- Junction Box AI835 PCJC- 2 Ch1+ Ch1- C1 B1 A1 I1+ I1ZP 2 Ch2+ Ch2- C2 B2 A2 I2+ I2ZP 2 Ch3+ Ch3- C3 B3 A3 I3+ I3ZP 2 Ch4+ Ch4- C4 B4 A4 I4+ I4ZP 2 Ch5+ Ch5- C5 B5 A5 I5+ I5ZP 2 Ch6+ Ch6- C6 B6 A6 I6+ I6ZP 2 Ch7+ Ch7- C7 B7 A7 I7+ I7ZP 2 Ch8+ Ch8- C8 B8 A8 I8+ I8+ ZP Thermocouple isolated from ground 2 L2+ L2+ L2- PCJC+ EM Note: No external power supply should be connected Figure A-18 AI835 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections to Remote Junction Box 128 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Figure A-19 shows the connections for the AI835 when installed on a TU812. TU812 Process Connection 1 1 14 14 AI835 PCJCPCJC- 2 2 ZP1 15 15 ZP1 3 3 S1 Ch1 + 16 16 S2 Ch1 - 4 4 S3 Ch2 + 17 17 S4 Ch2 - 5 5 S5 Ch3 + 18 18 S6 Ch3 - 6 6 S7 Ch4 + 19 19 S8 Ch4 - 7 7 S9 Ch5 + 20 20 S10 Ch5 - 8 8 S11 Ch6 + 21 21 S12 Ch6 - 0V 9 9 S13 Ch7 + 22 22 S14 Ch7 - 10 10 S15 Ch8 + 23 23 S16 Ch8 - 11 11 PCJC+ 24 24 12 12 ZP2 25 25 ZP2 13 13 EM 0V I1+ I1ZP I2+ I2ZP I3+ I3ZP I4+ I4ZP I5+ I5ZP I6+ I6ZP I7+ I7ZP I8+ I8ZP PCJC+ EM EM Figure A-19 AI835 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 129 AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.7 AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module A.7.0.1 Features • 8 differential input channels for thermocouple/mV. • The module can be used in both single and redundant applications. • A separate channel is used as CJ-channel (4-wire Pt100 RTD) • Variety of thermocouples with the following characteristics: B, C, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U • 16 Bit resolution (A/D converter) • Inputs are monitored for wire-break open-circuit • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. A.7.0.2 Description The AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module is part of the S800 I/O. It provides 8 differential input channels for Thermocouple/mV measurements. Measurement ranges configurable per channel are: -30 mV to +75 mV linear, or TC Types B, C, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U. A separate channel is used for “Cold Junction” (ambient) temperature measurements, thus serving as CJ-channel for Ch. 1...8. The junction temperature may be measured locally on the MTUs screw terminals, or on a connection unit distant form the device. Alternatively, a fix junction temperature for the module may be set by the user (as parameter) or a junction temperature set by the application. Each input-channel can measure a mV type of signal source (Thermocouple or linear), and may be grounded or ungrounded. 130 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Full self-calibration is obtained by means of 0V and 30 mV references, which are regularly updated. Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state, Error state or Not configured state. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. On each channel there is a Fault (Red) LED that indicate channel error. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master or controller after power is applied. Three different types of MTUs can be used. In single applications TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. In redundant applications TU842 for horizontal mounting and TU843 for vertical mounting. 3BSE 020 924R4101 131 AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.7.0.3 Technical Data Table A-15 AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Specifications at 25°C Feature AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Number of channels 8 (Differential) Type of input -30 mV to 75 mV linear, or TC types B, C, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U Measurement range See Table A-16 Input impedance > 1 MΩ CJ-temperature measurement reference 4-wire connected IEC-751/Pt100 RTD 132 Maximum field cable length 600 meters (656 yd.) or max. 500 Ω CMV between channels, max. 5 V d.c. CMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz 100 dB NMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz >40 dB Resolution (A/D converter) 16 bits Error <0.1% Temperature drift Typ. 10 ppm/°C Max. 25 ppm/°C Filter, analog (1st order Low-pass) 1.1 kHz Filter (integration) 50 Hz or 60 Hz Update cycle time, max. 320 ms + n x 80 ms at 50 Hz 267 ms + n x 67 ms at 60 Hz (n = active channels) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Table A-15 AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) Feature Supervision AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Module error if: reference channels outside limits, power supply low Channel error if: open-circuit, out of range <-40°C (-40°F) and >100°C (212°F) (only Cold Junction channel) Linear: none Current consumption 24 V 50 mA Current consumption 5 V 60 mA Power dissipation 1.5 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(1) Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Module termination units, single applications TU830 Module termination unit, redundant application TU842 and TU843 MTU keying code B, A Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector 3BSE 020 924R4101 133 AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-15 AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) Feature AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.157 kg (0.35 lbs.) (1) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 134 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Table A-16 AI843 Range/Linearization Input Type Temperature Range TC type B (1) 44...1820oC, 111...3308oF TC type C 0...2300oC, 32...4172oF TC type D 0...2300oC, 32...4172oF TC type E (1) -270...1000oC, -454...1832oF TC type J (1) -210...1200oC, -346...2192oF TC type K (1) -270...1372oC, -454...2501oF TC type L -200...900oC, -328...1652oF TC type N (1) -270...1300oC, -454...2372oF TC type R (1) -50...1768oC, -58...3214oF TC type S (1) -50...1768oC, -58...3214oF TC type T (1) -270...400oC, -454...752oF TC type U -200...600oC, -328...1112oF Linear range -30...75 mV Pt100 RTD (for CJC) (2) -40...100oC, -40...212oF (1) Linearization per IEC 584-1 1995, and following ITS 90 requirements. (2) Sensor Type applies to Cold Junction channel only, for the measuring of the Cold Junction Compensation temperature. From the 11 Sensor Types above, one choice is to be selected by the user per channel. 3BSE 020 924R4101 135 AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.7.0.4 Block Diagram AI843 Fault (F) Run (R) Warning (W) +CH1 -CH1 Ch 1 Fault (F1) Ch 2 Fault (F2) Ch 8 Fault (F8) EMC/LP MUX +CH2 -CH2 EMC/LP # Data Pos (0...6) ModuleBus CLK MCU ASIC +5V 0V MUX # +CH8 -CH8 S+ + S- 136 24V 0V-24V EMC/LP EMC/LP CJC 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module A.7.0.5 Process Connections Table A-17 AI843 Process Connections TU830, TU833, TU842, TU843 Terminal Process Connection 3BSE 020 924R4101 - L1+ (2) - L1- (2) PCJC+ B1 Ch1, + Input C1 Ch1, - Input C2 Ch1, Return (ZP) A1, A2 ICJC+ B2 ICJC- B3 Pref B4 Ch 2, + Input C3 Ch 2, - Input C4 Ch 2, Return (ZP) A3, A4 PCJC- B5 - B6 Ch 3, + Input C5 Ch 3, - Input C6 Ch 3, Return (ZP) A5, A6 - B7, B8 Ch 4, + Input C7 Ch 4, - Input C8 137 AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-17 AI843 Process Connections (Continued) TU830, TU833, TU842, TU843 Terminal Process Connection 138 Ch 4, Return (ZP) A7, A8 - B9, B10 Ch 5, + Input C9 Ch 5, - Input C10 Ch 5, Return (ZP) A9, A10 - B11 PCJC+ B12 Ch 6, + Input C11 Ch 6, - Input C12 Ch 6, Return (ZP) A11, A12 ICJC+ B13 ICJC- B14 Ch 7, + Input C13 Ch 7, - Input C14 Ch 7, Return (ZP) A13, A14 Pref B15 PCJC- B16 Ch 8, + Input C15 Ch 8, - Input C16 Ch 8, Return (ZP) A15, A16 - L2+ (2) - L2- (2) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Figure A-20 shows the process connections for the TC/mV Input Module AI843 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. TU830/TU833 Process L1+ L1+ L1L1- Fuse PCJC+ ICJC+ I1+ I1ZP B3 B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 ICJCPref I2+ I2ZP PCJC- Ch3+ Ch3- B5 B6 C5 C6 A5,A6 Ch4+ Ch4- B7 B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 I4+ I4ZP B9 B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 I5+ I5ZP B11 B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 PCJC+ I6+ I6ZP B13 B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 ICJC+ ICJCI7+ I7ZP B15 B16 C15 C16 A15,A16 Pref PCJCI8+ I8+ ZP Thermocouple isolated from ground Ch2+ Ch2- Ch5+ Ch5- Ch6+ Ch6- Pt100 Ch7+ Ch7- Ref100 Ch8+ Ch8- Note: No external power supply should be connected AI843 B1 B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 Ch1+ Ch1- Thermocouple connected to ground 6.3A L2+ L2+ L2L2- I3+ I3ZP 6.3A Fuse EM Figure A-20 AI843 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 139 AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-21 shows the process connections for the TC/mV Input Module AI843 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. TU830/TU833 Process Multi-conductor (Cu) shielded cables Thermocouple connected to ground L1+ L1+ L1L1- Junction Box 2 Ch1+ Ch1- 6.3A AI843 Fuse B1 B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 PCJC+ ICJC+ I1+ I1ZP B3 B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 ICJC+ Pref I2+ I2ZP PCJC- 2 Ch2+ Ch2- 2 Ch3+ Ch3- B5 B6 C5 C6 A5,A6 2 Ch4+ Ch4- B7 B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 I4+ I4ZP 2 Ch5+ Ch5- B9 B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 I5+ I5ZP 2 Ch6+ Ch6- B11 B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 B13 B14 PCJC+ I6+ I6ZP ICJC+ ICJC- 2 Ch7+ Ch7- C13 C14 A13,A14 I7+ I7ZP B15 B16 C15 C16 A15,A16 Pref PCJCI8+ I8+ ZP Pt100 Ref100 2 Thermocouple isolated from ground Ch8+ Ch8- I3+ I3ZP 6.3A Note: No external power supply should be connected L2+ L2+ L2L2- Fuse EM Figure A-21 AI843 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections to Remote Junction Box 140 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI843 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Figure A-22 shows the process connections for the Thermocouple/mV Input Module AI843 when installed on a TU842 or TU843 Redundant MTU. Process Ch1+ Ch1Thermocouple isolated from ground Ch2+ Ch2- Ch3+ Ch3- Ch4+ Ch4- Ch5+ Ch5Thermocouple connected to ground Ch6+ Ch6Pt100 Ch7+ Ch7Ref100 Ch8+ Ch8- TU842/TU843 L1+ L1+ L1L1B1 B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 B3 B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 B5 B6 C5 C6 A5,A6 B7 B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9 B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 B11 B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 B13 B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15 B16 C15 C16 A15,A16 AI843 PCJC+ ICJC+ I1+ I1ZP ICJCPref I2+ I2ZP PCJCI3+ I3ZP I4+ I4ZP I5+ I5ZP PCJC+ I6+ I6ZP ICJC+ ICJCI7+ I7ZP Pref PCJCI8+ I8+ ZP L2+ L2+ L2L2- EM AI843 PCJC+ ICJC+ I1+ I1ZP Pref PCJCI8+ I8+ ZP Note: No external power supply should be connected EM Figure A-22 AI843 with TU842 or TU843 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 141 AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant Appendix A Specifications A.8 AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant A.8.0.1 Features • 8 channels for 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 0...5 V or 1...5 V d.c., single ended unipolar inputs • Single or redundant operation • 1 group of 8 channels isolated from ground • 12 Bit resolution • Field power distribution • Advanced on-board diagnostics • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting • HART pass-through communication F R W A.8.0.2 Description The AI845 Analog Input Module for single or redundant applications. The module has 8 channels. Each channel can be either a voltage or current input. AI845 The voltage and current input is able to withstand an over or undervoltage of at least 11 V d.c. Input resistances are, for voltage > 10 M ohm and for current 250 ohm. The EMC protection is placed on the module. 0/4....20mA 0...5V 0...20mA, HART The module distributes the external transmitter supply to each channel. This adds a simple connection to distribute the supply to 2- or 3-wire transmitters. The transmitter power is supervised and current limited. The module perform self-diagnostic cyclically. Module diagnostics include: • 142 External power supply, Transmitter power and External shunt error. Error in these will be reported as External channel error. 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant • Low Pass Filter, Multiplexer and Test channels. Error in these will be reported as Internal channel error. • Analog Read Back, Reference Voltage, Internal Power Supply, Checksum, Watchdog and Memory. Error in these will be reported as Module Error. All eight channels are isolated from the ModuleBus in one group. Power to the input stages is converted from the 24 V on the ModuleBus. Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The module has HART pass-through functionality. Only point to point communication is supported. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. Five different types of MTUs can be used for single applications. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 24 V process voltage inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of 24 V power supply to the field devices. The extended MTU, TU835, and TU838 provides a fuse (3 A max.) per channel for process power out. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. Two types of MTUs can be used for redundant applications, one for mounting on a horizontal DIN rail and one for mounting on a vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 143 AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant Appendix A Specifications A.8.0.3 Technical Data Table A-18 AI845 Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C AI845 Analog Input Module Feature Number of channels 8 Type of input Unipolar single ended Measurement range 0...20 mA, 0...5 V, 4... 20 mA, 1... 5V Over range +15% Input impedance (at voltage input) 10 MΩ Input impedance (at current input) (including PTC) 250 Ω Maximum field cable length 600 meters, (656 yd.) Voltage input, maximum non-destructive 11 V d.c. NMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz >40 dB Error Max. 0.1% Resolution 12 bit Temperature drift Max. 50 ppm/°C Update cycle time 10 ms Current consumption 24 V (ModuleBus) 50 mA 144 Current consumption 5 V (ModuleBus) 100 mA Current consumption 24 V (external) 150 mA 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant Table A-18 AI845 Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) AI845 Analog Input Module Feature Power dissipation 3.5 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(1) Transmitter power: voltage current limit Supervision 24 V @ 23 mA 30 mA Module error if: analog read back, reference voltage, internal power supply, checksum, watchdog and memory error Internal channel error if: low pass filter, multiplexer and test channels error External channel error if: external power supply low, transmitter power and external shunt error Input filter (rise time 0-90%) 290 ms Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Module termination units TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830, TU835, TU838, TU844 or TU845 MTU keying code CC Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. 3BSE 020 924R4101 145 AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant Appendix A Specifications Table A-18 AI845 Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) Feature AI845 Analog Input Module Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.23 kg (0.51 lbs.) (1) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 146 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant A.8.0.4 Block Diagram AI845 R W F 24 V UP ZP UP1 T 24 V U1 I1 LP 2 x 47ms CPU MBI ZP U1 C T 24 V UP8 Mux U8 I8 ZP Mux LP 2 x 47ms U8 C 3BSE 020 924R4101 # LP 2 x 47ms HART Modem Mux LP 2 x 47ms 147 AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant Appendix A Specifications A.8.0.5 Process Connections Table A-19 AI845 Process Connections TU812 TU830/ TU810 (or TU814) D-Sub 25 male TU833 Connector (1) Terminal Terminal Process Connection TU835 Terminal TU838 Terminal TU844 TU845 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ (2) L1+ (2) L1+ 0 V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- (2) L1- (2) L1- U1 - - B1 11 (F1) A1 (F1) B1 Ch1, Voltage Input C1 3 C1 - B1 B2(2) Ch1, Current Input B1 16 C2 12 B2 B2(2) Ch1, Return (ZP) A1 - A1, A2 - A2 A1,A2 U2 - - B3 21 (F2) A3 (F2) B3 Ch 2, Voltage Input C2 4 C3 - B3 B4(2) Ch 2, Current Input B2 17 C4 22 B4 B4(2) Ch 2, Return (ZP) A2 - A3, A4 - A4 A3, A4 U3 - - B5 31 (F3) A5 (F3) B5 Ch 3, Voltage Input C3 5 C5 - B5 B6(2) Ch 3, Current Input B3 18 C6 32 B6 B6(2) Ch 3, Return (ZP) A3 - A5, A6 - A6 A5, A6 U4 - - B7 41 (F4) A7 (F4) B7 Ch 4, Voltage Input C4 6 C7 - B7 B8(2) Ch 4, Current Input B4 19 C8 42 B8 B8(2) Ch 4, Return (ZP) A4 - A7, A8 - A8 A7, A8 U5 - - B9 51 (F5) A9 (F5) B9 Ch 5, Voltage Input C5 7 C9 - B9 B10(2) 148 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant Table A-19 AI845 Process Connections (Continued) TU812 TU810 TU830/ (or TU814) D-Sub 25 male TU833 Connector (1) Terminal Terminal Process Connection TU835 Terminal TU838 Terminal TU844 TU845 Terminal Ch 5, Current Input B5 20 C10 52 B10 B10(2) Ch 5, Return (ZP) A5 - A9, A10 - A10 A9, A10 U6 - - B11 61 (F6) A11 (F6) B11 Ch 6, Voltage Input C6 8 C11 - B11 B12(2) Ch 6, Current Input B6 21 C12 62 B12 B12(2) Ch 6, Return (ZP) A6 - A11, A12 - A12 A11, A12 U7 - - B13 71 (F7) A13 (F7) B13 Ch 7, Voltage Input C7 9 C13 - B13 B14(2) Ch 7, Current Input B7 22 C14 72 B14 B14(2) Ch 7, Return (ZP) A7 - A13, A14 - A14 A13, A14 U8 - - B15 81 (F8) A15 (F8) B15 Ch 8, Voltage Input C8 10 C15 - B15 B16(2) Ch 8, Current Input B8 23 C16 82 B16 B16(2) Ch 8, Return (ZP) A8 - A15, A16 - A16 A15, A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ (2) L2+ (2) L2+ 0 V d.c. (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (2) L2- (2) L2- (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. (2) Voltage or current input chosen by the shunt stick on TU844/TU845. 3BSE 020 924R4101 149 AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant Appendix A Specifications Figure A-23 shows the process connections for the Analog Input Module AI845 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. Process TU830/TU833 +24v Pwr. Source 0v U1 4 - 20mA 2 - Wire XMTRs Ch1 I U2 4 - 20mA Ch2 I 0 - 5V Ch3 V ZP 4 - Wire XMTRs 0 - 20mA Ch4 I ZP U5 0 - 20mA Ch5 I ZP 4 - 20mA Ch6 I ZP U6 3 - Wire XMTRs 0 - 5V U7 Ch7 V 0 - 5V ZP U8 Ch8 V ZP +24v Chx V = Voltage Input Chx I = Current Input 0v L1+ L1+ L1L1B1 C1 C2 A1,A2 6.3A Fuse AI845 L1+ LU1 I1U I1I ZP B3 C3 C4 A3,A4 U2 I2U I2I ZP B5 C5 C6 A5,A6 U3 I3U I3I ZP B7 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9 C9 C10 A9,A10 U4 I4U I4I ZP U5 I5U I5I ZP B11 C11 C12 A11,A12 U6 I6U I6I ZP B13 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15 C15 C16 A15,A16 U7 I7U I7I ZP U8 I8U I8I ZP L2+ L2+ L2L2- 6.3A Fuse Mux. L2+ LEM Figure A-23 AI845 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 150 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant Figure A-24 shows the process connections for the Analog Input Module AI845 when installed on a TU835 Extended MTU. Process TU835 X11 +24V * 0V 4 - 20mA L1+ L1+ L1L1- L1+ X12 11 Ch1 I 12 L1+ 21 Ch2 I 22 L1+ 31 Ch3 I 32 L1+ 41 Ch4 I 42 L2+ 51 Ch5 I 52 L2+ 61 Ch6 I 62 L2+ 71 Ch7 I 72 L2+ 81 Ch8 I 82 Fn=100mA 4 - 20mA 4 - 20mA 4 - 20mA 4 - 20mA 4 - 20mA 4 - 20mA +24V * F1 Chx I = Current Input 0V * Should be connected if use of external power supply supervision. Must meet the HART requirements if HART communication is used. F3 F4 X13 L2+ L2+ L2L2- L1+ L- F2 4 - 20mA AI845 F5 F6 F7 F8 U1 I1U I1I ZP U2 I2U I2I ZP U3 I3U I3I ZP Mux. U4 I4U I4I ZP U5 I5U I5I ZP U6 I6U I6I ZP U7 I7U I7I ZP U8 I8U I8I ZP L2+ LEM Figure A-24 AI845 with TU835 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 151 AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant Appendix A Specifications Figure A-25 shows the process connections for the Analog Input Module AI845 when installed on a TU838 Extended MTU. Process TU838 +24V * 0 - 20mA Ch4 I ZP L2+ L1+ L1+ L1L1F1 A1 B1 B2 A2 F2 A3 B3 B4 A4 F3 A5 B5 B6 A6 F4 A7 B7 B8 A8 F5 A9 0 - 20mA Ch5 I ZP B9 B10 A10 Pwr. Source 0V L1+ 4 - 20mA 2 - Wire XMTRs Ch1 I L1+ 4 - 20mA Ch2 I 0 - 5V Ch3 V ZP 4 - Wire XMTRs L2+ 4 - 20mA 3 - Wire XMTRs Ch6 I ZP 0 - 5V L2+ Ch7 V 0 - 5V ZP L2+ Ch8 V ZP Chx V = Voltage Input Chx I = Current Input +24V * 0V * Should be connected if use of external power supply supervision. Must meet the HART requirements if HART communication is used. A11 B11 B12 A12 A13 B13 B14 A14 A15 B15 B16 A16 L2+ L2+ L2L2- F6 F7 F8 AI845 L1+ LU1 I1U I1I ZP U2 I2U I2I ZP U3 I3U I3I ZP Mux. U4 I4U I4I ZP U5 I5U I5I ZP U6 I6U I6I ZP U7 I7U I7I ZP U8 I8U I8I ZP L2+ LEM Figure A-25 AI845 with TU838 Extended MTU Process Connections 152 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant Figure A-26 shows the process connections for the Analog Input Module AI845 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Process TU810 (or TU814) +24V Pwr. Sup. * 0V L1+ ZP U1 I1U I1I ZP 4 - 20mA Ch1 I C1 B1 A1 4 - 20mA Ch2 I C2 B2 A2 U2 I2U I2I ZP 0 - 5V Ch3 V C3 B3 A3 U3 I3U I3I ZP ZP ZP C4 B4 A4 Ch5 I ZP C5 B5 A5 U4 I4U I4I ZP U5 I5U I5I ZP 4 - 20mA Ch6 I ZP C6 B6 A6 U6 I6U I6I ZP 0 - 5V Ch7 V 0 - 5V 0 - 20mA Ch4 V ZP 0 - 5V Ch8 V ZP Chx V = Voltage Input Chx I = Current Input L1+ L1+ L1- AI845 * Should be connected if use of external power supply supervision. Must meet the HART requirements if HART communication is used. C7 B7 A7 C8 B8 A8 L2+ L2+ L2- Mux. U7 I7U I7I ZP U8 I8U I8I ZP L2+ ZP EM Figure A-26 AI845 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 153 AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant Appendix A Specifications Figure A-27 shows the process connections for the Analog Input Module AI845 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. TU812 Process Connection Chx V = Voltage Input Chx I = Current Input 1 1 UP1 14 14 UP1 2 2 ZP1 15 15 ZP1 3 3 S1 Ch1 V 16 16 S2 Ch1 I +24V * AI845 L1+ L- 0V 4 4 S3 Ch2 V 17 17 S4 Ch2 I 5 5 S5 Ch3 V 18 18 S6 Ch3 I 6 6 S7 Ch4 V 19 19 S8 Ch4 I 7 7 S9 Ch5 V 20 20 S10 Ch5 I 8 8 S11 Ch6 V 21 21 S12 Ch6 I 9 9 S13 Ch7 V 22 22 S14 Ch7 I 10 10 S15 Ch8 V 23 23 S16 Ch8 I 11 11 UP2 +24V * 24 24 UP2 12 12 ZP2 25 25 ZP2 13 13 EM 0V U1 I1U I1I ZP U2 I2U I2I ZP U3 I3U I3I ZP Mux. U4 I4U I4I ZP U5 I5U I5I ZP U6 I6U I6I ZP U7 I7U I7I ZP U8 I8U I8I ZP L2+ L- EM EM * Should be connected if use of external power supply supervision. Must meet the HART requirements if HART communication is used. Figure A-27 AI845 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 154 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI845 Analog Input Module, single or redundant Figure A-28 shows the process connections for the Analog Input Module AI845 when installed on a TU844 or TU845 Redundant MTU. Process TU844/TU845 +24V Pwr. Source 0V U1 4 - 20mA L1+ L1+ L1L1B1 B2 Ch1 A1,A2 2 - Wire XMTRs U2 4 - 20mA Ch2 0 - 5V Ch3 A3,A4 ZP 4 - Wire XMTRs 0 - 20mA Ch4 ZP U5 0 - 20mA Ch5 ZP U6 3 - Wire XMTRs B3 B4 4 - 20mA Ch6 ZP B5 B6 A5,A6 B7 B8 A7,A8 B9 B10 A9,A10 B11 B12 A11,A12 0 - 5V U7 Ch7 B13 B14 0 - 5V ZP U8 Ch8 A13,A14 B15 B16 ZP +24V A15,A16 L2+ L2+ L2L2- 0V AI845 L+ LShunt sticks U1 I1U I1I ZP U2 I2U I2I ZP U3 I3U I3I ZP Mux. U4 I4U I4I ZP U5 I5U I5I ZP U6 I6U I6I ZP U7 I7U I7I ZP U8 I8U I8I ZP L+ LEM AI845 --- L+ LU1 I1U I1I ZP U8 I8U I8I ZP L+ L- Mux. EM Figure A-28 AI845 with TU844 or TU845 Redundant MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 155 AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.9 AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module A.9.0.1 Features • 8 channels for 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, single ended unipolar inputs. • HART pass-through communication (AI880A) • Single or redundant configuration. • 1 group of 8 channels isolated from ground. • 12 bit resolution. • Configurable filter time per channel. • Configurable alarm limit for field power outputs. • Configurable over/under range for current inputs. • Configurable safety accuracy 0,5 - 4%. • Field power distribution, actively verified also in a redundant pair. • Advanced on-board diagnostics. • EMC protection. • DIN rail mounting. • Certified for SIL3 according to EN 61508 (high and low demand applications). • Certified for AK6 according to DIN V 19250/DIN V VDE 0801-AK6. • Certified for Category 4 according to EN 954-1. • Complies with the NAMUR recommendation NE43, and supports configurable over- and under range limits. A.9.0.2 Description The AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module is designed for single and redundant configuration. The module has 8 current input channels. 156 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module Input resistances is 250 ohm. The EMC protection is placed on the shunt-sticks. The module distributes the external transmitter supply to each channel. This adds a simple connection to distribute the supply to 2- or 3-wire transmitters. The transmitter power is supervised and current limited. All eight channels are isolated from the ModuleBus in one group. Power to the Module is generated from the 24 V on the ModuleBus. The AI880/AI880A complies with the NAMUR recommendation NE43, and supports configurable over- and under range limits. As AI880/AI880A needs external shunt sticks, the MTUs TU844 or TU845 is required. AI880A has HART pass-through functionality. Only point-to-point communication is supported. Self-diagnostic functions • Errors in External power supply and External shunt error will be reported as External channel error. • Errors in Low Pass Filter, Multiplexer and Test channels will be reported as Internal channel error. • Errors in Analog to Digital converters, Analog references, Internal power supplies, Errors in micro controller, FPGA and Memory will be reported as Module Error. Four LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green), Warning (Yellow) and Primary (Yellow): • The RUN LED starts flashing when the module is ready to be configured and is steady lit when the module has reached operational state. • The WARNING LED indicates external or internal channel errors. • The FAULT LED indicates that there is Module errors present or that the module is in Init state. • The PRIMARY LED indicates that the module is primary (in a redundant pair). 3BSE 020 924R4101 157 AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.9.0.3 Technical Data Table A-20 AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C AI880 High Integrity Analog Input Module Feature Number of channels 8 Type of input Unipolar single ended Measurement range 0...20 mA 4... 20 mA Over range +15% Input impedance (at current input) 250 Ω Maximum field cable length 600 meters, (656 yd.) Voltage input, maximum non-destructive 11 V d.c. NMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz >40 dB Error <0.1% Safety accuracy 1.5% (configurable 0.5-4%) Resolution 12 bit Temperature drift Max. 50 ppm/°C Update cycle time 10 ms Current consumption 24 V (ModuleBus) 50 mA (max) 158 Current consumption 5 V 10 mA Power dissipation 2.4 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F) Transmitter power: voltage current Field supply - max 4.5 V 30 mA 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module Table A-20 AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) Feature AI880 High Integrity Analog Input Module Voltage supervision Internal voltage, field power input, field power output per channel Input filter rise time (0-90%) 190 ms (HW filter) Isolation 8 inputs isolated from ground in one group (RIV=50 V) Module termination units TU844, TU845 MTU keying code FF (AI880), FD (AI880A) Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.15 kg (0.33 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 159 AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.9.0.4 Block Diagram AI880/AI880A FPGA 24 V UP ZP UP1 R W F P T 24 V Mux U1 LP 2 x 47ms U1 C UP8 MCU T 24 V Mux U8 LP 2 x 47ms U8 C 160 # LP 2 x 47ms LP 2 x 47ms Mux 3.3V 24V 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module A.9.0.5 Process Connections Table A-21 AI880/AI880A Process Connections Process Connection 3BSE 020 924R4101 TU844 TU845 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ 0 V d.c. (ZP) L1- U1 B1 Ch1, Voltage Input B2 Ch1, Current Input - Ch1, Return (ZP) A1,A2 U2 B3 Ch 2, Voltage Input B4 Ch 2, Current Input - Ch 2, Return (ZP) A3, A4 U3 B5 Ch 3, Voltage Input B6 Ch 3, Current Input - Ch 3, Return (ZP) A5, A6 U4 B7 Ch 4, Voltage Input B8 Ch 4, Current Input - Ch 4, Return (ZP) A7, A8 U5 B9 Ch 5, Voltage Input B10 161 AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-21 AI880/AI880A Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection 162 TU844 TU845 Terminal Ch 5, Current Input - Ch 5, Return (ZP) A9, A10 U6 B11 Ch 6, Voltage Input B12 Ch 6, Current Input - Ch 6, Return (ZP) A11, A12 U7 B13 Ch 7, Voltage Input B14 Ch 7, Current Input - Ch 7, Return (ZP) A13, A14 U8 B15 Ch 8, Voltage Input B16 Ch 8, Current Input - Ch 8, Return (ZP) A15, A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ 0 V d.c. (ZP) L2- 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AI880/AI880A High Integrity Analog Input Module Figure A-29 shows the process connections for the High Integrity Analog Input Module AI880/AI880A when installed on a TU844 or TU845 Redundant MTU. Process TU844/TU845 +24V Pwr. Source 0V U1 4 - 20mA L1+ L1+ L1L1B1 B2 Ch1 A1,A2 2 - Wire XMTRs U2 4 - 20mA Ch2 0 - 5V Ch3 A3,A4 ZP 4 - Wire XMTRs 0 - 20mA 0 - 20mA Ch4 B5 B6 A5,A6 B7 B8 ZP A7,A8 U5 B9 B10 Ch5 ZP U6 3 - Wire XMTRs B3 B4 4 - 20mA Ch6 ZP A9,A10 B11 B12 A11,A12 0 - 5V U7 Ch7 B13 B14 0 - 5V ZP U8 Ch8 A13,A14 B15 B16 ZP +24V A15,A16 L2+ L2+ L2L2- 0V AI880/AI880A L+ LShunt sticks U1 I1U I1I ZP U2 I2U I2I ZP U3 I3U I3I ZP Mux. U4 I4U I4I ZP U5 I5U I5I ZP U6 I6U I6I ZP U7 I7U I7I ZP U8 I8U I8I ZP L+ LEM AI880 --- L+ LU1 I1U I1I ZP U8 I8U I8I ZP L+ L- Mux. EM Figure A-29 AI880/AI880A with TU844 or TU845 Redundant MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 163 AO801 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Appendix A Specifications A.10 AO801 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA A.10.0.1 Features 8 channels of 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA outputs • OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection • Analog Output is to be short circuit secured to ZP or +24 V • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. • Process and power connection via detachable connectors S STATUS • AO801 0(4)...20mA A.10.0.2 Description The AO801 Analog Output Module has 8 unipolar analog output channels. L+ L- 24V 1 O - 2 O - 3 4 O - O - 5 O - 6 O - 7 O - 8 O - One LED are used to indicate the state of the module.The STATUS LED green indicates that the device is in operational state. The STATUS LED red indicates that the device is in error state. In Not configured state the STATUS LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The module performs self-diagnostic cyclically. Module diagnostics include: • 164 Low internal power supply will set module in INIT state (no answer from the module). 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO801 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller (OSP timer) and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog timer is re-triggered every time the correct module address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent.The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values are written. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the POWOK signal is active. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. 3BSE 020 924R4101 165 AO801 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Appendix A Specifications A.10.0.3 Technical Data Table A-22 AO801 Analog Output Module Specifications at 25°C AO801 Analog Output Module Feature Number of channels 8 Output rang 0... 20mA, 4...20mA(1) Over range 15% Output load Max 850 ohms (external 24 V > 24 V) (2) (24 V external - 7) /0.02 (external 24 V < 24 V) Maximum field cable length 600 meters (656 yd.) Rise time 10µs Cycle time 1 ms Error Max. 0.1% Resolution 12 bit Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256, 512, 1024 ms Temperature drift Typ. 30 ppm/°C Max. 60 ppm/°C Current consumption 24 V (external supply), maximum 200 mA Current consumption 5 V, maximum 70 mA Power dissipation 3.8 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(3) 166 Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO801 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Table A-22 AO801 Analog Output Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) AO801 Analog Output Module Feature Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.05-2.5mm2, 30-12 AWG Stranded: 0.05-1.5mm2, 30-12 AWG Recommended torque: 0.8 Nm Stripping length: 6-7.5 mm, 0.24-0.30 in Width 86.1 mm (3.4”) Depth 58.5 mm (2.3”) Height 110 mm (4.33”) Weight 0.24 kg (0.53 lbs.) (1) 4...20 mA handled by the FCI or controller (2) See Power Dissipation Calculation below. (3) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 167 AO801 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Appendix A Specifications A.10.0.4 Power Dissipation Calculation If output load <250 ohms and high power supply can max. power dissipation be exceeded. The total power dissipated in the output stages should be <1.2 W. Can be calculated according to: UP <24 V UP >24 V UP ICHi RLi = Power supply to the output stages = Average output current per channel = Output load per channel Temporary overload or short circuit does not cause any damage but long term overload will decrease module MTBF. 168 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO801 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA A.10.0.5 Block Diagram AO801 L+ L- STATUS # EMC prot 1O 1- Pos MBI CPU # EMC prot 5VS 8O 8- 5V ZD Power_ok EM A.10.0.6 Process Connections Table A-23 A0801 Process Connections Process Connection 3BSE 020 924R4101 Process Terminal Ch1, + Output 1O Ch1 Return (ZP) 1- - - Ch 2, + Output 2O Ch2 Return (ZP) 2- 169 AO801 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Appendix A Specifications Table A-23 A0801 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection 170 Process Terminal - - Ch 3, + Output 3O Ch3 Return (ZP) 3- - - Ch 4, + Output 4O Ch4 Return (ZP) 4- - - Ch 5, + Output 5O Ch5 Return (ZP) 5- - - Ch 6, + Output 6O Ch6 Return (ZP) 6- - - Ch 7, + Output 7O Ch7 Return (ZP) 7- - - Ch 8, + Output 8O Ch8 Return (ZP) 8- 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO801 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Figure A-30 shows the process connections for the AO801. Process Device AO801 D/A 1O 1- 0 - 20mA 2O 2- 0 - 20mA D/A 3O 3- 0 - 20mA D/A 4O 4- 0 - 20mA D/A 5O 5- 0 - 20mA D/A 6O 6- 0 - 20mA D/A 7O 7- 0 - 20mA D/A 8O 8- 0 - 20mA D/A L+ +24V L- 0V EM Figure A-30 AO801 Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 171 AO810 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Appendix A Specifications A.11 AO810 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA A.11.0.1 Features • 8 channels of 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA outputs • OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection • Analog Output is to be short circuit secured to ZP or +24 V • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. F R W O 1 2 3 4 A.11.0.2 Description The AO810 Analog Output Module has 8 unipolar analog output channels. To supervise the communication to the D/A-converters the serial data is read back and verified. The opencircuit diagnostic is received during the readback. 5 6 7 8 Four LEDs are used to indicate the state of the device. AO810 The RUN (green) LED indicates that the device is in 0..20 mA operational state. The FAULT (red) LED indicates that the device is in error state. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The WARNING (yellow) LED indicates that there is some kind of process error such as an open circuit, or power supply fault. OSP (yellow) LED indicates that the output value is set to the OSP value. The module performs self-diagnostic cyclically. Module diagnostics include: • 172 Process power supply supervision which is reported when supply voltage to output circuitry is to low. The error is reported as a channel error. 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO810 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Channel diagnostic include: • Fault detection of the channel. (Only reported on active channels). The error is reported if the output current is less than the output set value and the output set value > 1 mA. The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller (OSP timer) and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog timer is re-triggered every time the correct node address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent. The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values are written. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU and the TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU enables wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. 3BSE 020 924R4101 173 AO810 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Appendix A Specifications A.11.0.3 Technical Data Table A-24 AO810 Analog Output Module Specifications at 25°C AO810 Analog Output Module Feature Number of channels 8 Output range 0... 20 mA, 4...20 mA (1) Over range 15% Output load ≤500 ohms(2), 250 - 850 ohms(3) Maximum field cable length 600 meters (656 yd.) Rise time 4 ms Cycle time ≤2 ms Propagation delay ≤6 ms Error Max. 0.1% at 0 - 500 ohms Resolution 14 bit Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256, 512, 1024 ms Temperature drift Typ. 30 ppm/°C Max. 60 ppm/°C Current consumption 24 V (external supply), maximum 200 mA Supervision Module: Output power low Channel: Open-circuit (for current > 1 mA) Current consumption 5 V, maximum Power dissipation (4) Maximum ambient temperature 70 mA 3W 55/40°C (131/104°F)(5) 174 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO810 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Table A-24 AO810 Analog Output Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) AO810 Analog Output Module Feature Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814 and TU830 MTU keying code AE Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.18 kg (0.4 lbs.) (1) Handled by the FCI or controller. (2) With supply connected to L1+ only (3) With supply connected to L2+ only. Note: RL = 250...850 ohms (with power supply connected to L2+) Power supply min.= U drop + I max. x RL = 7.7 V + 0.023 x RL(>19.2 V) Power Supply max. = 30 V (4) 250 ohm load, 70% of nominal current, all channels activated. Supply L+ connected. (5) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 175 AO810 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Appendix A Specifications A.11.0.4 Block Diagram AO810 L2+ FAULT RUN WARNING OSP L1+ ZP # EMC prot O1 ZP Pos MBI-2 CPU 5VS 5V ZD Power_ok 176 # EMC prot O8 ZP EM 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO810 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA A.11.0.5 Process Connections Table A-25 A0810 Process Connections TU810 (or TU814) Terminal Process Connection 3BSE 020 924R4101 TU812 DSub 25 male connector (1) TU830/TU833 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) 0 V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) - - - B1, B2 Ch1, + Output C1 3 C1 Ch1 Return (ZP) A1 - A1, A2 - - - B3, B4 Ch 2, + Output C2 4 C3 Ch2 Return (ZP) A2 - A3, A4 - - - B5, B6 Ch 3, + Output C3 5 C5 Ch3 Return (ZP) A3 - A5, A6 - - - B7, B8 Ch 4, + Output C4 6 C7 Ch4 Return (ZP) A4 - A7, A8 - - - B9, B10 Ch 5, + Output C5 7 C9 Ch5 Return (ZP) A5 - A9, A10 - - - B11, B12 Ch 6, + Output C6 8 C11 Ch6 Return (ZP) A6 - A11, A12 177 AO810 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Appendix A Specifications Table A-25 A0810 Process Connections (Continued) TU810 (or TU814) Terminal Process Connection TU812 DSub 25 male connector (1) TU830/TU833 Terminal - - - B13, B14 Ch 7, + Output C7 9 C13 Ch7 Return (ZP) A7 - A13, A14 - - - B15, B16 Ch 8, + Output C8 10 C15 Ch8 Return (ZP) A8 - A15, A16 +24 V dc L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) 0 V dc (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 178 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO810 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Figure A-31 shows the process connections for the Analog Output Module AO810 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. Process Device TU830/TU833 AO810 6.3A Fuse L1+ L1+ L1L1- +24V 0V B1 D/A O1 ZP C1 A1 D/A O2 ZP C3 A3 Ch1 + Ch1 - 0 - 20mA Ch2 + Ch2 - 0 - 20mA Ch3 + Ch3 - 0 - 20mA Ch4 + Ch4 - 0 - 20mA Ch5 + Ch5 - 0 - 20mA Ch6 + Ch6 - 0 - 20mA Ch7 + Ch7 - 0 - 20mA 0 - 20mA RL < 500 ohms (with power supply connected to L1+, See Note below) B3 B5 D/A O3 ZP D/A O4 ZP C5 A5 B7 C7 A7 B9 O5 ZP C9 A9 D/A O6 ZP C11 A11 D/A O7 ZP C13 A13 D/A O8 ZP C15 A15 Ch8 + Ch8 - L2+ L2+ L2L2- +24V D/A B11 B13 B15 6.3A Fuse EM 0V Note: RL = 250...850 ohms (with power supply connected to L2+) Power supply min. = 7.7V+0.023 x RL Power Supply = 19.2 to 30V RL min = 250 ohms (including all outputs) Figure A-31 AO810 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 179 AO810 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Appendix A Specifications Figure A-32 shows the process connections for the AO810 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Process Device TU810 (or TU814) AO810 L1+ L1+ L1- +24V 0V D/A O1 ZP C1 A1 Ch1 + Ch1 - 0 - 20mA O2 ZP C2 A2 Ch2 + Ch2 - 0 - 20mA D/A O3 ZP C3 A3 Ch3 + Ch3 - 0 - 20mA D/A O4 ZP C4 A4 Ch4 + Ch4 - 0 - 20mA D/A O5 ZP C5 A5 Ch5 + Ch5 - 0 - 20mA D/A O6 ZP C6 A6 Ch6 + Ch6 - 0 - 20mA D/A O7 ZP C7 A7 Ch7 + Ch7 - 0 - 20mA D/A O8 ZP C8 A8 Ch8 + Ch8 - 0 - 20mA D/A L2+ L2+ L2EM +24V 0V RL < 500 ohms (with power supply connected to L1+, See Note below) Note: RL = 250...850 ohms (with power supply connected to L2+) Power supply min. = 7.7V+0.023 x RL Power Supply = 19.2 to 30V RL min = 250 ohms (including all outputs) Figure A-32 AO810 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 180 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO810 Analog Output Module, 0(4)...20 mA Figure A-33 shows the process connections for the Analog Output Module AO810 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. TU812 AO810 +24V UP1 1 1 0V Ch1 + D/A O1 ZP S4 17 17 S5 5 5 S6 18 18 S7 6 6 S8 19 19 S9 7 7 S10 20 20 S11 8 8 D/A Ch5 + Ch6 + O5 ZP D/A O7 ZP D/A O8 ZP 3 4 Ch4 + O6 ZP 15 S1 3 16 O3 ZP D/A ZP1 15 S3 4 Ch3 + D/A 2 S2 16 O2 ZP O4 ZP 14 Ch2 + D/A D/A UP1 14 ZP1 2 S12 21 21 Ch7 + S13 9 9 S14 22 22 Ch8 + S15 10 10 S16 23 23 +24VUP2 11 11 0V UP2 24 24 ZP2 12 12 ZP2 25 25 EM 13 13 RL < 500 ohms (with power supply connected to L1+, See Note below) Process Connection EM Note: RL = 250...850 ohms (with power supply connected to L2+) Power supply min. = 7.7V+0.023 x RL Power Supply = 19.2 to 30V RL min = 250 ohms (including all outputs) Figure A-33 AO810 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 181 AO820 Galvanically Isolated Bipolar Analog Output Module Appendix A Specifications A.12 AO820 Galvanically Isolated Bipolar Analog Output Module A.12.0.1 Features • 4 channels of -20 mA...+20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA or -10 V...+10 V, 0...10 V, 2...10 V outputs F R • Individually galvanically isolated channels O • OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. A.12.0.2 Description The AO820 Analog Output Module has 4 bipolar analog output channels. The choice of current or voltage output is configurable for each channel. There are separate sets of terminals for voltage and current outputs, and it is up to the user to wire outputs properly. The only differences between current or voltage channel configuration is in software settings. W 1 2 3 4 AO820 ±20 mA, ±10V Isolated To supervise the communication to the A/Dconverters the output data is read back and verified. The open-circuit diagnostics are read continuously as well. Four LEDs are used to indicate the state of the device. The RUN (green) LED indicates that the device is in operational state. The FAULT (red) LED indicates that the device is in an error state, or a power fault has been detected. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The WARNING (yellow) LED indicates that there is some kind of process error such as an open circuit. OSP (yellow) LED indicates that the output values are set to the OSP value. 182 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO820 Galvanically Isolated Bipolar Analog Output Module The process voltage supervision input give channel error signals if the voltage disappears.The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. Channel diagnostics include: • Fault detection of the channel. (Only reported on active channels). The error is reported if the output current differ from the output set value (that is, open wire condition). The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog timer is retriggered every time the correct node address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or as the last good value sent. The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values are written. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU and the TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU enables wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. 3BSE 020 924R4101 183 AO820 Galvanically Isolated Bipolar Analog Output Module Appendix A Specifications A.12.0.3 Technical Data Table A-26 AO820 Analog Output Module Specifications at 25°C AO820 Analog Output Module Feature Number of channels Output ranges (nominal) 4 -20 mA...+20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA or -10 V...+10 V, 0...10 V, 2...10 V(1) (1) Over range ± 15% Output load, current outputs Including wire resistance ≤550 ohms - Nominal ranges ≤510 ohms - Over-range Output load, voltage outputs ≥5k ohms Maximum field cable length 600 meters (656 yd.) Rise time <0.7 ms Cycle time for all channels ≤1.5 ms Error, Voltage Max. 0.1% Error, Current at 250 ohms Max. 0.1% Resolution 12 bits plus sign Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256, 512, 1024 ms Temperature drift Max. 90 ppm/°C Current consumption 24 V, maximum 260 mA Current consumption 5 V, maximum 100 mA Power dissipation (2) 6W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(3) 184 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO820 Galvanically Isolated Bipolar Analog Output Module Table A-26 AO820 Analog Output Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) AO820 Analog Output Module Feature Supervision Module: Output power low Channel: Open circuit (for current > 1mA) Isolation Individually isolated, channel-to-channel and to circuit common (RIV=50 V) Module termination units TU810, TU812, TU814 or TU830 MTU keying code BC Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.18 kg (0.4 lbs.) (1) Handled by the controller or FCI. (2) Power dissipation is calculated with 250 ohms load, 70 percent of nominal output current, all channels activated. (3) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 185 AO820 Galvanically Isolated Bipolar Analog Output Module Appendix A Specifications A.12.0.4 Block Diagram AO820 FAULT RUN WARNING Iso Power and Amp U,I Amp OSP O1U+ EMC protect S/H O1I+ O1U- Current sense O1I- ZP1 CPU Pos EM CLK+ CLK5VS 5V # Iso Power and Amp MBI-2 ModuleBus DAT+ DAT- U,I Amp 0V +24V O4U+ EMC protect Amp O4IO4U- +0V24 Current sense Block Power_ok O4I- ZP4 EM 186 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO820 Galvanically Isolated Bipolar Analog Output Module A.12.0.5 Process Connections Table A-27 A0820 Process Connections TU812 D-Sub 25 male Connector (1) TU810 (or TU814) Terminal Process Connection TU830/TU833 Terminal Not used L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) Not used L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) - - - B1, B2 Ch1, Current Output + C1 3 C1 Ch1, Current Output - B1 16 C2 - A1 - A1, A2 - - - B3, B4 Ch1, Voltage Output + C2 4 C3 Ch1, Voltage Output - B2 17 C4 - A2 - A3, A4 - - - B5, B6 Ch2, Current Output + C3 5 C5 Ch2, Current Output - B3 18 C6 - A3 - A5, A6 - - - B7, B8 Ch2, Voltage Output + C4 6 C7 Ch2, Voltage Output - B4 19 C8 - A4 - A7, A8 - - - B9, B10 7 C9 Ch3, Current Output + C5 3BSE 020 924R4101 187 AO820 Galvanically Isolated Bipolar Analog Output Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-27 A0820 Process Connections (Continued) TU812 D-Sub 25 male Connector (1) TU810 (or TU814) Terminal Process Connection TU830/TU833 Terminal Ch3, Current Output - B5 20 C10 - A5 - A9, A10 - - - B11, B12 Ch3, Voltage Output + C6 8 C11 Ch3, Voltage Output - B6 21 C12 - A6 - A11, A12 - - - B13, B14 Ch4, Current Output + C7 9 C13 Ch4, Current Output - B7 22 C14 - A7 - A13, A14 - - - B15, B16 Ch4, Voltage Output + C8 10 C15 Ch4, Voltage Output - B8 23 C16 - A8 - A15, A16 Not used L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) Not used L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 188 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO820 Galvanically Isolated Bipolar Analog Output Module Figure A-34 shows the process connections for the Bipolar Analog Output Module AO820 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. Process Device TU830/TU833 AO820 6.3A Fuse L1+ L1+ L1L1- RL = <550W for current outputs O1I ZP1 C1 C2 Ch1 I+ Ch1 - O1U ZP1 C3 C4 Ch1 V+ Ch1 - O2I ZP2 C5 C6 Ch2 I+ Ch2 - O2U ZP2 C7 C8 Ch2 V+ Ch2 - ±20mA D/A 0 - 20mA D/A D/A D/A O3I ZP3 C9 C10 Ch3 I+ Ch3 - O3U ZP3 C11 C12 Ch3 V+ Ch3 - O4I ZP4 C13 C14 Ch4 I+ Ch4 - O4U ZP4 C15 C16 Ch4 V+ Ch4 - Use either the current or voltage output terminals, but not both per channel. ±10V 0 - 10V 6.3A Fuse EM L2+ L2+ L2L2- RL = >2KW for voltage outputs Figure A-34 AO820 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 189 AO820 Galvanically Isolated Bipolar Analog Output Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-35 shows the process connections for the AO820 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Process Device TU810 (or TU814) AO820 L1+ L1+ L1RL = <550W for current outputs O1I ZP1 C1 B1 Ch1 I+ Ch1 - O1U ZP1 C2 B2 Ch1 V+ Ch1 - O2I ZP2 C3 B3 Ch2 I+ Ch2 - O2U ZP2 C4 B4 Ch2 V+ Ch2 - ±20mA D/A 0 - 20mA D/A O3I ZP3 C5 B5 Ch3 I+ Ch3 - O3U ZP3 C6 B6 Ch3 V+ Ch3 - O4I ZP4 C7 B7 Ch4 I+ Ch4 - O4U ZP4 C8 B8 Ch4 V+ Ch4 - D/A D/A L2+ L2+ L2EM Use either the current or voltage output terminals, but not both per channel. ±10V 0 - 10V RL = >2KW for voltage outputs Figure A-35 AO820 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 190 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO820 Galvanically Isolated Bipolar Analog Output Module Figure A-36 shows the process connections for the AO820 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU TU812 AO820 L1+ +24V UP1 1 1 L1- UP1 14 14 0V 15 S1 3 3 C1 B1 Ch1 I+ Ch1 - S2 16 16 O1U ZP1 C2 B2 Ch1 V+ Ch1 - S3 4 4 S4 17 17 Ch2 I+ Ch2 - S5 5 5 S6 18 18 S7 6 6 S8 19 19 S9 7 7 S10 20 20 O2I ZP2 C3 B3 D/A O2U ZP2 O3I ZP3 O3U ZP3 O4I ZP4 D/A 2 ZP1 15 O1I ZP1 D/A D/A ZP1 2 O4U ZP4 C4 B4 C5 B5 C6 B6 C7 B7 C8 B8 Ch2 V+ Ch2 - Ch3 I+ Ch3 - Ch3 V+ Ch3 - Ch4 I+ Ch4 Ch4 V+ Ch4 L2+ L2+ L2- S11 8 8 S12 21 21 S13 9 9 S14 22 22 S15 10 10 S16 23 23 +24V UP2 11 11 UP2 24 24 ZP2 12 12 0V ZP2 25 25 EM 13 13 Process Connection EM Figure A-36 AO820 with TU812 3BSE 020 924R4101 191 AO845 Analog Output Module, single or redundant Appendix A Specifications A.13 AO845 Analog Output Module, single or redundant A.13.0.1 Features F • 8 channels of 4...20 mA outputs R • For single or redundant applications W • OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection • 1 group of 8 channels isolated from ground • Analog Output is to be short circuit secured to ZP or +24 V • Advanced on-board diagnostics • EMC protection • 12 bit resolution • DIN rail mounting • HART pass-through communication O A.13.0.2 Description The AO845 Analog Output Module for single or redundant applications has 8 unipolar analog output channels. AO845 4....20mA HART Four LEDs are used to indicate the state of the device. The RUN (green) LED indicates that the device is in operational state. The FAULT (red) LED indicates that the device is in error state. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The WARNING (yellow) LED indicates that there is some kind of process error such as an open circuit, or power supply fault. OSP (yellow) LED indicates that the output value is set to the OSP value. 192 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO845 Analog Output Module, single or redundant The module performs self-diagnostic cyclically. Module diagnostics include: • External Channel Error is reported (only reported on active channels) if the process power supply that supply voltage to output circuitry is too low, or the output current is less than the output set value and the output set value > 1 mA (open circuit). • Internal Channel Error is reported if the output circuit can not give the right current value. In a redundant pair the module will be commanded to error state by the ModuleBus master. • Module Error is reported in case of Output Transistor Error, Short Circuit, Checksum Error, Internal Power Supply Error, Status Link Error, Watchdog or Wrong OSP behavior. The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller (OSP timer) and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog timer is re-triggered every time the correct Read or Write access of dynamic data has been decoded. If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent. The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values are written. In redundant applications both modules must have the OSP-conditions fulfilled to go to OSP. The module has HART pass-through functionality. Only point to point communication is supported. The output filter must be enabled on channels used for HART communication. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. 3BSE 020 924R4101 193 AO845 Analog Output Module, single or redundant Appendix A Specifications Four different types of MTUs can be used for single applications. The TU830 Extended MTU and the TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU enables wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. For redundant applications there are two types of MTUs, TU842 for mounting on a horizontal DIN rail and TU843 for mounting on a vertical DIN rail. 194 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO845 Analog Output Module, single or redundant A.13.0.3 Technical Data Table A-28 AO845 Analog Output Module Specifications at 25°C AO845 Analog Output Module Feature Number of channels 8 Output range 4...20 mA Over range 15% Output load Max 750 ohms Maximum field cable length 600 meters (656 yd.) Rise time output filter - disable - enable 23 ms (0-90%) max 4 mA / 12.5 ms Cycle time 10 ms Error Max. 0.1% Resolution 12 bit Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256, 512, 1024 ms Temperature drift Max. 50 ppm/°C Current consumption 24 V (external supply), maximum 165 mA Current consumption 5 V, maximum 125 mA Power dissipation (1) 3.5 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830, TU842 and TU843 3BSE 020 924R4101 195 AO845 Analog Output Module, single or redundant Appendix A Specifications Table A-28 AO845 Analog Output Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued) AO845 Analog Output Module Feature MTU keying code CC Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.21 kg (0.46 lbs.) (1) 250 ohm load, 70% of nominal current, all channels activated. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 196 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO845 Analog Output Module, single or redundant A.13.0.4 Block Diagram AO845 UP21 R W F O O1 # ZP Open Wire Cntr. Reg. 8-bit UP21 O8 CPU MBI # Mux ZP HART Modem UP ZP E MS 3BSE 020 924R4101 HART UP21 Main switch RCL_out 197 AO845 Analog Output Module, single or redundant Appendix A Specifications A.13.0.5 Process Connections Table A-29 A0845 Process Connections 198 TU812 DSub 25 male connector(1) TU810 (or TU814) Terminal Process Connection TU830/TU833 TU842/TU843 Terminal Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ 0 V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- - - - B1, B2 - Ch1, + Output C1 3 C1 C1, C2 Ch1 Return (ZP) A1 - A1, A2 A1, A2 - - - B3, B4 - Ch 2, + Output C2 4 C3 C3, C4 Ch2 Return (ZP) A2 - A3, A4 A3, A4 - - - B5, B6 - Ch 3, + Output C3 5 C5 C5, C6 Ch3 Return (ZP) A3 - A5, A6 A5, A6 - - - B7, B8 - Ch 4, + Output C4 6 C7 C7, C8 Ch4 Return (ZP) A4 - A7, A8 A7,A8 - - - B9, B10 - Ch 5, + Output C5 7 C9 C9, C10 Ch5 Return (ZP) A5 - A9, A10 A9, A10 - - - B11, B12 - Ch 6, + Output C6 8 C11 C11, C12 Ch6 Return (ZP) A6 - A11, A12 A11, A12 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO845 Analog Output Module, single or redundant Table A-29 A0845 Process Connections (Continued) TU812 DSub 25 male connector(1) TU810 (or TU814) Terminal Process Connection TU830/TU833 TU842/TU843 Terminal Terminal - - - B13, B14 - Ch 7, + Output C7 9 C13 C13, C14 Ch7 Return (ZP) A7 - A13, A14 A13, A14 - - - B15, B16 - Ch 8, + Output C8 10 C15 C15, C16 Ch8 Return (ZP) A8 - A15, A16 A15, A16 +24 V dc L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ 0 V dc (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 3BSE 020 924R4101 199 AO845 Analog Output Module, single or redundant Appendix A Specifications Figure A-37 shows the process connections for the AO845 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. 6.3A Fuse UP1 D/A C1,C2 A1,A2 D/A D/A O3 ZP UP1 B7 O4 ZP UP1 C7,C8 A7,A8 O5 ZP C9,C10 A9,A10 O6 ZP C11,C12 A11,A12 Ch2 + Ch2 - 4 - 20mA Ch3 + Ch3 - 4 - 20mA Ch4 + Ch4 - 4 - 20mA Ch5 + Ch5 - 4 - 20mA Ch6 + Ch6 - 4 - 20mA Ch7 + Ch7 - 4 - 20mA Ch8 + Ch8 - 4 - 20mA B13 O7 ZP C13,C14 A13,A14 B15 O8 ZP C15,C16 A15,A16 6.3A Fuse EM 4 - 20mA B11 UP1 D/A Ch1 + Ch1 - B9 UP1 D/A 0V B5 C5,C6 A5,A6 UP1 D/A +24V B3 C3,C4 A3,A4 O2 ZP UP1 D/A L1+ L1+ L1L1B1 O1 ZP UP1 D/A Process Device TU830/TU833 AO845 L2+ L2+ L2L2- +24V 0V Figure A-37 AO845 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 200 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO845 Analog Output Module, single or redundant Figure A-38 shows the process connections for the AO845 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Process Device TU810 (or TU814) AO845 L1+ L1+ L1- +24V B1,C1 A1 Ch1 + Ch1 - 4 - 20mA B2,C2 A2 Ch2 + Ch2 - 4 - 20mA B3,C3 A3 Ch3 + Ch3 - 4 - 20mA O4 ZP UP1 B4,C4 A4 Ch4 + Ch4 - 4 - 20mA O5 ZP B5,C5 A5 Ch5 + Ch5 - 4 - 20mA B6,C6 A6 Ch6 + Ch6 - 4 - 20mA B7,C7 A7 Ch7 + Ch7 - 4 - 20mA B8,C8 A8 Ch8 + Ch8 - 4 - 20mA L2+ L2+ L2- +24V 0V UP1 D/A O1 ZP UP1 D/A O2 ZP UP1 D/A O3 ZP UP1 D/A D/A UP1 D/A O6 ZP UP1 D/A O7 ZP UP1 D/A O8 ZP 0V EM Figure A-38 AO845 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 201 AO845 Analog Output Module, single or redundant Appendix A Specifications Figure A-39 shows the process connections for the AO845 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. TU812 AO845 +24V UP1 1 1 0V UP1 D/A O1 ZP UP1 D/A Ch1 + O2 ZP D/A O4 ZP UP1 D/A O6 ZP UP1 D/A O7 ZP D/A 3 4 S4 17 17 Ch3 + S5 5 5 S6 18 18 S7 6 6 S8 19 19 S9 7 7 S10 20 20 S11 8 8 Ch4 + Ch5 + S12 21 21 Ch7 + S13 9 9 S14 22 22 Ch8 + S15 10 10 S16 23 23 +24VUP2 11 11 UP1 O8 ZP 15 S1 3 16 O5 ZP UP1 ZP1 15 S3 4 Ch6 + D/A 2 S2 16 UP1 D/A 14 Ch2 + UP1 O3 ZP UP1 14 ZP1 2 0V UP2 24 24 ZP2 12 12 ZP2 25 25 EM 13 13 Process Connection EM Figure A-39 AO845 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 202 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications AO845 Analog Output Module, single or redundant Figure A-40 shows the process connections for the AO845 when installed on a TU842 or TU843 Redundant MTU. AO845 Process Device TU842/TU843 L1+ L1+ L1L1- +24V 0V O1 ZP C1, C2 A1, A2 Ch1 + Ch1 - 4 - 20mA D/A O2 ZP C3, C4 A3, A4 Ch2 + Ch2 - 4 - 20mA D/A O3 ZP C5, C6 A5, A6 Ch3 + Ch3 - 4 - 20mA D/A O4 ZP C7, C8 A7, A8 Ch4 + Ch4 - 4 - 20mA D/A O5 ZP C9, C10 A9, A10 Ch5 + Ch5 - 4 - 20mA D/A O6 ZP C11, C12 A11, A12 Ch6 + Ch6 - 4 - 20mA D/A O7 ZP C13, C14 A13, A14 Ch7 + Ch7 - 4 - 20mA D/A O8 ZP C15, C16 A15, A16 Ch8 + Ch8 - 4 - 20mA D/A L2+ L2+ L2L2- EM +24V 0V AO845 O1 ZP --- D/A O8 ZP D/A EM Figure A-40 AO845 with TU842 or TU843 Redundant MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 203 DI801 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.14 DI801 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking A.14.0.1 Features 16 channels for 24 V d.c. inputs with current sinking • 1 isolated groups of 16 with voltage supervision • Input status indicators • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting • Process and power connection via detachable connectors A.14.0.2 Description The DI801 is a 16 channel 24 V digital input module for the S800 I/O. This module has 16 digital inputs. The input voltage range is 18 to 30 volt d.c. and the input current is 6 mA at 24 V. The inputs are in one isolated group with sixteen channels and channel number sixteen can be used for voltage supervision input in the group. S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15 16 STATUS • DI801 24V L+ L- 24V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Every input channel consists of current limiting components, EMC protection components, input state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. One STATUS LED red or green indicate module status. One LED (Yellow) per channel (16) indicate input channel status (On = 1 and Off = 0). The STATUS LED green indicates normal operation. The STATUS LED red indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not Configured state the STATUS LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. 204 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI801 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking Channel 16 can be used as voltage supervision input for channels 1-15. If the voltage connected to channel 16 disappears, the error inputs are activated. The error signal can be read from the ModuleBus. This supervision can be enabled/disabled with the “a” parameter. If the error inputs are disabled channel 16 can be used as normal input channels. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the POWOK signal is active. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The input channels can be digitally filtered. The different filter times that can be achieved are 2, 4, 8 and 16 ms. This means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than 3, 6, 12 and 24 ms will get through the filter. 3BSE 020 924R4101 205 DI801 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.14.0.3 Technical Data Table A-30 DI801 Digital Input Module Specifications DI801 Digital Input Module Feature Number of channels 16 (1 x 16), current sinking Rated voltage (process power supply range) 24 V d.c. (18 to 30 V d.c.) Input voltage range, “1” 15 to 30 V Input voltage range, “0” -30 to +5 V Nominal input channel current 6.7 mA @ 24 V d.c. Input Impedance 3.5 kΩ Maximum field cable length 600 meters (656 yd.) Filter times (digital, selectable) 2, 4, 8, 16 ms Process voltage supervision channel 16 Current consumption +5 V 70 mA Power dissipation (1) 2.2 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F) (2) 206 Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI801 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking Table A-30 DI801 Digital Input Module Specifications (Continued) Feature Acceptable wire sizes DI801 Digital Input Module Solid: 0.05-2.5mm2, 30-12 AWG Stranded: 0.05-1.5mm2, 30-12 AWG Recommended torque: 0.8 Nm Stripping length: 6-7.5 mm, 0.24-0.30 in Width 86.1 mm (3.4”) Depth 58.5 mm (2.3”) Height 110 mm (4.33”) Weight 0.24 kg (0.53 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated at nominal voltage of 24 Volts. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 207 DI801 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.14.0.4 Block Diagram DI801 EMCBARRIER CH 1 I1 CH 2 I2 CH 15 . I15 CH 16 I16 . STATUS MBI +5V POWER-OK 0V DAT DAT-N POS0-9 BLOCK L- EM 208 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI801 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking A.14.0.5 Process Connections Table A-31 DI801 Process Connections Process Connection 3BSE 020 924R4101 Process Terminal Ch1 Input 1 Ch 2 Input 2 Ch 3 Input 3 Ch 4 Input 4 Ch 5 Input 5 Ch 6 Input 6 Ch 7 Input 7 Ch 8 Input 8 Ch 9 Input 9 Ch 10 Input 10 Ch 11 Input 11 Ch 12 Input 12 Ch 13 Input 13 Ch 14 Input 14 Ch 15 Input 15 Ch 16 Input 16 209 DI801 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Figure A-41 shows the process connections for the DI801. Process DI801 1 2 + 3 - 4 + 5 - 6 7 8 9 10 + 11 - 12 + 13 - 14 15 16 +24V 0V EM Figure A-41 DI801 Process Connections 210 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI802 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking A.15 DI802 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking A.15.0.1 Features 8 channels for 120 V a.c./d.c. inputs with current sinking • Individually isolated channels • Voltage supervision of field input power • Input status indicators • Signal filtering • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting • Process connection via detachable connectors S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 STATUS • DI802 120V a.c./d.c. A.15.0.2 Description The DI802 is an 8 channel 120 V a.c./d.c.digital input module for the 1 A B S800 I/O. This module has 8 digital inputs. The a.c. input voltage range is 77 - 130 volt and the input current is 10 mA at 120 V a.c. The d.c. input range is 75 - 145 V and the input current is 2.8 mA at 110 V. The inputs are individually isolated. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B A B A B A B A B A B A B Every input channel consists of current limiting components, EMC protection components, input state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. One STATUS LED red or green indicate module status. One LED (Yellow) per channel (8) indicate input channel status (On = 1 and Off = 0). The STATUS LED green indicates normal operation. The STATUS LED red indicates that the module 3BSE 020 924R4101 211 DI802 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not Configured state the STATUS LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. Channel 8 can be used as voltage supervision input for channels 1-7. If the voltage connected to channel 8 disappears, the error inputs are activated. The error signal can be read from the ModuleBus. This supervision can be enabled/disabled with parameter “a”. If the error inputs are disabled, channel 8 can be used as the normal input channel. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the POWOK signal is active. The input channels can be digitally filtered. The different filter times that can be achieved are 2, 4, 8 and 16 ms. This means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than 3, 6, 12 and 24 ms will get through the filter. 212 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI802 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking A.15.0.3 Technical Data Table A-32 DI802 Digital Input Module Specifications DI802 Digital Input Module Feature Number of channels 8, current sinking Rated voltage (process power supply range) 120 V a.c. (77 to 130 V a.c.) 110 V d.c. (75 to 145 V d.c.) Input voltage range, “1” 77 to 130 V a.c. 75 to 145 V d.c. Input voltage range, “0” 0 to 30 V a.c. 0 to 20 V d.c. Nominal input channel current 10 mA a.c. @ 120 V a.c. 2.8 mA d.c. @ 110 V d.c. Input frequency range a.c. 47...63 Hz Input Impedance 12 kΩ (a.c.) 39 kΩ (d.c.) Maximum field cable length 200 meters (219 yd.) 100pF/m. for a.c. 600 meters (656 yd.) for d.c. Filter times (digital, selectable) 2, 4, 8, 16 ms Analog filter On/Off delay 5/18 ms Process voltage supervision Channel 8 Current consumption +5 V 50 mA Power dissipation (1) 2.8 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) 3BSE 020 924R4101 213 DI802 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Table A-32 DI802 Digital Input Module Specifications (Continued) DI802 Digital Input Module Feature Isolation Individually isolated channels (RIV=250 V) Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 250 V Dielectric test voltage 2000 V a.c. Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.05-2.5mm2, 30-12 AWG Stranded: 0.05-1.5mm2, 30-12 AWG Recommended torque: 0.8 Nm Stripping length: 6-7.5 mm, 0.24-0.30 in Width 86.1 mm (3.4”) Depth 58.5 mm (2.3”) Height 110 mm (4.33”) Weight 0.24 kg (0.53 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 214 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI802 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking A.15.0.4 Block Diagram DI802 BIC INPUT CHANNELS STATUS Rectifiers and filters X1 1A 1B CH 2 2A 2B CH 3 3A 3B MBI-1 ASIC Process Connector ModuleBus Connector 0V RESET +5VI +5V POWER-OK CH 1 CH 4 DAT+ DAT- RS-485 CH 5 CLK+ CLK- RS-485 POS0-6 5A 5B CH 6 6A 6B CH 7 7A 7B CH 8 8A 8B EEPROM E1-7 3BSE 020 924R4101 4A 4B 1 215 DI802 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.15.0.5 Process Connections Table A-33 DI802 Process Connections Process Connection Ch1 Input Process Terminal 1A 1B Ch 2 Input 2A 2B Ch 3 Input 3A 3B Ch 4 Input 4A 4B Ch 5 Input 5A 5B Ch 6 Input 6A 6B Ch 7 Input 7A 7B Ch 8 Input 8A 8B 216 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI802 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking Figure A-42 shows the process connections for the DI802. Process DI802 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B 7A 7B 8A 8B +120V 0V EM Figure A-42 DI802 Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 217 DI803 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.16 DI803 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking A.16.0.1 Features 8 channels for 230 V a.c./d.c. inputs with current sinking • Individually isolated channels • Voltage supervision of field input power • Input status indicators • Signal filtering • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting • Process connection via detachable connectors S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 STATUS • DI803 230V a.c./d.c. A.16.0.2 Description The DI803 is an 8 channel 230 V a.c./d.c.digital input module for the 1 A B S800 I/O. This module has 8 digital inputs. The a.c. input voltage range is 164 - 264 volt and the input current is 7.6 mA at 230 V a.c. The d.c. input range is 175 - 275 V and the input current is 1.6 mA at 220 V. The inputs are individually isolated. 2 A 3 4 5 6 7 8 B A B A B A B A B A B A B Every input channel consists of current limiting components, EMC protection components, input state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. One STATUS LED red or green indicate module status. One LED (Yellow) per channel (8) indicate input channel status (On = 1 and Off = 0). The STATUS LED green indicates normal operation. The STATUS LED red indicates that the module 218 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI803 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not Configured state the STATUS LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. Channel 8 can be used as voltage supervision input for channels 1-7. If the voltage connected to channel 8 disappears, the error inputs are activated. The error signal can be read from the ModuleBus. This supervision can be enabled/disabled with the “a” parameter. If the error inputs are disabled channel 8 can be used as normal input channels. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the POWOK signal is active. The input channels can be digitally filtered. The different filter times that can be achieved are 2, 4, 8 and 16 ms. This means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than 3, 6, 12 and 24 ms will get through the filter. 3BSE 020 924R4101 219 DI803 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.16.0.3 Technical Data Table A-34 DI803 Digital Input Module Specifications DI803 Digital Input Module Feature Number of channels 8, current sinking Rated voltage (process power supply range) 230 V a.c. (164 to 264 V a.c.) 220 V d.c. (175 to 275 V d.c.) Input voltage range, “1” 164 to 264 V a.c. 175 to 275 V d.c. Input voltage range, “0” 0 to 50 V a.c. 0 to 40 V d.c. Nominal input channel current 7.6 mA @ 230 V a.c. 1.6mA @ 220 V d.c. Input frequency range, a.c. 47…63 Hz Input impedance 30 kΩ (a.c.) 134 kΩ (d.c.) Maximum field cable length 200 meters (219 yd.) 100pF/m. for a.c. 600 meters (656 yd.) for d.c. Filter times (digital, selectable) 2, 4, 8, 16 ms Analog filter On/Off delay 5/28 ms Process voltage supervision Channel 8 Current consumption +5 V 50 mA Power dissipation (1) 2.8 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) 220 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI803 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking Table A-34 DI803 Digital Input Module Specifications (Continued) DI803 Digital Input Module Feature Isolation Individually isolated channels (RIV=250 V) Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 250 V Dielectric test voltage 2000 V a.c. Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.05-2.5mm2, 30-12 AWG Stranded: 0.05-1.5mm2, 30-12 AWG Recommended torque: 0.8 Nm Stripping length: 6-7.5 mm, 0.24-0.30 in Width 86.1 mm (3.4”) Depth 58.5 mm (2.3”) Height 110 mm (4.33”) Weight 0.24 kg (0.53 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 221 DI803 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.16.0.4 Block Diagram DI803 BIC INPUT CHANNELS STATUS Rectifiers and filters X1 1A 1B CH 2 2A 2B CH 3 3A 3B MBI-1 ASIC Process Connector ModuleBus Connector 0V RESET +5VI +5V POWER-OK CH 1 CH 4 DAT+ DAT- RS-485 CH 5 CLK+ CLK- RS-485 POS0-6 5A 5B CH 6 6A 6B CH 7 7A 7B CH 8 8A 8B EEPROM E1-7 222 4A 4B 1 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI803 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking A.16.0.5 Process Connections Table A-35 DI803 Process Connections Process Connection Ch1 Input Process Terminal 1A 1B Ch 2 Input 2A 2B Ch 3 Input 3A 3B Ch 4 Input 4A 4B Ch 5 Input 5A 5B Ch 6 Input 6A 6B Ch 7 Input 7A 7B Ch 8 Input 8A 8B 3BSE 020 924R4101 223 DI803 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Figure A-43 shows the process connections for the DI803. Process DI803 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B 7A 7B 8A 8B +230V 0V EM Figure A-43 DI803 Process Connections 224 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking A.17 DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking A.17.0.1 Features • 16 channels for 24 V d.c. inputs with current sinking F R • 2 isolated groups of 8 with voltage supervision W • Input status indicators 1 • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. • Also in a G3 compliant version A.17.0.2 Description The DI810 is a 16 channel 24 V digital input module for the S800 I/O. This module has 16 digital inputs. The input voltage range is 18 to 30 volt d.c. and the input current is 6 mA at 24 V. The inputs are divided into two individually isolated groups with eight channels and one voltage supervision input in each group. Every input channel consists of current limiting components, EMC protection components, input state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DI810 24V Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per channel (16) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The process voltage supervision input give channel error signals if the voltage disappears.The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. 3BSE 020 924R4101 225 DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The input channels can be digitally filtered. The different filter times that can be achieved are 2, 4, 8 and 16 ms. This means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than 3, 6, 12 and 24 ms will get through the filter. Five different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 24 V process voltage supervision inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of 24 V power supply to the devices. The extended MTU, TU838, provides a fuse (3 A max.) per two channels for process power out. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. 226 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking A.17.0.3 Technical Data Table A-36 DI810 Digital Input Module Specifications DI810 Digital Input Module Feature Number of channels 16 (2 x 8), current sinking Rated voltage (process power supply range) 24 V d.c. (18 to 30 V d.c.) Input voltage range, “1” 15 to 30 V Input voltage range, “0” -30 to +5 V Nominal input channel current 6 mA @ 24 V d.c. Input Impedance 3.5 kΩ Maximum field cable length 600 meters (656 yd.) Filter times (digital, selectable) 2, 4, 8, 16 ms Process voltage supervision 2 channels (1 per group) Current consumption +5 V 50 mA Power dissipation (1) 1.8 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Module termination units TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830 or TU838 MTU keying code AA Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 3BSE 020 924R4101 227 DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Table A-36 DI810 Digital Input Module Specifications (Continued) DI810 Digital Input Module Feature G3 compliant version According to ISA-S71.04. Marked with “Z” in the type designation. Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.15 kg (0.33 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated at nominal voltage of 24 Volts. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 228 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking A.17.0.4 Block Diagram DI810 X2 GROUP 1 BIC L1+ U1 I1 EMCBARRIER CH 1 FAULT WARNING MBI-1 ASIC X1 0V DAT DAT-N CH 8 RESET ModuleBus Connector +5VI +5V POWER-OK CH 2 . . . 24V SUPERVISION ERROR 1-8 L1- Process Connector L1+ I2 . . . L1+ I8 RUN RS-485 GROUP 2 POS0-9 BLOCK 8 / CH 9-16 EEPROM ERROR 9-16 EMCBARRIER 8 / L2+ L2+ I 9-16 24V SUPERVISION L2- EM 3BSE 020 924R4101 229 DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.17.0.5 Process Connections Table A-37 DI810 Process Connections Process Connection 230 TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 Male Terminal Connector (1) TU838 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ (2) 0 V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- (2) Ch1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2 A1 (F1) Ch1 Input C1 3 C1 B1 Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2 B2 Ch1/Ch2, L1- A1 - A1, A2 A2 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4 A3 (F2) Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3 B3 Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4 B4 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4 A4 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6 A5 (F3) Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5 B5 Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6 B6 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6 A6 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8 A7 (F4) Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7 B7 Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8 B8 Ch 7/Ch8, L1- A4 - A7, A8 A8 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10 A9 (F5) Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9 B9 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking Table A-37 DI810 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 Male Terminal Connector (1) TU838 Terminal Ch 10 Input B5 20 C10 B10 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10 A10 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12 A11 (F6) Ch 11 Input C6 8 C11 B11 Ch 12 Input B6 21 C12 B12 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12 A12 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14 A13 (F7) Ch 13 Input C7 9 C13 B13 Ch 14 Input B7 22 C14 B14 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14 A14 Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16 A15 (F8) Ch 15 Input C8 10 C15 B15 Ch 16 Input B8 23 C16 B16 Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16 A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ (2) 0 V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 3BSE 020 924R4101 231 DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Figure A-44 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI810 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. Process TU830/TU833 +24V + - + + - 6.3 A L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- L1+ L1+ L1L1B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 L1+ I3 I4 L1- L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- B5,B6 C5 C6 A5,A6 L1+ I5 I6 L1- L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2- L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 L2+ I11 I12 L2- L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,B16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2- +24V L2+ L2+ L2L2- 0V + DI810 0V Supervise Fuse L1+ I1 I2 L1- 6.3 A Supervise Fuse EM Figure A-44 DI810 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 232 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking Figure A-45 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI810 when installed on a TU838 Extended MTU. Process TU838 +24V 0V + + - + + - L1+ L1+ L1L1- L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- A1 B1 B2 A2 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- A3 B3 B4 A4 L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- A5 B5 B6 A6 L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- A7 B7 B8 A8 L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- A11 B11 B12 A12 L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- A13 B13 B14 A14 A15 B15 B16 A16 +24V 0V A9 B9 B10 A10 L2+ L2+ L2L2- DI810 Supervise F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 L1+ I1 I2 L1L1+ I3 I4 L1L1+ I5 I6 L1L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2L2+ I11 I12 L2L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2Supervise EM Figure A-45 DI810 with TU838 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 233 DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Figure A-46 shows the process connections for the DI810 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Process TU810 (or TU814) +24V L1+ L1+ L1- 0V C1 B1 A1 L1+ I1 I2 L1- Ch3 Ch4 L1- C2 B2 A2 L1+ I3 I4 L1- Ch5 Ch6 L1- C3 B3 A3 L1+ I5 I6 L1- Ch7 Ch8 L1- C4 B4 A4 Ch9 Ch10 L2- C5 B5 A5 L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2- Ch11 Ch12 L2- C6 B6 A6 L2+ I11 I12 L2- Ch13 Ch14 L2- C7 B7 A7 Ch15 Ch16 L2- C8 B8 A8 + - + + - +24V 0V Supervise Ch1 Ch2 L1- + - DI810 L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2- L2+ L2+ L2- Supervise EM Figure A-46 DI810 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 234 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI810 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sinking Figure A-47 shows the process connections for the DI810 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. TU812 Process Connection 1 1 UP1 +24V 14 14 UP1 2 2 ZP1 15 15 ZP1 3 3 S1 Ch1 16 16 S2 Ch2 4 4 S3 Ch3 17 17 S4 Ch4 5 5 S5 Ch5 18 18 S6 Ch6 6 6 S7 Ch7 19 19 S8 Ch8 7 7 S9 Ch9 20 20 S10 Ch10 8 8 S11 Ch11 21 21 S12 Ch12 9 9 S13 Ch13 22 22 S14 Ch14 10 10 S15 Ch15 23 23 S16 Ch16 11 11 UP2 +24V 24 24 UP2 12 12 ZP2 0V 25 25 ZP2 13 13 EM DI810 Supervise 0V L1+ I1 I2 L1L1+ I3 I4 L1L1+ I5 I6 L1L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2L2+ I11 I12 L2L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2Supervise EM Figure A-47 DI810 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 235 DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.18 DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking A.18.0.1 Features • 16 channels for 48 V d.c. inputs with current sinking F R • 2 isolated groups of 8 with voltage supervision W • Input status indicators 1 • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. A.18.0.2 Description The DI811 is a 16 channel 48 V digital input module for the S800 I/O. This module has 16 digital inputs. The input signal voltage range is 36 to 60 volt d.c. and the input current is 4 mA at 48 V. The inputs are divided into two individually isolated groups with eight channels and one voltage supervision input in each group. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Every input channel consists of current limiting components, EMC protection components, input state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per channel (16) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The process voltage supervision input give channel error signals if the voltage disappears.The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. 236 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking The process voltage supervision input give channel error signals if the voltage disappears.The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The input channels can be digitally filtered. The different filter times that can be achieved are 2, 4, 8 and 16 ms. This means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than 3, 6, 12 and 24 ms will get through the filter. Five different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 48 V process voltage supervision inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of 48 V power supply to the devices. The extended MTU, TU838, provide a fuse (3 A max.) per two channels for process power out. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. 3BSE 020 924R4101 237 DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.18.0.3 Technical Data Table A-38 DI811 Digital Input Module Specifications DI811 Digital Input Module Feature Number of channels 16 (2 x 8), current sinking Rated voltage (process power supply range) 48 V d.c. (36 to 60 V d.c.) Input signal voltage range, “1” 30 to 60 V Input signal voltage range, “0” -60 to +10 V Nominal input channel current 4 mA @ 48 V d.c. Input Impedance 11 kΩ Maximum field cable length 600 meters (656 yd.) Filter times (digital, selectable) 2, 4, 8, 16 ms Process voltage supervision 2 channels (1 per group) Current consumption +5 V 50 mA Power dissipation (1) 2.7 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) 238 Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Module termination units TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830 or TU838 MTU keying code BD Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking Table A-38 DI811 Digital Input Module Specifications (Continued) Feature DI811 Digital Input Module Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.18 kg (0.4 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated at nominal voltage of 48 Volts. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 239 DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.18.0.4 Block Diagram DI811 X2 GROUP 1 BIC FAULT CH 2 . . . CH 8 L1+ I2 . . . L1+ I8 RUN WARNING MBI-1 ASIC X1 0V DAT DAT-N RESET ModuleBus Connector +5VI +5V POWER-OK 48V SUPERVISION ERROR 1-8 L1- Process Connector CH 1 L1+ U1 I1 EMCBARRIER RS-485 GROUP 2 POS0-9 BLOCK 8 / CH 9-16 EEPROM ERROR 9-16 EMCBARRIER 8 / L2+ L2+ I 9-16 48V SUPERVISION L2- EM 240 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking A.18.0.5 Process Connections Table A-39 DI811 Process Connections Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 male Terminal Connector (1) TU838 Terminal +48 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ (2) 0 V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- (2) Ch1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2 A1 (F1) Ch1 Input C1 3 C1 B1 Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2 B2 Ch1/Ch2, L1- A1 - A1, A2 A2 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4 A3 (F2) Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3 B3 Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4 B4 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4 A4 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6 A5 (F3) Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5 B5 Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6 B6 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6 A6 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8 A7 (F4) Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7 B7 Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8 B8 Ch 7/Ch8, L1- A4 - A7, A8 A8 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10 A9 (F5) Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9 B9 3BSE 020 924R4101 241 DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Table A-39 DI811 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 male Terminal Connector (1) TU838 Terminal Ch 10 Input B5 20 C10 B10 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10 A10 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12 A11 (F6) Ch 11 Input C6 8 C11 B11 Ch 12 Input B6 21 C12 B12 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12 A12 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14 A13 (F7) Ch 13 Input C7 9 C13 B13 Ch 14 Input B7 22 C14 B14 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14 A14 Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16 A15 (F8) Ch 15 Input C8 10 C15 B15 Ch 16 Input B8 23 C16 B16 Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16 A16 +48 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ (2) 0 V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 242 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking Figure A-48 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI811 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. Process TU830/TU833 +48V + - + + - 6.3 A L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- L1+ L1+ L1L1B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 L1+ I3 I4 L1- L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- B5,B6 C5 C6 A5,A6 L1+ I5 I6 L1- L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2- L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 L2+ I11 I12 L2- L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,B16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2- +48V L2+ L2+ L2L2- 0V + DI811 0V Supervise Fuse L1+ I1 I2 L1- 6.3 A Supervise Fuse EM Figure A-48 DI811 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 243 DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Figure A-49 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI811 when installed on a TU838 Extended MTU. Process TU838 +48V 0V + + - + + - L1+ L1+ L1L1- L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- A1 B1 B2 A2 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- A3 B3 B4 A4 L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- A5 B5 B6 A6 L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- A7 B7 B8 A8 L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- A11 B11 B12 A12 L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- A13 B13 B14 A14 A15 B15 B16 A16 +48V 0V A9 B9 B10 A10 L2+ L2+ L2L2- DI811 Supervise F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 L1+ I1 I2 L1L1+ I3 I4 L1L1+ I5 I6 L1L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2L2+ I11 I12 L2L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2Supervise EM Figure A-49 DI811 with TU838 Extended MTU Process Connections 244 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking Figure A-50 shows the process connections for the DI811 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Process TU810 (or TU814) +48V L1+ L1+ L1- 0V C1 B1 A1 L1+ I1 I2 L1- Ch3 Ch4 L1- C2 B2 A2 L1+ I3 I4 L1- Ch5 Ch6 L1- C3 B3 A3 L1+ I5 I6 L1- Ch7 Ch8 L1- C4 B4 A4 Ch9 Ch10 L2- C5 B5 A5 L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2- Ch11 Ch12 L2- C6 B6 A6 L2+ I11 I12 L2- Ch13 Ch14 L2- C7 B7 A7 Ch15 Ch16 L2- C8 B8 A8 + - + + - +48V 0V Supervise Ch1 Ch2 L1- + - DI811 L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2- L2+ L2+ L2- Supervise EM Figure A-50 DI811 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 245 DI811 Digital Input Module, 48 V, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Figure A-51 shows the process connections for the DI811 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU TU812 Process Connection 1 1 UP1 +24V 14 14 UP1 2 2 ZP1 15 15 ZP1 3 3 S1 Ch1 16 16 S2 Ch2 4 4 S3 Ch3 17 17 S4 Ch4 5 5 S5 Ch5 18 18 S6 Ch6 6 6 S7 Ch7 19 19 S8 Ch8 7 7 S9 Ch9 20 20 S10 Ch10 8 8 S11 Ch11 21 21 S12 Ch12 9 9 S13 Ch13 22 22 S14 Ch14 10 10 S15 Ch15 23 23 S16 Ch16 11 11 UP2 +24V 24 24 UP2 12 12 ZP2 0V 25 25 ZP2 13 13 EM DI811 Supervise 0V L1+ I1 I2 L1L1+ I3 I4 L1L1+ I5 I6 L1L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2L2+ I11 I12 L2L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2- Supervise EM Figure A-51 DI811with TU812 246 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing A.19 DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing A.19.0.1 Features • 16 channels for 24 V d.c. inputs with current sourcing • 2 Isolated groups of 8 with voltage supervision W • Input status indicators 1 • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. A.19.0.2 Description F R 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The DI814 is a 16 channel 24 V digital input module with current sourcing for the S800 I/O. The input voltage range is 18 to 30 volt dc and the input current source is 6 mA at 24 V. The inputs are divided into two individually isolated groups with eight channels and one voltage supervision input in each group. Every input channel consists of current limiting components, EMC protection components, input state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per channel (16) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The process voltage supervision input give channel error signals if the voltage disappears.The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is 3BSE 020 924R4101 247 DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The input channels can be digitally filtered. The different filter times that can be achieved are 2, 4, 8 and 16 ms. This means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than 3, 6, 12 and 24 ms will get through the filter. Five different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 24 V process voltage supervision inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of 24 V power supply to the devices. The extended MTU, TU838, provide a fuse (3 A max.) per two channels for process power out. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. 248 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing A.19.0.3 Technical Data Table A-40 DI814 Digital Input Module Specifications DI814 Digital Input Module Feature Number of channels 16 (2 x 8), current sourcing Rated voltage (process power supply range) 24 V d.c. (18 to 30 V d.c.) Input voltage range, “1” 15 to 30 V Input voltage range, “0” -30 to +5 V Nominal input channel current 6 mA @ 24 V d.c. Input Impedance 3.5 kΩ Maximum Field Cable Length 600 meters (656 yd.) Filter times (digital, selectable) 2, 4, 8, 16 ms Process voltage supervision 2 channels (1 per group) Current consumption +5 V 50 mA Power dissipation(1) 1.8 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Module termination units TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830 or TU838 MTU keying code BE Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V 3BSE 020 924R4101 249 DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications Table A-40 DI814 Digital Input Module Specifications (Continued) Feature DI814 Digital Input Module Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.15 kg (0.33 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated at nominal voltage of 24 Volts. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 250 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing A.19.0.4 Block Diagram DI814 BIC X2 GROUP 1 UP1 U1 EMCBARRIER CH 1 FAULT I1 U2 RUN WARNING MBI-1 X1 ASIC I8 24V SUPERVISION ERROR 1-8 ZP1 DAT+ DAT- RS-485 CLK+ CLK- RS-485 POS0-6 BLOCK EEPROM Process Connector Modulebus Connector POWER-OK 0V RESET +5VI +5V I2 . . . U18 CH 2 . . . CH 8 GROUP 2 UP2 U9-16 EMCBARRIER 8 CH 9-16 / ERROR 9-16 8 / I 9-16 24V SUPERVISION ZP2 EM 3BSE 020 924R4101 251 DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications A.19.0.5 Process Connections Table A-41 DI814 Process Connections Process Connection 252 TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 male Terminal Connector (1) TU838 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ (2) 0 V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- (2) Ch1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2 A1 (F1) Ch1 Input C1 3 C1 B1 Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2 B2 Ch1/Ch2, L1- A1 - A1, A2 A2 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4 A3 (F2) Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3 B3 Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4 B4 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4 A4 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6 A5 (F3) Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5 B5 Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6 B6 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6 A6 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8 A7 (F4) Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7 B7 Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8 B8 Ch 7/Ch8, L1- A4 - A7, A8 A8 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10 A9 (F5) Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9 B9 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing Table A-41 DI814 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 male Terminal Connector (1) TU838 Terminal Ch 10 Input B5 20 C10 B10 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10 A10 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12 A11 (F6) Ch 11 Input C6 8 C11 B11 Ch 12 Input B6 21 C12 B12 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12 A12 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14 A13 (F7) Ch 13 Input C7 9 C13 B13 Ch 14 Input B7 22 C14 B14 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14 A14 Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16 A15 (F8) Ch 15 Input C8 10 C15 B15 Ch 16 Input B8 23 C16 B16 Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16 A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ (2) 0 V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 3BSE 020 924R4101 253 DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications Figure A-52 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI814 (current sourcing) when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. Process TU830/TU833 +24V 0V + + - + + - L1+ L1+ L1L1- DI814 6.3 A Supervise Fuse L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 L1+ I1 I2 L1- L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 L1+ I3 I4 L1- L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- B5,A6 C5 C6 A5,A6 L1+ I5 I6 L1- L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2- L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 L2+ I11 I12 L2- L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,A16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2- +24V L2+ L2+ L2L2- 0V 6.3 A Supervise Fuse EM Figure A-52 DI814 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 254 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing Figure A-53 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI814 (current sourcing) when installed on a TU838 Extended MTU. Process TU838 +24V 0V + + - + + - L1+ L1+ L1L1- L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- A1 B1 B2 A2 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- A3 B3 B4 A4 L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- A5 B5 B6 A6 L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- A7 B7 B8 A8 L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- A11 B11 B12 A12 L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- A13 B13 B14 A14 A15 B15 B16 A16 +24V 0V A9 B9 B10 A10 L2+ L2+ L2L2- DI814 Supervise F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 L1+ I1 I2 L1L1+ I3 I4 L1L1+ I5 I6 L1L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2L2+ I11 I12 L2L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2Supervise EM Figure A-53 DI814 with TU838 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 255 DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications Figure A-54 shows the process connections for the DI814 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Process TU810 (or TU814) +24V L1+ L1+ L1- 0V C1 B1 A1 L1+ I1 I2 L1- Ch3 Ch4 L1- C2 B2 A2 L1+ I3 I4 L1- Ch5 Ch6 L1- C3 B3 A3 L1+ I5 I6 L1- Ch7 Ch8 L1- C4 B4 A4 Ch9 Ch10 L2- C5 B5 A5 L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2- Ch11 Ch12 L2- C6 B6 A6 L2+ I11 I12 L2- Ch13 Ch14 L2- C7 B7 A7 Ch15 Ch16 L2- C8 B8 A8 + - + + - +24V 0V Supervise Ch1 Ch2 L1- + - DI814 L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2- L2+ L2+ L2- Supervise EM Figure A-54 DI814 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 256 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI814 Digital Input Module, 24 V, Current Sourcing Figure A-55 shows the process connections for the DI814 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. TU812 Process Connection 1 1 UP1 +24V 14 14 UP1 2 2 ZP1 15 15 ZP1 3 3 S1 Ch1 16 16 S2 Ch2 4 4 S3 Ch3 17 17 S4 Ch4 5 5 S5 Ch5 18 18 S6 Ch6 6 6 S7 Ch7 19 19 S8 Ch8 7 7 S9 Ch9 20 20 S10 Ch10 8 8 S11 Ch11 21 21 S12 Ch12 9 9 S13 Ch13 22 22 S14 Ch14 10 10 S15 Ch15 23 23 S16 Ch16 11 11 UP2 +24V 24 24 UP2 12 12 ZP2 0V 25 25 ZP2 13 13 EM DI814 Supervise 0V L1+ I1 I2 L1L1+ I3 I4 L1L1+ I5 I6 L1L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2L2+ I11 I12 L2L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2- Supervise EM Figure A-55 DI814 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 257 DI820 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c Appendix A Specifications A.20 DI820 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c A.20.0.1 Features • 8 channels for 120 V a.c./d.c. inputs • Individually isolated channels • Voltage supervision of field input power • Input status indicators 1 • Signal filtering 2 • EMC protection 3 • DIN rail mounting. • Also in a G3 compliant version F R W 4 5 A.20.0.2 Description The DI820 is an 8 channel 120 V a.c./d.c. digital input module for the S800 I/O. This module has 8 digital inputs. The a.c. input voltage range is 77 - 130 volt and the input current is 10 mA at 120 V a.c. The d.c. input range is 75 - 145 V and the input current is 2.8 mA at 110 V. The inputs are individually isolated. 6 7 8 DI820 120V a.c. Every input channel consists of current limiting components, EMC protection components, input state indication LED, optical isolation barrier and an analog filter (6 ms). Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per channel (8) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. Channel 1 can be used as voltage supervision input for channels 2 - 4, and channel 8 can be used as voltage supervision input for channels 5 - 7. 258 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI820 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c If the voltage connected to channel 1 or 8 disappears, the error inputs are activated and the Warning LED turns on. The error signal can be read from the ModuleBus. This supervision can be enabled/ disabled with a parameter. If the error inputs are disabled channel 1 and 8 can be used as normal input channels. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The input channels can be digitally filtered. The different filter times that can be achieved are 2, 4, 8 and 16 ms. This means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than 3, 6, 12 and 24 ms will get through the filter. Two different types of MTUs can be used, TU831 Extended MTU and TU811 Compact MTU both have two terminals per channel. 3BSE 020 924R4101 259 DI820 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c Appendix A Specifications A.20.0.3 Technical Data Table A-42 DI820 Digital Input Module Specifications DI820 Digital Input Module Feature Number of channels 8 Rated voltage (process power supply range) 120 V a.c. (77 to 130 V a.c.) 110 V d.c. (75 to 145 V d.c.) Input voltage range, “1” 77 to 130 V +75 to 145 V d.c. Input voltage range, “0” 0 to 30 V a.c. +0 to 20 V d.c. Nominal input channel current 10 mA ac @ 120 V a.c. 2.8 mA dc @110 V d.c. Input frequency range a.c. 47…65 Hz Impedance 12 kΩ (a.c.) 39 KΩ (d.c.) Maximum Field Cable Length 200 meters (219 yd.) 100pF/m. for a.c. 600 meters (656 yd.) for d.c. Filter times (digital, selectable) 2, 4, 8, 16 ms Analog filter On/Off delay 5/18 ms Process voltage supervision 2 channels, 1 and 8 Current consumption +5 V 50 mA Power dissipation(1) 2.8 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) 260 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI820 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c Table A-42 DI820 Digital Input Module Specifications (Continued) DI820 Digital Input Module Feature Isolation Individually isolated channels (RIV=250 V) Module termination units TU811 or TU831 MTU keying code AB Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 G3 compliant version According to ISA-S71.04. Marked with “Z” in the type designation. Rated insulation voltage 250 V Dielectric test voltage 2000 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.18 kg (0.4 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 261 DI820 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c Appendix A Specifications A.20.0.4 Block Diagram DI820 BIC X2 INPUT CHANNELS FAULT Rectifiers and filters RUN WARNING I 1.1 I 1.2 CH 1 E2-4 X1 DAT+ DAT- I 2.1 I 2.2 CH 3 I 3.1 I 3.2 CH 4 I 4.1 I 4.2 CH 5 I 5.1 I 5.2 CH 6 I 6.1 I 6.2 CH 7 I 7.1 I 7.2 CH 8 I 8.1 I 8.2 MBI-1 ASIC RS-485 CLK+ CLK- RS-485 POS0-6 BLOCK Process Connector ModuleBus Connector 0V RESET +5VI +5V POWER-OK 1 CH 2 EEPROM E5-7 262 1 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI820 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c A.20.0.5 Process Connections Table A-43 DI820 Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 Process Connection TU811 Terminal TU831 Terminal Ch 1.1 Input B1 B1 Ch 1.2 Input A1 A1 Ch 2.1 Input C2 B2 Ch 2.2 Input A2 A2 Ch 3.1 Input B3 B3 Ch 3.2 Input A3 A3 Ch 4.1 Input C4 B4 Ch 4.2 Input A4 A4 Ch 5.1 Input B5 B5 Ch 5.2 Input A5 A5 Ch 6.1 Input C6 B6 Ch 6.2 Input A6 A6 Ch 7.1 Input B7 B7 Ch 7.2 Input A7 A7 Ch 8.1 Input C8 B8 Ch 8.2 Input A8 A8 263 DI820 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c Appendix A Specifications Figure A-56 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI820 when installed on a TU831 Extended MTU. Process TU831 DI820 120V a.c. or 110V d.c. 120V a.c. or 110V d.c. Ch1.1 Ch1.2 B1 A1 I 1.1 I 1.2 Ch2.1 Ch2.2 B2 A2 I 2.1 I 2.2 Ch3.1 Ch3.2 B3 A3 I 3.1 I 3.2 Ch4.1 Ch4.2 B4 A4 I 4.1 I 4.2 Ch5.1 Ch5.2 B5 A5 I 5.1 I 5.2 Ch6.1 Ch6.2 B6 A6 I 6.1 I 6.2 Ch7.1 Ch7.2 B7 A7 I 7.1 I 7.2 Ch8.1 Ch8.2 B8 A8 I 8.1 I 8.2 EM Figure A-56 DI820 with TU831 Extended MTU Process Connections 264 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI820 Digital Input Module, 120 V a.c./d.c Figure A-57 shows the process connections for the DI820 when installed on a TU811 or TU813 Compact MTU. Process TU811/TU813 DI820 120V a.c. or 110V d.c. 120V a.c. or 110V d.c. Ch1.1 Ch1.2 B1 A1 I 1.1 I 1.2 Ch2.1 Ch2.2 C2 A2 I 2.1 I 2.2 Ch3.1 Ch3.2 B3 A3 I 3.1 I 3.2 Ch4.1 Ch4.2 C4 A4 I 4.1 I 4.2 Ch5.1 Ch5.2 B5 A5 I 5.1 I 5.2 Ch6.1 Ch6.2 C6 A6 I 6.1 I 6.2 Ch7.1 Ch7.2 B7 A7 I 7.1 I 7.2 Ch8.1 Ch8.2 C8 A8 I 8.1 I 8.2 EM Figure A-57 DI820 with TU811 or TU813 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 265 DI821 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c. Appendix A Specifications A.21 DI821 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c. A.21.0.1 Features • 8 channels for 230 V a.c./d.c. inputs • Individually isolated points • Voltage supervision of field input power • Input status indicators 1 • Signal filtering 2 • EMC protection 3 • DIN rail mounting. • Also in a G3 compliant version F R W 4 5 A.21.0.2 Description The DI821 is an 8 channel 230 V a.c./d.c. digital input module for the S800 I/O. This module has 8 digital inputs. The ac input voltage range is 164 to 264 volt and the input current is 11 mA at 230 V a.c. The d.c. input voltage range is 175 to 275 volt and the input current is 1.6 mA at 220 V d.c. The inputs are individually isolated. 6 7 8 DI821 230V a.c. Every input channel consists of current limiting components, EMC protection components, input state indication LED, optical isolation barrier and an analog filter (6 ms). Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per channel (8) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. Channel 1 can be used as voltage supervision input for channels 2 - 4, and channel 8 can be used as voltage supervision input for channels 5 - 7. 266 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI821 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c. If the voltage connected to channel 1 or 8 disappears, the error inputs are activated and the Warning LED turns on. The error signal can be read from the ModuleBus. This supervision can be enabled/disabled with the a parameter. If the error inputs are disabled channel 1 and 8 can be used as normal input channels. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The input channels can be digitally filtered. The different filter times that can be achieved are 2, 4, 8 and 16 ms. This means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than 3, 6, 12 and 24 ms will get through the filter. Two different types of MTUs can be used, TU831 Extended MTU and TU811 Compact MTU both have two terminals per channel. 3BSE 020 924R4101 267 DI821 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c. Appendix A Specifications A.21.0.3 Technical Data Table A-44 DI821 Digital Input Module Specifications DI821 Digital Input Module Feature Number of channels 8 Rated voltage (process power supply range) 230 V a.c. (164 to 264 V a.c.) 220 V d.c. (175 to 275 V d.c.) Input voltage range, “1” 164 to 264 V a.c. +175 to 275 V d.c. Input voltage range, “0” 0 to 50 V a.c. +0 to 40 V d.c. Nominal input channel current 11 mA @ 230 V a.c. 1.6mA @ 220 V d.c. Input frequency range, a.c. 47…63 Hz Impedance 21 kΩ (a.c.) 134 KΩ (d.c.) Maximum field cable length 200 meters (219 yd.) 100pF/m for a.c. 600 meters (656 yd.) for d.c. Filter times (digital, selectable) 2, 4, 8, 16 ms Analog filter On/Off delay 5/28 ms Process voltage supervision 2 channels, 1 and 8 Current consumption +5 V 50 mA Power dissipation(1) 2.8 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) 268 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI821 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c. Table A-44 DI821 Digital Input Module Specifications (Continued) DI821 Digital Input Module Feature Isolation Individually isolated channels (RIV=250 V) Module termination units TU811 or TU831 MTU keying code AC Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 G3 compliant version According to ISA-S71.04. Marked with “Z” in the type designation. Rated insulation voltage 250 V Dielectric test voltage 2000 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.18 kg (0.4 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 269 DI821 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c. Appendix A Specifications A.21.0.4 Block Diagram DI821 BIC X2 INPUT CHANNELS FAULT Rectifiers and filters RUN WARNING I 1.1 I 1.2 CH 1 E2-4 X1 DAT+ DAT- I 2.1 I 2.2 CH 3 I 3.1 I 3.2 CH 4 I 4.1 I 4.2 CH 5 I 5.1 I 5.2 CH 6 I 6.1 I 6.2 CH 7 I 7.1 I 7.2 CH 8 I 8.1 I 8.2 MBI-1 ASIC RS-485 CLK+ CLK- RS-485 POS0-6 BLOCK EEPROM E5-7 270 Process Connector ModuleBus Connector 0V RESET +5VI +5V POWER-OK 1 CH 2 1 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI821 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c. A.21.0.5 Process Connections Table A-45 DI821 Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 Process Connection TU811 Terminal TU831 Terminal Ch 1.1 Input B1 B1 Ch 1.2 Input A1 A1 Ch 2.1 Input C2 B2 Ch 2.2 Input A2 A2 Ch 3.1 Input B3 B3 Ch 3.2 Input A3 A3 Ch 4.1 Input C4 B4 Ch 4.2 Input A4 A4 Ch 5.1 Input B5 B5 Ch 5.2 Input A5 A5 Ch 6.1 Input C6 B6 Ch 6.2 Input A6 A6 Ch 7.1 Input B7 B7 Ch 7.2 Input A7 A7 Ch 8.1 Input C8 B8 Ch 8.2 Input A8 A8 271 DI821 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c. Appendix A Specifications Figure A-58 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI821 when installed on a TU831 Extended MTU. Process TU831 DI821 230V a.c. or 220V d.c. 230V a.c. or 220V d.c. Ch1.1 Ch1.2 B1 A1 I 1.1 I 1.2 Ch2.1 Ch2.2 B2 A2 I 2.1 I 2.2 Ch3.1 Ch3.2 B3 A3 I 3.1 I 3.2 Ch4.1 Ch4.2 B4 A4 I 4.1 I 4.2 Ch5.1 Ch5.2 B5 A5 I 5.1 I 5.2 Ch6.1 Ch6.2 B6 A6 I 6.1 I 6.2 Ch7.1 Ch7.2 B7 A7 I 7.1 I 7.2 Ch8.1 Ch8.2 B8 A8 I 8.1 I 8.2 EM Figure A-58 DI821 with TU831 Extended MTU Process Connections 272 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI821 Digital Input Module, 230 V a.c./d.c. Figure A-59 shows the process connections for the DI821 when installed on a TU811 or TU813 Compact MTU. Process TU811/TU813 DI821 230V a.c. or 220V d.c. 230V a.c. or 220V d.c. Ch1.1 Ch1.2 B1 A1 I 1.1 I 1.2 Ch2.1 Ch2.2 C2 A2 I 2.1 I 2.2 Ch3.1 Ch3.2 B3 A3 I 3.1 I 3.2 Ch4.1 Ch4.2 C4 A4 I 4.1 I 4.2 Ch5.1 Ch5.2 B5 A5 I 5.1 I 5.2 Ch6.1 Ch6.2 C6 A6 I 6.1 I 6.2 Ch7.1 Ch7.2 B7 A7 I 7.1 I 7.2 Ch8.1 Ch8.2 C8 A8 I 8.1 I 8.2 EM Figure A-59 DI821 with TU811 or TU813 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 273 DI825 Digital Input Module, 125 V d.c with SOE Appendix A Specifications A.22 DI825 Digital Input Module, 125 V d.c with SOE A.22.0.1 Features • 8 channels for 125 V d.c. inputs • Individually isolated channels • Input status indicators • Sequence of event (SOE) functionality • Signal filtering • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. A.22.0.2 Description The DI825 is an 8 channel 125 V d.c. digital input module for the S800 I/O. The input range is 75 - 145 V and the input current is 3.9 mA at 125 V. The inputs are individually isolated. Every input channel consists of current limiting components, EMC protection components, input state indication LED, optical isolation barrier. Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per channel (8) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. Channel 1 can be used as voltage supervision input for channels 2 - 4, and channel 8 can be used as voltage supervision input for channels 5 - 7. If the voltage supervision is used and the voltage connected to channel 1 or 8 disappears, the channel error will be set for the channels and the Warning LED turns on. The error signal can be read from the ModuleBus. This supervision can be 274 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI825 Digital Input Module, 125 V d.c with SOE enabled/ disabled with a parameter. If the supervision is disabled channel 1 and 8 can be used as normal input channels. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The input channels can be digitally filtered. The filter times can be set between 0 to 100 ms. This means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than will get through the filter. Three different types of MTUs can be used; TU831 Extended MTU, TU811 or TU813 Compact MTU. All three has two terminals per channel. A.22.0.3 Event Recording The DI825 Input Module can be used for event recording (SOE), that is, changing signals at digital input channels can be announced together with a time stamp indicating when it occurred. Events are generated on both positive and negative going edges of the signals. The time stamp has a resolution of 0.4 millisecond, and is compensated for the filter time. The module has intermediate storage for 32 events. The SOE functionality can be switched on and off per channel. For all channels with enabled SOE capability, a shutter filter is implemented that prevents intermediate storage for events from overflow. The shutter filter is closed as soon as the number of events generated within the shutter period (0-255 seconds) exceeds the shutter trigger number (0-255 changes). The shutter filter remains closed as long as the recovery time (0-65535 seconds) has not expired. A.22.0.4 Simple Digital Input If no event recording is used, the DI825 acts like a simple digital input device. 3BSE 020 924R4101 275 DI825 Digital Input Module, 125 V d.c with SOE Appendix A Specifications A.22.0.5 Technical Data Table A-46 DI825 Digital Input Module Specifications DI825 Digital Input Module Feature Number of channels 8 Rated voltage 125 V d.c. Input voltage range, “1” 71 to 156 V Input voltage range, “0” 0 to 20 V Nominal input channel current 3,9 mA @ 125 V Input current “1” >1.8 mA Input current “0” <1.0 mA Nominal impedance 32 kΩ Maximum Field Cable Length 600 meters (656 yd.) Filter times (digital, selectable) 0 to 100 ms Process voltage supervision 2 channels, 1 and 8 Shutter filter Shutter period 0 - 255 s Shutter trigger number 0 - 255 changes Recovery time 0 - 65535 s Intermediate storage 32 events Event recording resolution 0.4 ms Error time stamp -0.25 ms to 1 ms Current consumption +5 V Max 90 mA Max power dissipation 4.4 W(1) Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) 276 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI825 Digital Input Module, 125 V d.c with SOE Table A-46 DI825 Digital Input Module Specifications (Continued) DI825 Digital Input Module Feature Isolation Individually isolated channels (RIV=250 V) Dielectric test voltage 2300 V a.c. Ch - EM 1350 V a.c. Ch - Ch Module termination units TU811, TU813 or TU831 MTU keying code AB Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 250 V Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.14 kg (0.31 lbs.) (1) All inputs activated (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 277 DI825 Digital Input Module, 125 V d.c with SOE Appendix A Specifications A.22.0.6 Block Diagram DI825 MODULEBUS INTERFACE COMPUTER X2 INPUT CHANNELS Rectifiers and filters FAULT RUN E2-4 WARNING RWM MBI-2 X1 ASIC Modulebus Connector 0V I2+ I2- CH 3 I3+ I3- CH 4 I4+ I4- CH 5 I5+ I5- CH 6 I6+ I6- CH 7 I7+ I7- CH 8 I8+ I8- DATA ADDRESS CPU 68HC12 DAT+ DAT- RS-485 EEPROM CLK+ CLK- RS-485 POS0-6 FPROM BLOCK 3 PROGR MODE X3 1 / E5-7 278 1 CH 2 Process Connector POWER-OK RESET +5VI +5V I1+ I1- CH 1 BDM 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI825 Digital Input Module, 125 V d.c with SOE A.22.0.7 Process Connections Table A-47 DI825 Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 Process Connection TU811 or TU813 Terminal TU831 Terminal Ch 1.1 Input B1 B1 Ch 1.2 Input A1 A1 Ch 2.1 Input C2 B2 Ch 2.2 Input A2 A2 Ch 3.1 Input B3 B3 Ch 3.2 Input A3 A3 Ch 4.1 Input C4 B4 Ch 4.2 Input A4 A4 Ch 5.1 Input B5 B5 Ch 5.2 Input A5 A5 Ch 6.1 Input C6 B6 Ch 6.2 Input A6 A6 Ch 7.1 Input B7 B7 Ch 7.2 Input A7 A7 Ch 8.1 Input C8 B8 Ch 8.2 Input A8 A8 279 DI825 Digital Input Module, 125 V d.c with SOE Appendix A Specifications Figure A-56 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI825 when installed on a TU811 or TU813 Compact MTU. Process TU811/TU813 DI825 125V d.c. + 125V d.c. + Ch1+ Ch1- B1 A1 I1+ I1- Ch2+ Ch2- C2 A2 I2+ I2- Ch3+ Ch3- B3 A3 I3+ I3- Ch4+ Ch4- C4 A4 I4+ I4- Ch5+ Ch5- B5 A5 I5+ I5- Ch6+ Ch6- C6 A6 I6+ I6- Ch7+ Ch7- B7 A7 I7+ I7- Ch8+ Ch8- C8 A8 I8+ I8- EM Figure A-60 DI825 with TU811 or TU813 Compact MTU Process Connections 280 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI825 Digital Input Module, 125 V d.c with SOE Figure A-57 shows the process connections for the DI825 when installed on a TU831 Extended MTU. Process TU831 DI825 125V d.c. + 125V d.c. + Ch1+ Ch1- B1 A1 I1+ I1- Ch2+ Ch2- B2 A2 I2+ I2- Ch3+ Ch3- B3 A3 I3+ I3- Ch4+ Ch4- B4 A4 I4+ I4- Ch5+ Ch5- B5 A5 I5+ I5- Ch6+ Ch6- B6 A6 I6+ I6- Ch7+ Ch7- B7 A7 I7+ I7- Ch8+ Ch8- B8 A8 I8+ I8- EM Figure A-61 DI825 with TU831 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 281 DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.23 DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking A.23.0.1 Features • 16 channels for 24 V d.c. inputs with current sinking • 2 isolated groups of 8 channels with voltage supervision • Input status indicators 1 • Sequence of event (SOE) functionality 2 3 • Shutter filter • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. F R W 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A.23.0.2 Description 11 12 The DI830 is a 16 channel 24 V d.c. digital input module for the S800 I/O. The input voltage range is 18 to 30 V d.c. and the input current is 6 mA at 24 V d.c. 13 Each input channel consists of current limiting components, EMC protection components, input state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. 14 15 16 DI830 24V, SOE Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per channel (16) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in the Init state, Error state or Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid master frame to the module. The module cyclically performs self-diagnostics. Module diagnostics include: 282 • Process power supply supervision (causes a module failure if detected) • Event queue full 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications • DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Time synchronization missing The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The input signals can be digitally filtered. The filter is selectable from 0 to 100 ms. This means that pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than specified will get through the filter. Five different types of MTUs can be used. The Extended MTU (for example TU830) enables three wire connection to the transducers without additional terminals. The Compact MTU (for example TU810 or TU 814) has terminals for process voltage supervision inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of process power supply to the transducers. The extended MTU, TU838, provide a fuse (3 A max.) per two channels for process power out. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. A.23.0.3 Event Recording The DI830 Input Module can be used for event recording (SOE), that is, changing signals at digital input channels can be announced together with a time stamp indicating when it occurred. Events are generated on both positive and negative going edges of the signal. The time stamp has a resolution of 0.4 millisecond, and is compensated for the filter time. The module has intermediate storage for 32 events. The SOE functionality can be switched on and off per channel. For all channels with enabled SOE capability, a shutter filter is implemented that prevents intermediate storage for events from overflow. The shutter filter is closed as soon as the number of events generated within the shutter period (0-255 seconds) exceeds the shutter trigger number (0-255 changes). The shutter filter remains closed as long as the recovery time (0-65535 seconds) has not expired. A.23.0.4 Simple Digital Input If no event recording is used, the DI830 acts like a simple digital input device. 3BSE 020 924R4101 283 DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.23.0.5 Technical Data Table A-48 DI830 Digital Input Module Specifications DI830 Digital Input Module Feature Number of channels 16 (2 x 8), current sinking Rated voltage (Process power supply range) 24 V d.c. (18 to 30 V d.c.) Input voltage range, “1” 13 to 30 V Input voltage range, “0” -30 to +5 V Nominal input channel current 7.4 mA @ 24 V d.c. Input impedance 3.2 kΩ Maximum field cable length 600 m (656 yd.) Filter times (digital, selectable) 0 to 100 ms Shutter filter Shutter period Shutter trigger Recovery time 0... 255 s 0... 255 changes 0... 65535 s Event recording resolution 0.4 ms Event recording accuracy -0.3 ms to +0.7 ms Process voltage supervision 2 channels (1 per group) Current consumption +5 V 120 mA (max.) 100 mA (typ.) Power dissipation(1) 2.3 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) 284 Isolation Yes, opto Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830 or TU838 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Table A-48 DI830 Digital Input Module Specifications (Continued) DI830 Digital Input Module Feature MTU keying code AA Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.22 kg (0.48 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated at nominal voltage of 24 Volt. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 285 DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.23.0.6 Block Diagram DI830 MODULEBUS INTERFACE COMPUTER GROUP 1 X2 EMCBARRIER CH 1 FAULT WARNING CH 2 . . . RWM MBI-2 ASIC POWER-OK Modulebus Connector 0V RESET +5VI +5V DATA CH 8 ADDRESS CPU 68HC12 ERROR 1-8 DAT- RS-485 EEPROM CLK+ CLK- GROUP 2 RS-485 POS0-6 FPROM BLOCK 8 / CH 9-16 3 PROGR MODE X3 EMCBARRIER 8 / UP2 U9-16 I 9-16 24V SUPERVISION ZP2 / ERROR 9-16 286 ZP1 DAT+ Process Connector U2 I2 . . . U8 I8 24V SUPERVISION RUN X1 UP1 U1 I1 EM BDM 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking A.23.0.7 Process Connections Table A-49 DI830 Process Connections Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 Male Terminal Connector (1) TU838 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ (2) 0 V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- (2) Ch1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2 A1 (F1) Ch1 Input C1 3 C1 B1 Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2 B2 Ch1/Ch2, L1- A1 - A1, A2 A2 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4 A3 (F2) Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3 B3 Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4 B4 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4 A4 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6 A5 (F3) Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5 B5 Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6 B6 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6 A6 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8 A7 (F4) Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7 B7 Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8 B8 Ch 7/Ch8, L1- A4 - A7, A8 A8 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10 A9 (F5) Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9 B9 3BSE 020 924R4101 287 DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Table A-49 DI830 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 Male Terminal Connector (1) TU838 Terminal Ch 10 Input B5 20 C10 B10 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10 A10 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12 A11 (F6) Ch 11 Input C6 8 C11 B11 Ch 12 Input B6 21 C12 B12 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12 A12 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14 A13 (F7) Ch 13 Input C7 9 C13 B13 Ch 14 Input B7 22 C14 B14 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14 A14 Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16 A15 (F8) Ch 15 Input C8 10 C15 B15 Ch 16 Input B8 23 C16 B16 Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16 A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ (2) 0 V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 288 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Figure A-62 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI830 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. Process TU830/TU833 +24V + - + + - 6.3 A L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- L1+ L1+ L1L1B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 L1+ I3 I4 L1- L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- B5,B6 C5 C6 A5,A6 L1+ I5 I6 L1- L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2- L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 L2+ I11 I12 L2- L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,B16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2- +24V L2+ L2+ L2L2- 0V + DI830 0V Supervise Fuse L1+ I1 I2 L1- 6.3 A Supervise Fuse EM Figure A-62 DI830 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 289 DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Figure A-63 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI830 when installed on a TU838 Extended MTU. Process TU838 +24V 0V + + - + + - L1+ L1+ L1L1- L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- A1 B1 B2 A2 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- A3 B3 B4 A4 L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- A5 B5 B6 A6 L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- A7 B7 B8 A8 L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- A11 B11 B12 A12 L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- A13 B13 B14 A14 A15 B15 B16 A16 +24V 0V A9 B9 B10 A10 L2+ L2+ L2L2- DI830 Supervise F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 L1+ I1 I2 L1L1+ I3 I4 L1L1+ I5 I6 L1L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2L2+ I11 I12 L2L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2Supervise EM Figure A-63 DI830 with TU838 Extended MTU Process Connections 290 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Figure A-64 shows the process connections for the DI830 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Process TU810 (or TU814) +24V L1+ L1+ L1- 0V C1 B1 A1 L1+ I1 I2 L1- Ch3 Ch4 L1- C2 B2 A2 L1+ I3 I4 L1- Ch5 Ch6 L1- C3 B3 A3 L1+ I5 I6 L1- Ch7 Ch8 L1- C4 B4 A4 Ch9 Ch10 L2- C5 B5 A5 L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2- Ch11 Ch12 L2- C6 B6 A6 L2+ I11 I12 L2- Ch13 Ch14 L2- C7 B7 A7 Ch15 Ch16 L2- C8 B8 A8 + - + + - +24V 0V Supervise Ch1 Ch2 L1- + - DI830 L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2- L2+ L2+ L2- Supervise EM Figure A-64 DI830 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 291 DI830 Digital Input Module, 24 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Figure A-65 shows the process connections for the DI830 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. TU812 Process Connection 1 1 UP1 +24V 14 14 UP1 2 2 ZP1 15 15 ZP1 3 3 S1 Ch1 16 16 S2 Ch2 4 4 S3 Ch3 17 17 S4 Ch4 5 5 S5 Ch5 18 18 S6 Ch6 6 6 S7 Ch7 19 19 S8 Ch8 7 7 S9 Ch9 20 20 S10 Ch10 8 8 S11 Ch11 21 21 S12 Ch12 9 9 S13 Ch13 22 22 S14 Ch14 10 10 S15 Ch15 23 23 S16 Ch16 11 11 UP2 +24V 24 24 UP2 12 12 ZP2 0V 25 25 ZP2 13 13 EM DI830 Supervise 0V L1+ I1 I2 L1L1+ I3 I4 L1L1+ I5 I6 L1L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2L2+ I11 I12 L2L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2Supervise EM Figure A-65 DI830 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 292 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking A.24 DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking A.24.0.1 Features • 16 channels for 48 V d.c. inputs with current sinking F R • 2 isolated groups of 8 channels with voltage supervision W • Input status indicators 2 • Sequence of event (SOE) functionality 4 • Shutter filter • EMC protection 5 6 7 • DIN rail mounting. 1 3 8 9 10 11 A.24.0.2 Description 12 13 The DI831 is a 16 channel 48 V d.c. digital input module for the S800 I/O. The input voltage range is 36 to 60 V d.c. and the input current is 4 mA at 48 V d.c.). Each input channel consists of current limiting components, EMC protection components, input state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. 14 15 16 DI831 48V, SOE Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per channel (16) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in the Init state, Error state or Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid master frame to the module. The module cyclically performs self-diagnostics. Module diagnostics include: • Process power supply supervision (causes a module failure if detected) • Event queue full 3BSE 020 924R4101 293 DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking • Appendix A Specifications Time synchronization missing The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The input signals can be digitally filtered. The filter is selectable from 0 to 100 ms. This means that pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than specified will get through the filter. Five different types of MTUs can be used. The Extended MTU (for example TU830) enables three wire connection to the transducers without additional terminals. The Compact MTU (for example TU810 or TU 814) has terminals for process voltage supervision inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of process power supply to the transducers. The extended MTU, TU838, provide a fuse (3 A max.) per two channels for process power out. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. A.24.0.3 Event Recording The DI831 Input Module can be used for event recording (SOE), that is, changing signals at digital input channels can be announced together with a time stamp indicating when it occurred. Events are generated on both positive and negative going edges of the signals. The time stamp has a resolution of 0.4 millisecond, and is compensated for the filter time. The module has intermediate storage for 32 events. The SOE functionality can be switched on and off per channel. For all channels with enabled SOE capability, a shutter filter is implemented that prevents intermediate storage for events from overflow. The shutter filter is closed as soon as the number of events generated within the shutter period (0-255 seconds) exceeds the shutter trigger number (0-255 changes). The shutter filter remains closed as long as the recovery time (0-65535 seconds) has not expired. A.24.0.4 Simple Digital Input If no event recording is used, the DI831 acts like a simple digital input device. 294 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking A.24.0.5 Technical Data Table A-50 DI831 Digital Input Module Specifications DI831 Digital Input Module Feature Number of channels 16 (2 x 8), current sinking Rated voltage (Process power supply range) 48 V d.c. (36 to 60 V d.c). Input voltage range, “1” +30 to +60 V. Input voltage range, “0” -60 to +10 V Nominal input channel current 5 mA @ 48 V d.c. Input impedance 9.6 kΩ Maximum field cable length 600 meters, (656 yd.) Bounce filter times (digital, selectable) 0 to 100 ms Shutter filter Shutter period Shutter trigger Recovery time 0... 255 s 0... 255 changes 0... 65535 s Event recording resolution 0.4 ms Event recording accuracy -0.3 ms to +0.7 ms Process voltage supervision 2 channels (1 per group) Current consumption +5 V 120 mA (max.) 100 mA (typ.) Power dissipation (1) 3.2 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) Isolation Yes, opto Module termination units TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830 TU838 3BSE 020 924R4101 295 DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Table A-50 DI831 Digital Input Module Specifications (Continued) DI831 Digital Input Module Feature MTU keying code BD Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.22 kg (0.48 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated at nominal voltage of 48 Volt. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 296 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking A.24.0.6 Block Diagram DI831 MODULEBUS INTERFACE COMPUTER GROUP 1 X2 EMCBARRIER CH 1 FAULT WARNING CH 2 . . . RWM MBI-2 ASIC POWER-OK Modulebus Connector 0V RESET +5VI +5V DATA CH 8 ADDRESS CPU 68HC12 ERROR 1-8 ZP1 DAT+ DAT- RS-485 EEPROM CLK+ CLK- GROUP 2 RS-485 POS0-6 FPROM BLOCK 8 / CH 9-16 3BSE 020 924R4101 PROGR MODE X3 EMCBARRIER 8 / UP2 U9-16 I 9-16 24V SUPERVISION ZP2 / ERROR 9-16 3 Process Connector U2 I2 . . . U8 I8 24V SUPERVISION RUN X1 UP1 U1 I1 EM BDM 297 DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.24.0.7 Process Connections Table A-51 DI831 Process Connections Process Connection 298 TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 Male Terminal Connector (1) TU838 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ (2) 0 V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- (2) Ch1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2 A1 (F1) Ch1 Input C1 3 C1 B1 Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2 B2 Ch1/Ch2, L1- A1 - A1, A2 A2 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4 A3 (F2) Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3 B3 Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4 B4 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4 A4 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6 A5 (F3) Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5 B5 Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6 B6 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6 A6 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8 A7 (F4) Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7 B7 Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8 B8 Ch 7/Ch8, L1- A4 - A7, A8 A8 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10 A9 (F5) Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9 B9 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Table A-51 DI831 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 Male Terminal Connector (1) TU838 Terminal Ch 10 Input B5 20 C10 B10 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10 A10 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12 A11 (F6) Ch 11 Input C6 8 C11 B11 Ch 12 Input B6 21 C12 B12 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12 A12 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14 A13 (F7) Ch 13 Input C7 9 C13 B13 Ch 14 Input B7 22 C14 B14 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14 A14 Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16 A15 (F8) Ch 15 Input C8 10 C15 B15 Ch 16 Input B8 23 C16 B16 Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16 A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ (2) 0 V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 3BSE 020 924R4101 299 DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Figure A-66 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI831 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. Process TU830/TU833 +48V + - + + - 6.3 A L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- L1+ L1+ L1L1B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 L1+ I3 I4 L1- L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- B5,B6 C5 C6 A5,A6 L1+ I5 I6 L1- L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2- L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 L2+ I11 I12 L2- L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,B16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2- +48V L2+ L2+ L2L2- 0V + DI831 0V Supervise Fuse L1+ I1 I2 L1- 6.3 A Supervise Fuse EM Figure A-66 DI831 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 300 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Figure A-67 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI831 when installed on a TU838 Extended MTU. Process TU838 +48V 0V + + - + + - L1+ L1+ L1L1- L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- A1 B1 B2 A2 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- A3 B3 B4 A4 L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- A5 B5 B6 A6 L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- A7 B7 B8 A8 L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- A11 B11 B12 A12 L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- A13 B13 B14 A14 A15 B15 B16 A16 +48V 0V A9 B9 B10 A10 L2+ L2+ L2L2- DI831 Supervise F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 L1+ I1 I2 L1L1+ I3 I4 L1L1+ I5 I6 L1L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2L2+ I11 I12 L2L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2Supervise EM Figure A-67 DI831 with TU838 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 301 DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Figure A-68 shows the process connections for the DI831 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Process TU810 (or TU814) +48V L1+ L1+ L1- 0V C1 B1 A1 L1+ I1 I2 L1- Ch3 Ch4 L1- C2 B2 A2 L1+ I3 I4 L1- Ch5 Ch6 L1- C3 B3 A3 L1+ I5 I6 L1- Ch7 Ch8 L1- C4 B4 A4 Ch9 Ch10 L2- C5 B5 A5 L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2- Ch11 Ch12 L2- C6 B6 A6 L2+ I11 I12 L2- Ch13 Ch14 L2- C7 B7 A7 Ch15 Ch16 L2- C8 B8 A8 + - + + - +48V 0V Supervise Ch1 Ch2 L1- + - DI831 L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2- L2+ L2+ L2- Supervise EM Figure A-68 DI831 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 302 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI831 Digital Input Module, 48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Figure A-69 shows the process connections for the DI831 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. TU812 Process Connection 1 1 UP1 +24V 14 14 UP1 2 2 ZP1 15 15 ZP1 3 3 S1 Ch1 16 16 S2 Ch2 4 4 S3 Ch3 17 17 S4 Ch4 5 5 S5 Ch5 18 18 S6 Ch6 6 6 S7 Ch7 19 19 S8 Ch8 7 7 S9 Ch9 20 20 S10 Ch10 8 8 S11 Ch11 21 21 S12 Ch12 9 9 S13 Ch13 22 22 S14 Ch14 10 10 S15 Ch15 23 23 S16 Ch16 11 11 UP2 +24V 24 24 UP2 12 12 ZP2 0V 25 25 ZP2 13 13 EM DI831 Supervise 0V L1+ I1 I2 L1L1+ I3 I4 L1L1+ I5 I6 L1L1+ I7 I8 L1L2+ I9 I10 L2L2+ I11 I12 L2L2+ I13 I14 L2L2+ I15 I16 L2Supervise EM Figure A-69 DI831 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 303 DI840 Digital Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.25 DI840 Digital Input Module A.25.0.1 Features • 16 channels for 24 V d.c. inputs with current sinking • 1 group of 16 isolated from ground • Input status indicators • Advanced on-board diagnostics • EMC protection • Sequence of events • DIN rail mounting • Redundant or single applications • Transducer power distribution F R W A.25.0.2 Description The DI840 is a 16 channel 24 V d.c. digital input module for single or redundant applications. The input voltage range is 18 to 30 V d.c. and the input current is 7 mA at 24 V d.c. DI840 24V, SOE Each input channel consists of current limiting components, EMC protection components, input state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per channel (16) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in the Init state, Error state or Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The transducer power is supervised and current limited. One output per two input channels. 304 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI840 Digital Input Module The Sequence of Event function (SOE) can collect events with a resolution of 1 ms. The event queue can contain up to 257 events. The function include a Shutter filter for repressing unwanted events. The module cyclically performs self-diagnostics. Module diagnostics include: • Process power supply supervision and transducer over current supervision are reported as External Channel Error. Error detection time is < 500 ms. • The internal channel circuitries are tested with test patterns. Error from those tests will be reported as Internal Channel Error. The error detection time is < 100 ms. • Error in the common parts of the test functions is reported as Module Error. Error detection time is ca 12 ms. The SOE function can report the following status in the event message: Channel value, Queue full, Synchronization jitter, Uncertain time, Shutter filter active and Channel error. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The input signals can be digitally filtered. The filter is selectable from 0 to 127 ms. This means that pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than specified will get through the filter. Five different types of MTUs can be used for single applications. The Extended MTU (for example TU830) enables three wire connection to the transducers without additional terminals. The Compact MTU (for example TU810 or TU 814) has terminals for process voltage supervision inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of process power supply to the transducers. The extended MTU, TU838, provide a fuse (3 A max.) per two channels for process power out. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. For redundant applications there are two types of MTUs, TU842 for mounting on a horizontal DIN rail and TU843 for mounting on a vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 305 DI840 Digital Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.25.0.3 Technical Data Table A-52 DI840 Digital Input Module Specifications DI840 Digital Input Module Feature Number of channels 16, current sinking Rated voltage (Process power supply range) 24 V d.c. (19.2 to 30 V) Input voltage range, “1” 11 to 30 V Input voltage range, “0” -30 to +5 V Nominal input channel current 7 mA @ 24 V d.c. Input current, “1” > 3 mA Input current, “0” < 1.5 mA Input impedance 3.3 kΩ Maximum field cable length 600 m (656 yd.) Filter times (digital, selectable) 0 to 127 ms Shutter filter Shutter period Shutter trigger Recovery time 2... 170 s 4 changes 0... 682 s Event recording resolution 1 ms Event recording accuracy -0 ms / +1.3 ms Transducer power, I max per channel pair 40 mA Current consumption +5 V 100 mA Current consumption +24 V (external) 15 mA + transducer power Power dissipation 306 (1) 2.7 W 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI840 Digital Input Module Table A-52 DI840 Digital Input Module Specifications (Continued) DI840 Digital Input Module Feature Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) Isolation Yes, opto Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830, TU838, TU842 or TU843 MTU keying code CD Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.15 kg (0.33 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated at nominal voltage of 24 Volt. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 307 DI840 Digital Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.25.0.4 Block Diagram DI840 UP FAULT RUN WARNING EM ZP LED1 UP LED16 Current Limiter MBI FPGA U1 S1 CH1 U2 S2 CH2 UP Current Limiter U15 S15 CH15 U16 S16 308 CH16 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI840 Digital Input Module A.25.0.5 Process Connections Table A-53 DI840 Process Connections Process Connection TU812 TU810 (or TU814) D-Sub 25 Male Connector (1) Terminal TU830/ TU833 Terminal TU838 Terminal TU842 TU843 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ (2) L1+ 0 V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- (2) L1- Ch1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2 A1 (F1) B1, B2 Ch1 Input C1 3 C1 B1 C1 Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2 B2 C2 Ch1/Ch2, L1- A1 - A1, A2 A2 A1, A2 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4 A3 (F2) B3, B4 Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3 B3 C3 Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4 B4 C4 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4 A4 A3, A4 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6 A5 (F3) B5, B6 Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5 B5 C5 Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6 B6 C6 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6 A6 A5, A6 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8 A7 (F4) B7, B8 Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7 B7 C7 Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8 B8 C8 Ch 7/Ch8, L1- A4 - A7, A8 A8 A7, A8 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10 A9 (F5) B9, B10 Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9 B9 C9 3BSE 020 924R4101 309 DI840 Digital Input Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-53 DI840 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection TU812 TU810 (or TU814) D-Sub 25 Male Connector (1) Terminal TU830/ TU833 Terminal TU838 Terminal TU842 TU843 Terminal Ch 10 Input B5 20 C10 B10 C10 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10 A10 A9, A10 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12 A11 (F6) B11, B12 Ch 11 Input C6 8 C11 B11 C11 Ch 12 Input B6 21 C12 B12 C12 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12 A12 A11, A12 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14 A13 (F7) B13, B14 Ch 13 Input C7 9 C13 B13 C13 Ch 14 Input B7 22 C14 B14 C14 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14 A14 A13, A14 Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16 A15 (F8) B15, B16 Ch 15 Input C8 10 C15 B15 C15 Ch 16 Input B8 23 C16 B16 C16 Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16 A16 A15, A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ (2) L2+ 0 V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (2) L2- (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 310 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI840 Digital Input Module Figure A-70 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI840 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. Process TU830/TU833 +24V U1,U2 Ch1 Ch2 ZP L1+ L1+ L1L1B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 U1, U2 I1 I2 ZP U3,U4 Ch3 Ch4 ZP B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 U3, U4 I3 I4 ZP U5,U6 Ch5 Ch6 ZP B5,B6 C5 C6 A5,A6 U5, U6 I5 I6 ZP U7,U8 Ch7 Ch8 ZP U9,U10 Ch9 Ch10 ZP B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 U7, U8 I7 I8 ZP U11,U12 Ch11 Ch12 ZP B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 U11, U12 I11 I12 ZP U13,U14 Ch13 Ch14 ZP U15,U16 Ch15 Ch16 ZP B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,B16 C15 C16 A15,A16 U13, U14 I13 I14 ZP U15, U16 I15 I16 ZP +24V L2+ L2+ L2L2- 0V + + - + + - DI840 0V Supervise U9, U10 I9 I10 ZP EM Figure A-70 DI840 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 311 DI840 Digital Input Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-71 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI840 when installed on a TU838 Extended MTU. Process TU838 +24V 0V + + - + + - L1+ L1+ L1L1- L1+ Ch1 Ch2 ZP A1 B1 B2 A2 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 ZP A3 B3 B4 A4 L1+ Ch5 Ch6 ZP A5 B5 B6 A6 L1+ Ch7 Ch8 ZP L2+ Ch9 Ch10 ZP A7 B7 B8 A8 L2+ Ch11 Ch12 ZP A11 B11 B12 A12 L2+ Ch13 Ch14 ZP L2+ Ch15 Ch16 ZP A13 B13 B14 A14 A15 B15 B16 A16 +24V 0V A9 B9 B10 A10 L2+ L2+ L2L2- DI840 Supervise F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 U1, U2 I1 I2 ZP U3, U4 I3 I4 ZP U5, U6 I5 I6 ZP U7, U8 I7 I8 ZP U9, U10 I9 I10 ZP U11, U12 I11 I12 ZP U13, U14 I13 I14 ZP U15, U16 I15 I16 ZP EM Figure A-71 DI840 with TU838 Extended MTU Process Connections 312 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI840 Digital Input Module Figure A-72 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI840 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Process TU810 (or TU814) +24V L1+ L1+ L1- 0V C1 B1 A1 U1, U2 I1 I2 ZP Ch3 Ch4 ZP C2 B2 A2 U3, U4 I3 I4 ZP Ch5 Ch6 ZP C3 B3 A3 U5, U6 I5 I6 ZP Ch7 Ch8 ZP C4 B4 A4 Ch9 Ch10 ZP C5 B5 A5 U7, U8 I7 I8 ZP U9, U10 I9 I10 ZP Ch11 Ch12 ZP C6 B6 A6 U11, U12 I11 I12 ZP Ch13 Ch14 ZP C7 B7 A7 Ch15 Ch16 ZP C8 B8 A8 + - + + - +24V 0V Supervise Ch1 Ch2 ZP + - DI840 U13, U14 I13 I14 ZP U15, U16 I15 I16 ZP L2+ L2+ L2EM Figure A-72 DI840 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 313 DI840 Digital Input Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-73 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI840 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. TU812 Process Connection 1 1 UP1 +24V 14 14 UP1 2 2 ZP1 15 15 ZP1 3 3 S1 Ch1 16 16 S2 Ch2 4 4 S3 Ch3 17 17 S4 Ch4 5 5 S5 Ch5 18 18 S6 Ch6 6 6 S7 Ch7 19 19 S8 Ch8 7 7 S9 Ch9 20 20 S10 Ch10 8 8 S11 Ch11 21 21 S12 Ch12 9 9 S13 Ch13 22 22 S14 Ch14 10 10 S15 Ch15 23 23 S16 Ch16 11 11 UP2 +24V 24 24 UP2 12 12 ZP2 0V 25 25 ZP2 13 13 EM DI840 Supervise 0V U1, U2 I1 I2 ZP U3, U4 I3 I4 ZP U5, U6 I5 I6 ZP U7, U8 I7 I8 ZP U9, U10 I9 I10 ZP U11, U12 I11 I12 ZP U13, U14 I13 I14 ZP U15, U16 I15 I16 ZP EM Figure A-73 DI840 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 314 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI840 Digital Input Module Figure A-74 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI840 when installed on a TU842 or TU843 Redundant MTU. Process +24V 0V U2 Ch1 Ch2 ZP + + - U4 Ch3 Ch4 ZP U6 Ch5 Ch6 ZP U8 Ch7 Ch8 ZP U10 Ch9 Ch10 ZP + + - U12 Ch11 Ch12 ZP U14 Ch13 Ch14 ZP U16 Ch15 Ch16 ZP +24V 0V L1+ L1+ L1L1B1 B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 B3 B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 B5 B6 C5 C6 A5,A6 B7 B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9 B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 B11 B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 B13 B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15 B16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ L2+ L2L2- TU842/TU843 DI840 Supervise U1, U2 I1 I2 ZP U3, U4 I3 I4 ZP U5, U6 I5 I6 ZP U7, U8 I7 I8 ZP U9, U10 I9 I10 ZP U11, U12 I11 I12 ZP U13, U14 I13 I14 ZP U15, U16 I15 I16 ZP EM DI840 Supervise --- U1 U2 I1 I2 ZP U15 U16 I15 I16 ZP EM Figure A-74 DI840 with TU842 or TU843 Redundant MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 315 DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.26 DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module A.26.0.1 Features • 16 channels for 24 V d.c. inputs with current sinking. • 1 group of 16 isolated from ground. • Input status indicators. • Advanced on-board diagnostics. • EMC protection. • Sequence of events. • DIN rail mounting. • Redundant or single configuration. • Transducer power distribution. • Certified for SIL3 according to EN 61508. • Certified for AK6 according to DIN V 19250 / DIN V VDE 0801-AK6. • Certified for Category 4 according to EN 954-1. A.26.0.2 Description The DI880 is a 16 channel 24 V d.c. digital input module for single or redundant configuration. The input voltage range is 18 to 30 V d.c. and the input current is 7 mA at 24 V d.c. Each input channel consists of current limiting components, EMC protection components, input state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. There is one current limited transducer power output per input. The Sequence of Event function (SOE) can collect events with a resolution of 1 ms. The event queue can contain up to 32 x 16 events. The function include a Shutter filter for suppression of unwanted events. 316 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module The SOE function can report the following status in the event message: Channel value, Queue full, Synchronization jitter, Uncertain time, Shutter filter active and Channel error. The input signals can be digitally filtered. The filter is selectable from 0 to 127 ms. This means that pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than specified will get through the filter. Five different types of MTUs can be used for single applications. The Extended MTU (for example TU830) enables three wire connection to the transducers without additional terminals. The Compact MTU (for example TU810 or TU 814) has terminals for process voltage supervision inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of process power supply to the transducers. The extended MTU, TU838, provide a fuse (3 A max.) per two channels for process power out. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. For redundant applications there are two types of MTUs, TU842 for mounting on a horizontal DIN rail and TU843 for mounting on a vertical DIN rail. Self-diagnostic Functions The module cyclically performs comprehensive self-diagnostic. Detected failures are grouped and reported as described below: • Errors in External power supply will be reported as External error. • Errors in circuits only affecting specific channels on the module (short circuits, open circuits, stuck-at faults) will be reported as Internal channel error. • Errors in internal power supplies, Errors in micro controller, FPGA and Memory will be reported as Module Error. 3BSE 020 924R4101 317 DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module Appendix A Specifications Four LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green), Warning (Yellow) and Primary (Yellow): 318 • The RUN LED starts flashing when the module is ready to be configured and is steady lit when the module has reached operational state. • The WARNING LED indicates external errors or internal channel errors. • The FAULT LED indicates that there is Module errors present or that the module is in Init state. • The PRIMARY LED indicates that the module is primary (in a redundant pair). 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module A.26.0.3 Technical Data Table A-54 DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module Specifications DI880 Digital Input Module Feature Number of channels 16, current sinking Rated voltage (Process power supply range) 24 V d.c. (19.2 to 30 V) Input voltage range, “1” 11 to 30 V Input voltage range, “0” -30 to +5 V Nominal input channel current 7 mA @ 24 V d.c. Input current, “1” > 3 mA Input current, “0” < 1.5 mA Input impedance 3.1 kΩ Maximum field cable length 600 m (656 yd.) Filter times (digital, selectable) 0 to 127 ms Shutter filter: Shutter period Shutter trigger Recovery time 1 - 255 s (default 0, means deactivated filter) 1...255 changes (default 4) 0 - 65535 s (default 0, means deactivated filter) Event recording resolution 1 ms Transducer power (per input) 30 mA (max) Current consumption +5 V 125 mA (max) Current consumption +24 V (field supply) 15 mA + transducer power Power dissipation 2.4 W 3BSE 020 924R4101 319 DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-54 DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module Specifications (Continued) DI880 Digital Input Module Feature Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F) 320 Isolation Yes, opto Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830, TU838, TU842, TU843 MTU keying code FF Event recording accuracy -0 ms / +1.3 ms Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.15 kg (0.33 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module A.26.0.4 Block Diagram DI880 F R W P ZP 1 UP FPGA Module Bus EM UP 16 CH1 Current Limiter CH2 U1 S1 UP U2 S2 Current Limiter MCU UP Current Limiter U15 S15 CH15 U16 S16 3BSE 020 924R4101 Current Limiter CH16 Module Bus UP 321 DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module Appendix A Specifications A.26.0.5 Process Connections Table A-55 DI880 Process Connections Process Connection 322 TU812 TU810 (or TU814) D-Sub 25 Male Connector (1) Terminal TU830/ TU833 Terminal TU838 Terminal TU842 TU843 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ (2) L1+ 0 V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- (2) L1- Ch1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2 A1 (F1) B1, B2 Ch1 Input C1 3 C1 B1 C1 Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2 B2 C2 Ch1/Ch2, L1- A1 - A1, A2 A2 A1, A2 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4 A3 (F2) B3, B4 Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3 B3 C3 Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4 B4 C4 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4 A4 A3, A4 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6 A5 (F3) B5, B6 Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5 B5 C5 Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6 B6 C6 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6 A6 A5, A6 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8 A7 (F4) B7, B8 Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7 B7 C7 Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8 B8 C8 Ch 7/Ch8, L1- A4 - A7, A8 A8 A7, A8 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10 A9 (F5) B9, B10 Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9 B9 C9 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module Table A-55 DI880 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection TU812 TU810 (or TU814) D-Sub 25 Male Connector (1) Terminal TU830/ TU833 Terminal TU838 Terminal TU842 TU843 Terminal Ch 10 Input B5 20 C10 B10 C10 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10 A10 A9, A10 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12 A11 (F6) B11, B12 Ch 11 Input C6 8 C11 B11 C11 Ch 12 Input B6 21 C12 B12 C12 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12 A12 A11, A12 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14 A13 (F7) B13, B14 Ch 13 Input C7 9 C13 B13 C13 Ch 14 Input B7 22 C14 B14 C14 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14 A14 A13, A14 Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16 A15 (F8) B15, B16 Ch 15 Input C8 10 C15 B15 C15 Ch 16 Input B8 23 C16 B16 C16 Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16 A16 A15, A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ (2) L2+ 0 V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (2) L2- (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 3BSE 020 924R4101 323 DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-75 shows the process connections for the High Integrity Digital Input Module DI880 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. Process TU830/TU833 +24V L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- L1+ L1+ L1L1B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 U1, U2 I1 I2 ZP L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 U3, U4 I3 I4 ZP L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- B5,A6 C5 C6 A5,A6 U5, U6 I5 I6 ZP L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 U7, U8 I7 I8 ZP L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 U11, U12 I11 I12 ZP L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,A16 C15 C16 A15,A16 U13, U14 I13 I14 ZP U15, U16 I15 I16 ZP +24V L2+ L2+ L2L2- 0V + + - + + - DI880 0V Supervise U9, U10 I9 I10 ZP EM Figure A-75 DI880 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 324 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module Figure A-76 shows the process connections for the High Integrity Digital Input Module DI880 when installed on a TU838 Extended MTU. Process TU838 +24V 0V + + - + + - L1+ L1+ L1L1- L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- A1 B1 B2 A2 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- A3 B3 B4 A4 L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- A5 B5 B6 A6 L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- A7 B7 B8 A8 L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- A11 B11 B12 A12 L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- A13 B13 B14 A14 A15 B15 B16 A16 +24V 0V A9 B9 B10 A10 L2+ L2+ L2L2- DI880 Supervise F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 U1, U2 I1 I2 ZP U3, U4 I3 I4 ZP U5, U6 I5 I6 ZP U7, U8 I7 I8 ZP U9, U10 I9 I10 ZP U11, U12 I11 I12 ZP U13, U14 I13 I14 ZP U15, U16 I15 I16 ZP EM Figure A-76 DI880 with TU838 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 325 DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-77 shows the process connections for the High Integrity Digital Input Module DI880 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Process TU810 (or TU814) +24V L1+ L1+ L1- 0V C1 B1 A1 U1, U2 I1 I2 ZP Ch3 Ch4 L1- C2 B2 A2 U3, U4 I3 I4 ZP Ch5 Ch6 L1- C3 B3 A3 U5, U6 I5 I6 ZP Ch7 Ch8 L1- C4 B4 A4 Ch9 Ch10 L2- C5 B5 A5 U7, U8 I7 I8 ZP U9, U10 I9 I10 ZP Ch11 Ch12 L2- C6 B6 A6 U11, U12 I11 I12 ZP Ch13 Ch14 L2- C7 B7 A7 Ch15 Ch16 L2- C8 B8 A8 + - + + - +24V 0V Supervise Ch1 Ch2 L1- + - DI880 U13, U14 I13 I14 ZP U15, U16 I15 I16 ZP L2+ L2+ L2EM Figure A-77 DI880 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 326 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module Figure A-78 shows the process connections for the High Integrity Digital Input Module DI880 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. TU812 Process Connection 1 1 UP1 +24V 14 14 UP1 2 2 ZP1 15 15 ZP1 3 3 S1 Ch1 16 16 S2 Ch2 4 4 S3 Ch3 17 17 S4 Ch4 5 5 S5 Ch5 18 18 S6 Ch6 6 6 S7 Ch7 19 19 S8 Ch8 7 7 S9 Ch9 20 20 S10 Ch10 8 8 S11 Ch11 21 21 S12 Ch12 9 9 S13 Ch13 22 22 S14 Ch14 10 10 S15 Ch15 23 23 S16 Ch16 11 11 UP2 +24V 24 24 UP2 12 12 ZP2 0V 25 25 ZP2 13 13 EM DI880 Supervise 0V U1, U2 I1 I2 ZP U3, U4 I3 I4 ZP U5, U6 I5 I6 ZP U7, U8 I7 I8 ZP U9, U10 I9 I10 ZP U11, U12 I11 I12 ZP U13, U14 I13 I14 ZP U15, U16 I15 I16 ZP EM Figure A-78 DI880 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 327 DI880 High Integrity Digital Input Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-79 shows the process connections for the High Integrity Digital Input Module DI880 when installed on a TU842 or TU843 Redundant MTU. Process +24V 0V L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- + + - L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- + + - L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2+24V 0V L1+ L1+ L1L1B1 B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 B3 B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 B5 B6 C5 C6 A5,A6 B7 B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9 B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 B11 B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 B13 B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15 B16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ L2+ L2L2- TU842/TU843 DI880 Supervise U1, U2 I1 I2 ZP U3, U4 I3 I4 ZP U5, U6 I5 I6 ZP U7, U8 I7 I8 ZP U9, U10 I9 I10 ZP U11, U12 I11 I12 ZP U13, U14 I13 I14 ZP U15, U16 I15 I16 ZP EM DI880 Supervise --- U1 U2 I1 I2 ZP U15 U16 I15 I16 ZP EM Figure A-79 DI880 with TU842 or TU843 Redundant MTU Process Connections 328 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V /48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking A.27 DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V /48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking A.27.0.1 Features • 8 channels for 24/48 V d.c. inputs with current sinking • Input status indicators • Sequence of event (SOE) functionality • External 24 or 48 V d.c. sensor power supply • Internal 48 V d.c. sensor power supply • Short circuit protection to ground and 48 Volt • Channel supervision • Sensor power supply supervision • Shutter filter • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. F R W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A.27.0.2 Description 8 DI885 24V/48V The DI885 is a 8 channel 24/48 V digital input module for the S800 I/O. This module has 8 digital inputs. The input voltage range is 11.8 - 60 V d.c. and the input current is 1.6 mA at 24 V d.c., (3.2 mA at 48 V d.c.). Every input channel consists of current limiting components, EMC protection components, input state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per channel (8) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in the Init state, Error state or Not Configured state. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. 3BSE 020 924R4101 329 DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V /48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications The sensor power supply supervision gives an error signal if the voltage disappears, and the Warning LED turns on. The error signal can be read via the Modulebus. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The input signals of the input module DI885 can be filtered to suppress any electrical interference or contact bounce.The filter is selectable from 0 to 255 ms. This means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than specified will get through the filter. Four different types of MTUs can be used. TheTU830 Extended MTU and the TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for process voltage inputs and three terminals per channel. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. A.27.0.3 Event Recording The DI885 Input Module can be used for event recording (SOE), that is, changing signals at digital input channels can be announced together with a time stamp indicating when it occurred. The time stamp has a resolution of 1 millisecond, and is compensated for the filter time. The module has intermediate storage for 32 events. The SOE functionality can be switched on and off per channel. For all channels with enabled SOE capability, a shutter filter is implemented that prevents intermediate storage for events from overflow. The shutter filter is closed as soon as the number of events generated within the shutter period (0-255 seconds) exceeds the shutter trigger number (0-255 changes). The shutter filter remains closed as long as the recovery time (0-65535 seconds) has not expired. A.27.0.4 Simple Digital Input If no event recording is used, the DI885 acts like a simple digital input device. 330 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V /48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking A.27.0.5 Channel Supervision The DI885 is able to supervise the process channel regarding wire break of sensor cable, missing sensor and short circuit of sensor voltage to module ground. The supervision can be switched on and off per device. The channel supervision is only possible when the contact is equipped with a parallel resistor of 47 kΩ ±20%, and 48 V sensor power. A.27.0.6 Sensor Power Supply and Supervision The DI885 provides a 48 V d.c. sensor power supply per device. The DC/DC - converter for 48 V d.c. supply can be powered from the internal 24 V d.c. provided by the ModuleBus or from an external source. The power supply is short-circuit proof and galvanically insulated. It is also possible to supply the sensors with an external 48 V d.c. power supply. In this case the internal voltage path is switched off. A.27.0.7 Supported Sensor Types The following sensor types are supported by the DI885. Dry Contacts supervised: 48 V d.c./ 3,2 mA The supervision is only possible for contacts with resistor connected in parallel. Supervision is always available within internal sensor power supply. Supervision in connection with external sensor power supply requires the same strict limits in the tolerances of the external supply voltage as for internal supply voltage (48 V d.c. ±10%) Dry Contacts not supervised with external Power Supply: >= 60 V d.c./ max. 4 mA The maximum input voltage of 60 V DC must be kept strictly. 3BSE 020 924R4101 331 DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V /48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Electronic Inputs not supervised: 24 V d.c./ 1.6 mA Only in combination with external power supply. Open Collector Drivers (Current sourcing) not supervised: 24 V DC / 1.6 mA Only in combination with external power supply. 332 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V /48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking A.27.0.8 Technical Data Table A-56 DI885 Digital Input Module Specifications DI885 Digital Input Module Feature Number of channels 8, current sinking Power supply: Nominal voltage Operating voltage range 24 V d.c. 19.2 to 30 V d.c. Process Power supply: (UP) Nominal voltage with internal supply Voltage range with external supply 48 V d.c.+/- 10% 18 V d.c. - 60 V d.c. Input voltage range, “1” >+ 11.2 V d.c.... <+ 60 V d.c. Input voltage range, “0” -30 V d.c. ... <+5 V d.c. Nominal input channel current, “1” 0.8 mA... <4 mA Nominal input channel current, “0” <0.3 mA Input impedance 15 kOhm Maximum field cable length 600 meters, (656 yd.) Bounce filter times (digital, selectable) 0 to 255 ms Event recording resolution 1 ms Event recording accuracy -0.5 ms to +1.3 ms Shutter filter Shutter period Shutter trigger Recovery time 0... 255 s 0.. 255 changes 0... 65535 s Process voltage supervision per device 3BSE 020 924R4101 333 DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V /48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Table A-56 DI885 Digital Input Module Specifications (Continued) DI885 Digital Input Module Feature Current consumption 5V 24 V internal 24 V external 48 V external 160 mA 91 mA 91 mA 22 mA Power dissipation (1) 3W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) Isolation Yes, opto Module termination units TU810, TU812, TU814 or TU830 MTU keying code BF Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.22 kg (0.48 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated at nominal voltage of 24/48 Volts. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 334 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V /48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking A.27.0.9 Block Diagram DI885 X2 L1+ L1- EMCBARRIER CH 1 FAULT I1 L1+ I2 L1. 1 RUN WARNING MBI-2 ASIC (CPU) X1 CH 2 . . . RESET L1+ . . . DAT DAT-N RS-485 . CH 8 POS0-9 . L1+ I8 8 BLOCK 24V ERROR 1-8 EEPROM Process Connector Modulebus Connector +5VI +5V POWER-OK 0V 24V SUPERVISION L1- RAM EM 24V 48V Power Switch 3BSE 020 924R4101 48V d.c. 24V d.c. 335 DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V /48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.27.0.10 Process Connections Table A-57 DI885 Process Connections Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 male Connector (1) TU830/TU833 Terminal +24 V d.c. ext. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) 0 V d.c. L1-, L2- 2, 15 L1- (2), L2- (2) Ch1 +48 V B1 16 C2 Ch1 Input C1 3 C1 Ch 2 +48 V B2 17 C4 Ch 2 Input C2 4 C3 Ch 3 +48 V B3 18 C6 Ch 3 Input C3 5 C5 Ch 4 +48 V B4 19 C8 Ch 4 Input C4 6 C7 Ch 5 +48 V B5 20 C10 Ch 5 Input C5 7 C9 Ch 6 +48 V B6 21 C12 Ch 6 Input C6 8 C11 Ch 7 +48 V B7 22 C14 Ch 7 Input C7 9 C13 Ch 8 +48 V B8 23 C16 Ch8 Input C8 10 C15 +48 V ext. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 336 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V /48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Figure A-80 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI885 when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU. Process TU830/TU833 24V+ Pwr. Sup. 47K 47K Pwr. Sup. 0V L1+ L1+ L1L1- DI885 + 24V + _ 48V _ 6.3 A Fuse Ch1 48V L1- C1 C2 A1,A2 I1 L+ L- Ch2 48V L1- C3 C4 A3,A4 I2 L+ L- Ch3 48V L1- C5 C6 A5,A6 I3 L+ L- Ch4 48V L1- C7 C8 A7,A8 I4 L+ L- Ch5 48V C9 C10 A9,A10 I5 L+ Ch6 48V C11 C12 A11,A12 I6 L+ Ch7 48V C13 C14 A13,A14 I7 L+ Ch8 48V C15 C16 A15,A16 I8 L+ 48V+ L2+ L2+ L2L2- 0V 6.3 A Fuse EM Figure A-80 DI885 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 337 DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V /48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Figure A-81 shows the process connections for the DI885 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. Process TU810 (or TU814) 24V+ Pwr. Sup. 47K 47K + 24V + _ 48V _ L1+ L1+ L1- 0V Ch1 48V L1- C1 B1 A1 I1 L+ L- Ch2 48V L1- C2 B2 A2 I2 L+ L- Ch3 48V L1- C3 B3 A3 I3 L+ L- Ch4 48V L1- C4 B4 A4 I4 L+ L- Ch5 48V C5 B5 A5 I5 L+ Ch6 48V C6 B6 A6 I6 L+ Ch7 48V C7 B7 A7 I7 L+ Ch8 48V C8 B8 A8 I8 L+ 48V+ Pwr. Sup. DI885 0V L2+ L2+ L2EM Figure A-81 DI885 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 338 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DI885 Digital Input Module, 24 V /48 V d.c. with SOE, Current Sinking Figure A-82 shows the connections for the DI885 when installed on a TU812. TU812 Process Connection 1 1 UP1 14 14 UP1 2 2 ZP1 15 15 ZP1 DI885 + 24V + _ 48V _ +24V 0V Ch1 I 3 3 S1 16 16 S2 Ch1 4 4 S3 Ch2 I 17 17 S4 Ch2 5 5 S5 Ch3 I 18 18 S6 Ch3 6 6 S7 Ch4 I 19 19 S8 Ch4 7 7 S9 Ch5 I 20 20 S10 Ch5 8 8 S11 Ch6 I 21 21 S12 Ch6 9 9 S13 Ch7 I 22 22 S14 Ch7 10 10 S15 Ch8 I 23 23 S16 Ch8 11 11 UP2 +48 V 24 24 UP2 12 12 ZP2 25 25 ZP2 13 13 EM EM I1 L+ LI2 L+ LI3 L+ LI4 L+ LI5 L+ I6 L+ I7 L+ I8 L+ 0V EM Figure A-82 DI885 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 339 DO801 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications A.28 DO801 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sourcing • 16 channels for 24 V d.c. current sourcing outputs • 1isolated groups of 16 channels S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 • Output status indicators • OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon communication error STATUS A.28.0.1 Features • Short-circuit protection to ground and 30 V • Over-voltage and overtemperature protection • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting • Process and power connection via detachable connectors DO801 24V 0.5A L+ L- 24V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 A.28.0.2 Description The DO801 is a 16 channel 24 V digital output module for the S800 I/O. The output voltage range is 10 to 30 volt and the maximum continuous output current is 0.5 A. The outputs are protected against short circuits, over voltage and over temperature. The outputs are in one isolated group. Each output channel consists of a short circuit and over temperature protected high side driver, EMC protection components, inductive load suppression, output state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. 340 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO801 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sourcing One STATUS LED indicate module status green/red. One LED (Yellow) per channel (16) indicate output state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The Status LED green indicates normal operation. The STATUS LED red indicates that the module is in Init state or Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the STATUS LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog timer is retriggered every time the correct module address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent. The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values are written. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the POWOK signal is active. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The outputs are current limited and protected against over temperature. If the outputs are overloaded the output current will be limited. This means that the power dissipation in the output stage will increase and the output will shutdown if the temperature in the output stage increases above 150 °C (302 °F). The output will switch on again automatically as the component temperature has decreased to about 140 °C (284 °F). If any output is shutdown due to overload the indication LED on that channel is not switched off. The output status of that channel can not be read from the module. 3BSE 020 924R4101 341 DO801 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications A.28.0.3 Technical Data Table A-58 DO801 Digital Output Module Specifications DO801 Digital Output Module Feature Number of channels 16 (1 x 16) Type of output Transistor current source, current limited Voltage range 12 - 32 V d.c. Load current, maximum 0.5 A Short circuit current, maximum 2.4 A Leakage current, maximum <10 µa Signal delay <0.2 ms Output impedance <0.4 ohm Maximum Field Cable Length 600 meters (656 yd.) Current consumption +5 V 80 mA Power dissipation (1) 2.1 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) 342 Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256, 512, 1024 ms Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO801 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sourcing Table A-58 DO801 Digital Output Module Specifications (Continued) Feature Acceptable wire sizes DO801 Digital Output Module Solid: 0.05-2.5mm2, 30-12 AWG Stranded: 0.05-1.5mm2, 30-12 AWG Recommended torque: 0.8 Nm Stripping length: 6-7.5 mm, 0.24-0.30 in Width 86.1 mm (3.4”) Depth 58.5 mm (2.3”) Height 110 mm (4.33”) Weight 0.24 kg (0.53 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 343 DO801 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications A.28.0.4 Block Diagram DO801 Output drivers STATUS +5V O1 CH2 . . . O2 . CH15 O9 CH16 O16 POWER-OK 0V DAT DAT-N POS0-9 Process Connector MBI CH1 BLOCK L- 344 Power connector L+ 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO801 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sourcing A.28.0.5 Process Connections Table A-59 DO801 Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 Process Connection Process Terminal Ch 1 Output 1 Ch 2 Output 2 Ch 3 Output 3 Ch 4 Output 4 Ch 5 Output 5 Ch 6 Output 6 Ch 7 Output 7 Ch 8 Output 8 Ch 9 Output 9 Ch 10 Output 10 Ch 11 Output 11 Ch 12 Output 12 Ch 13 Output 13 Ch 14 Output 14 Ch 15 Output 15 Ch 16 Output 16 345 DO801 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications Figure A-83 shows the process connections for the DO801. DO801 Process 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 L+ +24V L- 0V EM Figure A-83 DO801 Process Connections 346 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO802 Digital Output Module, 24-250 V, Relay Normally Open A.29 DO802 Digital Output Module, 24-250 V, Relay Normally Open A.29.0.1 Features 8 channels for 110 V d.c./250 V a.c. relay Normally Open (NO) outputs • 8 isolated channels • Output status indicators • OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting • Process connection via detachable connectors S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 STATUS • DO802 Relay 24-250V A.29.0.2 Description The DO802 is an 8 channel 110 V d.c./250 V a.c. relay (NO) output module for the S800 I/O. The maximum voltage range is 250 volt and the maximum continuous output current is 2 A. All outputs are individually isolated. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B Each output channel consists of optical isolation barrier, output state indication LED, relay driver, relay and EMC protection components. One STATUS LED indicate module status green/red. One LED (Yellow) per channel (8) indicate output state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The Status LED green 3BSE 020 924R4101 347 DO802 Digital Output Module, 24-250 V, Relay Normally Open Appendix A Specifications indicates normal operation. The STATUS LED red indicates that the module is in Init state or Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the STATUS LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The relay supply voltage supervision, derived from the 24 V distributed on the ModuleBus, gives a channel signal error and a module warning signal if the voltage disappears. The error signal and warning signal can be read via the ModuleBus. This supervision can be enabled/disabled with a parameter. The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received. The watchdog timer which is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog timer is re-triggered every time the correct node address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent. The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values are written. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the POWOK signal is active. 348 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO802 Digital Output Module, 24-250 V, Relay Normally Open A.29.0.3 Technical Data Table A-60 DO802 Digital Output Module Specifications DO802 Digital Output Module Feature Number of channels 8 Type of output Relay (NO) Voltage range 24 - 110 V d.c./250 V a.c. Load current, maximum 2A Load current, minimum 5 mA Max break power a.c. 500 VA d.c. 60W Maximum field cable length (d.c., a.c.) 600 meters (656 yd.) Pick-up time, maximum 10 ms Release time, maximum 6 ms Number of operations per hour, maximum 1000 Number of operations per lifetime: Mechanical >20 x 106 Electrical at 30 V d.c. / 250 V a.c. >0,16 x 106 (2 A resistive) Current consumption +5 V 70 mA Current consumption +24 V 80 mA Power dissipation (1) 2.2 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256, 512, 1024 ms Power supervision 24/12 V Relay power converter monitor 3BSE 020 924R4101 349 DO802 Digital Output Module, 24-250 V, Relay Normally Open Appendix A Specifications Table A-60 DO802 Digital Output Module Specifications (Continued) DO802 Digital Output Module Feature Isolation Individually isolated from ground (RIV=250 V) Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 250 V Dielectric test voltage 2000 V a.c. Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.05-2.5mm2, 30-12 AWG Stranded: 0.05-1.5mm2, 30-12 AWG Recommended torque: 0.8 Nm Stripping length: 6-7.5 mm, 0.24-0.30 in Width 86.1 mm (3.4”) Depth 58.5 mm (2.3”) Height 110 mm (4.33”) Weight 0.24 kg (0.53 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 350 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO802 Digital Output Module, 24-250 V, Relay Normally Open A.29.0.4 Block Diagram DO802 X1 OUTPUT CHANNELS BIC +24V 12V 0V-24V 24V X2 STATUS POWER-OK 0V DAT DAT-N MBI-1 ASIC 1A 1B CH 1 2A 2B CH 2 RS-485 POS0-9 . . . Process Connector +5VI +5V RESET ModuleBus Connector 12V SUPERVISION ERROR 1-8 . . . 8A EEPROM 3BSE 020 924R4101 CH 8 8B 351 DO802 Digital Output Module, 24-250 V, Relay Normally Open Appendix A Specifications A.29.0.5 Process Connections Table A-61 DO802 Process Connections Process Connection Ch1 Input Process Terminal 1A 1B Ch 2 Input 2A 2B Ch 3 Input 3A 3B Ch 4 Input 4A 4B Ch 5 Input 5A 5B Ch 6 Input 6A 6B Ch 7 Input 7A 7B Ch 8 Input 8A 8B 352 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO802 Digital Output Module, 24-250 V, Relay Normally Open Figure A-84 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO802. DO802 Process 110V d.c./250V a.c. a.c/d.c. 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B 110V d.c./250V a.c. a.c/d.c. 6A 6B 7A 7B 8A 8B EM Figure A-84 DO802 Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 353 DO810 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications A.30 DO810 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A Current Sourcing A.30.0.1 Features • 16 channels for 24 V d.c. current sourcing outputs • 2 isolated groups of 8 channels with process voltage supervision F R W O • Output status indicators • OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection 2 3 4 • Short-circuit protection to ground and 30 V • Over-voltage and over-temperature protection 5 6 7 • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. • Also in a G3 compliant version. 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A.30.0.2 Description 15 16 The DO810 is a 16 channel 24 V digital output module for the S800 I/O. This module has 16 digital outputs. DO810 24V 0.5A The output voltage range is 10 to 30 volt and the maximum continuous output current is 0.5 A. The outputs are protected against short circuits, over voltage and over temperature. The outputs are divided into two individually isolated groups with eight output channels and one voltage supervision input in each group. Each output channel consists of a short circuit and over temperature protected high side driver, EMC protection components, inductive load suppression, output state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. Four LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green), Warning (Yellow) and OSP (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per channel (16) indicate output state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED 354 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO810 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A Current Sourcing indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The OSP LED indicates that the module is in the OSP state and that the outputs are set to their OSP values. The process voltage supervision input give channel error signals if the voltage disappears.The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog timer is retriggered every time the correct module address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent. The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values are written. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The outputs are current limited and protected against over temperature. If the outputs are overloaded the output current will be limited. This means that the power dissipation in the output stage will increase and the output will shutdown if the temperature in the output stage increases above 150 °C (302 °F). The output will switch on again automatically as the component temperature has decreased to about 140 °C (284 °F). If any output is shutdown due to overload the indication LED on that channel is also switched off. The output status of that channel can not be read from the module. Four different types of MTUs can be used. TU830 Extended MTU and TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU have terminals for 24 V output power connections and two terminals per channels. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. 3BSE 020 924R4101 355 DO810 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications A.30.0.3 Technical Data Table A-62 DO810 Digital Output Module Specifications DO810 Digital Output Module Feature Number of channels 16 (2 x 8) Type of output Transistor current sourcing, current limited Voltage range 12 - 32 V d.c. Load current, maximum 0.5 A Short circuit current, maximum 2.4 A Leakage current, maximum <10 µa Output impedance <0.4 ohm Maximum Field Cable Length 600 meters (656 yd.) Current consumption +5 V 80 mA Power dissipation (1) 2.1 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) 356 Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256, 512, 1024 ms Process voltage supervision 2 channels (1 per group) Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814 or TU830 MTU keying code AA Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO810 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A Current Sourcing Table A-62 DO810 Digital Output Module Specifications (Continued) DO810 Digital Output Module Feature G3 compliant version According to ISA-S71.04. Marked with “Z” in the type designation. Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.18 kg (0.4 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 357 DO810 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications A.30.0.4 Block Diagram DO810 BIC X2 GROUP 1 24V SUPERVISION ERROR 1-8 FAULT OUTPUTDRIVERS L1+ L1+ RUN WARNING O1 CH 2 . . . CH 8 L1+ O2 . . . L1+ O8 OSP MBI-1 ASIC X1 ModuleBus Connector POWER-OK 0V RESET +5VI +5V L1DAT DAT-N RS-485 POS0-9 BLOCK EEPROM Process Connector CH 1 GROUP 2 24V SUPERVISION ERROR 9-16 8 / CH 9-16 OUTPUTDRIVERS L2+ L2+ 8 / O 9-16 L2- 358 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO810 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A Current Sourcing A.30.0.5 Process Connections Table A-63 DO810 Process Connections Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 male Connector (1) TU830/TU833 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) 0 V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) Ch 1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2 Ch 1 Output C1 3 C1 Ch 2 Output B1 16 C2 Ch 1/Ch 2, L1- A1 - A1, A2 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4 Ch 3 Output C2 4 C3 Ch 4 Output B2 17 C4 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6 Ch 5 Output C3 5 C5 Ch 6 Output B3 18 C6 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8 Ch 7 Output C4 6 C7 Ch 8 Output B4 19 C8 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1- A4 - A7, A8 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10 Ch 9 Output C5 7 C9 3BSE 020 924R4101 359 DO810 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications Table A-63 DO810 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 male Connector (1) TU830/TU833 Terminal Ch 10 Output B5 20 C10 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12 Ch 11 Output C6 8 C11 Ch 12 Output B6 21 C12 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14 Ch 13 Output C7 9 C13 Ch 14 Output B7 22 C14 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14 Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16 Ch 15 Output C8 10 C15 Ch 16 Output B8 23 C16 Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) 0 V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 360 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO810 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A Current Sourcing Figure A-85 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO810 when installed on a TU830/TU833 Extended MTU. DO810 TU830/TU833 6.3 A Supervise Fuse 0V B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- L1+ O3 O4 L1- B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- L1+ O5 O6 L1- B5,A6 C5 C6 A5,A6 L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- L1+ O7 O8 L1L2+ O9 O 10 L2- B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- L2+ O 11 O 12 L2- B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- L2+ O 13 O 14 L2L2+ O 15 O 16 L2- B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,A16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- L2+ L2+ L2L2- +24V Fuse EM +24V L1+ O1 O2 L1- 6.3 A Supervise L1+ L1+ L1L1- Process 0V Figure A-85 DO810 with TU830/TU833 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 361 DO810 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications Figure A-86 shows the process connections for the DO810 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. DO810 TU810 (or TU814) L1+ L1+ L1- Supervise 0V C1 Ch1 B1 Ch2 A1 L1- L1+ O3 O4 L1- Ch3 C2 Ch4 B2 A2 L1- L1+ O5 O6 L1- Ch5 C3 Ch6 B3 A3 L1Ch7 C4 Ch8 B4 A4 L1C5 Ch9 B5 Ch10 A5 L2- L2+ O 11 O 12 L2- C6 Ch11 B6 Ch12 A6 L2- L2+ O 13 O 14 L2L2+ O 15 O 16 L2- EM +24V L1+ O1 O2 L1- L1+ O7 O8 L1L2+ O9 O 10 L2- Supervise Process C7 Ch13 B7 Ch14 A7 L2C8 Ch15 B8 Ch16 A8 L2L2+ L2+ L2- +24V 0V Figure A-86 DO810 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 362 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO810 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A Current Sourcing Figure A-87 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO810 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. DO810 Supervise TU812 +24V UP1 1 1 UP1 14 14 ZP1 2 2 0V L1+ O1 O2 L1L1+ O3 O4 L1L1+ O5 O6 L1L1+ O7 O8 L1L2+ O9 O 10 L2L2+ O 11 O 12 L2L2+ O 13 O 14 L2L2+ O 15 O 16 L2- ZP1 15 15 Ch1 S1 3 3 Ch2 S2 16 16 Ch3 S3 4 4 Ch4 S4 17 17 Ch5 S5 5 5 Ch6 S6 18 18 Ch7 S7 6 6 Ch8 S8 19 19 Ch9 S9 7 7 Ch10 S10 20 20 Ch11 S11 8 8 Ch12 S12 21 21 Ch13 S13 9 9 Ch14 S14 22 22 Ch15 S15 10 10 Ch16 S16 23 23 +24V UP2 11 11 UP2 24 24 ZP2 12 12 ZP2 25 25 EM 13 13 0V Supervise EM Process Connection Figure A-87 DO810 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 363 DO814 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.31 DO814 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sinking A.31.0.1 Features • 16 channels for 24 V d.c. current sinking outputs • 2 isolated groups of 8 channels with process voltage supervision F R W O • Output status indicators • OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection 2 3 4 • Short-circuit protection to ground and 30 V • Over-voltage and over-temperature protection 5 6 7 • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. 1 8 A.31.0.2 Description 9 10 11 12 13 14 The DO814 is a 16 channel 24 V digital output module with current sinking for the S800 I/O. The output voltage range is 10 to 30 volt and the maximum continuous current sinking is 0.5 A. The outputs are protected against short circuits and over temperature. The outputs are divided into two individually isolated groups with eight output channels and one voltage supervision input in each group. 15 16 DO814 24V, 0.5A Each output channel consists of a short circuit and over temperature protected low side switch, EMC protection components, inductive load suppression, output state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. Four LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green), Warning (Yellow) and OSP (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per channel (16) indicate output state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is 364 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO814 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sinking in Init state or Not Configured state. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The OSP LED indicates that the module is in the OSP state and that the outputs are set to their OSP values. The process voltage supervision input give channel error signals if the voltage disappears.The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog timer is retriggered every time the correct module address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent. The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values are written. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK is inactive and POWOK signals is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The outputs are current limited and protected against over temperature. If the outputs are overloaded the output current sinking will be limited. This means that the power dissipation in the output stage will increase and the output will shutdown if the temperature in the output stage increases above 150 °C (302 °F). The output will switch on again automatically as the component temperature has decreased to about 140 °C (284 °F). Five different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 24 V output power connection, but requires external terminals for distribution of 24 V power supply to the devices. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. TU838 provide a fuse (3 A max.) per two channels or process power output. 3BSE 020 924R4101 365 DO814 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.31.0.3 Technical Data Table A-64 DO814 Digital Output Module Specifications DO814 Digital Output Module Feature Number of channels 16 (2 x 8) current sinking Type of output Transistor current sinking, current limited Voltage range 12 - 32 V d.c. Load current, maximum 0.5 A Short circuit current, maximum 2.4 A Leakage current, maximum <10 µa Output impedance <0.4 ohm Maximum field cable length 600 meters (656 yd.) Current consumption +5 V 80 mA Power dissipation (1) 2.1 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) 366 Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256, 512, 1024 ms Process voltage supervision 2 channels (1 per group) Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Module termination units TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830 or TU838 MTU keying code BE Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO814 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sinking Table A-64 DO814 Digital Output Module Specifications (Continued) DO814 Digital Output Module Feature Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.18 kg (0.4 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 367 DO814 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications A.31.0.4 Block Diagram DO814 BIC X2 GROUP 1 OUTPUT 24V SUPERVISION Current SinkingDRIVERS UP1 24V ERROR 1-8 FAULT U1 RUN CH 1 WARNING O1 OSP Modulebus Connector POWER-OK 0V RESET +5VI +5V U2 DAT+ DAT- RS-485 CLK+ CLK- RS-485 POS0-6 BLOCK MBI-1 CH 2 ASIC . . . CH 8 O2 . . . U8 O8 ZP1 Process Connector X1 GROUP 2 OUTPUT 24V SUPERVISION Current SinkingDRIVERS ERROR 9-16 UP2 24V U9-16 EEPROM 8 CH 9-16 / 8 / O 9-16 ZP2 368 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO814 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sinking A.31.0.5 Process Connections Table A-65 DO814 Process Connection Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 male Terminal Connector (1) TU838 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ (2) 0 V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- (2) Ch 1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2 A1 (F1) Ch 1 Output C1 3 C1 B1 Ch 2 Output B1 16 C2 B2 Ch 1/Ch 2, L1- A1 - A1, A2 A2 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4 A3 (F2) Ch 3 Output C2 4 C3 B3 Ch 4 Output B2 17 C4 B4 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4 A4 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6 A5 (F3) Ch 5 Output C3 5 C5 B5 Ch 6 Output B3 18 C6 B6 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6 A6 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8 A7 (F4) Ch 7 Output C4 6 C7 B7 Ch 8 Output B4 19 C8 B8 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1- A4 - A7, A8 A8 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10 A9 (F5) Ch 9 Output C5 7 C9 B9 3BSE 020 924R4101 369 DO814 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Table A-65 DO814 Process Connection (Continued) Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 male Terminal Connector (1) TU838 Terminal Ch 10 Output B5 20 C10 B10 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10 A10 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12 A11 (F6) Ch 11 Output C6 8 C11 B11 Ch 12 Output B6 21 C12 B12 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12 A12 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14 A13 (F7) Ch 13 Output C7 9 C13 B13 Ch 14 Output B7 22 C14 B14 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14 A14 Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16 A15 (F8) Ch 15 Output C8 10 C15 B15 Ch 16 Output B8 23 C16 B16 Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16 A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ (2) 0 V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 370 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO814 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sinking Figure A-85 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO814 when installed on a TU830/TU833 Extended MTU. DO814 TU830/TU833 6.3 A +24V L1+ O1 O2 L1- L1+ L1+ L1L1B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 L1+ O3 O4 L1- B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- L1+ O5 O6 L1- B5,A6 C5 C6 A5,A6 L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- L1+ O7 O8 L1L2+ O9 O 10 L2- B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1- B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- L2+ O 11 O 12 L2- B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- L2+ O 13 O 14 L2L2+ O 15 O 16 L2- B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,A16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- Supervise Fuse 6.3 A Supervise Fuse EM Process L2+ L2+ L2L2- 0V L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- +24V 0V Figure A-88 DO814 with TU830/TU831 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 371 DO814 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Figure A-89 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO814 (current sinking) when installed on a TU838 Extended MTU. DO814 Process TU838 Supervise L1+ O1 O2 L1- F1 L1+ O3 O4 L1- F2 L1+ O5 O6 L1L1+ O7 O8 L1L2+ O9 O 10 L2L2+ O 11 O 12 L2L2+ O 13 O 14 L2L2+ O 15 O 16 L2Supervise EM F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 L1+ L1+ L1L1- +24V 0V A1 B1 B2 A2 L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- A3 B3 B4 A4 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- A5 B5 B6 A6 L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- A7 B7 B8 A8 A9 B9 B10 A10 L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- A11 B11 B12 A12 L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- A13 B13 B14 A14 A15 B15 B16 A16 L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- L2+ L2+ L2L2- +24V 0V Figure A-89 DO814 with TU838 Extended MTU Process Connections 372 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO814 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sinking Figure A-90 shows the process connections for the DO814 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. DO814 TU810 (or TU814) Process 24V Power Supply +24V L1+ L1+ L1- Supervise L1+ O1 O2 L1- C1 B1 A1 Ch1 Ch2 L1- L1+ O3 O4 L1- C2 B2 A2 Ch3 Ch4 L1- L1+ O5 O6 L1- C3 B3 A3 Ch5 Ch6 L1- C4 B4 A4 Ch7 Ch8 L1- C5 B5 A5 Ch9 Ch10 L2- C6 B6 A6 Ch11 Ch12 L2- C7 B7 A7 Ch13 Ch14 L2- C8 B8 A8 Ch15 Ch16 L2- L1+ O7 O8 L1L2+ O9 O 10 L2L2+ O 11 O 12 L2L2+ O 13 O 14 L2L2+ O 15 O 16 L2Supervise EM 0V L2+ L2+ L2- +24V 0V 24V Power Supply Figure A-90 DO814 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 373 DO814 Digital Output Module 24 V, 0.5 A, Current Sinking Appendix A Specifications Figure A-91 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO814 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. DO814 Supervise TU812 +24V UP1 1 1 UP1 14 14 ZP1 2 2 0V L1+ O1 O2 L1L1+ O3 O4 L1L1+ O5 O6 L1L1+ O7 O8 L1L2+ O9 O 10 L2L2+ O 11 O 12 L2L2+ O 13 O 14 L2L2+ O 15 O 16 L2- ZP1 15 15 Ch1 S1 3 3 Ch2 S2 16 16 Ch3 S3 4 4 Ch4 S4 17 17 Ch5 S5 5 5 Ch6 S6 18 18 Ch7 S7 6 6 Ch8 S8 19 19 Ch9 S9 7 7 Ch10 S10 20 20 Ch11 S11 8 8 Ch12 S12 21 21 Ch13 S13 9 9 Ch14 S14 22 22 Ch15 S15 10 10 Ch16 S16 23 23 +24V UP2 11 11 UP2 24 24 ZP2 12 12 ZP2 25 25 EM 13 13 0V Supervise EM Process Connection Figure A-91 DO814 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 374 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO815 Digital Output Module 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing A.32 DO815 Digital Output Module 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing A.32.0.1 Features • 8 channels for 24 V d.c. current sourcing outputs • 2 isolated groups of 4 channels with under voltage detection • OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon communication error • Output status indicators and a channel wise error flag • Short-circuit protection to ground and positive supply • Over load protection • Open load and short-circuit detection • Two output fault operation modes: Automatic reset mode and Fault latching mode • Inductive load driving capability • Filament lamp load up to 10W • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. • Also in a G3 compliant version. F R W O 1 1F 2 2F 3 3F 4 4F 5 5F 6 6F 7 7F 8 8F DO815 24V, 2A A.32.0.2 Description The DO815 is a 8 channel 24 V digital output module for the S800 I/O. The output voltage range is 10 to 30 volt and the maximum continuous output current is 2 A @ 24 V. The outputs are protected against short circuits, and over load. The outputs are divided into two individually isolated groups with four output channels in each group. 3BSE 020 924R4101 375 DO815 Digital Output Module 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications Each output channel consists of a short circuit and over load protected high side driver with open load detection (on active signal), EMC protection components, inductive load suppression, output status indication LEDs and optical isolation barrier. Four LEDs indicate module status; Fault (Red), Run (Green), Warning (Yellow) and OSP (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per channel (8) indicate output state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The output fault diagnostic function, that is, short circuit, over load, under voltage and open load detection, activities a channel wise Error input and Fault LED (1F - 8F) (Red). The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any Error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The OSP LED indicates that the module is in the OSP state and that the outputs are set to their OSP values. The driver outputs provide a “free-wheel diode” to demagnetize inductive loads. No external demagnetization arrangement is required up to loads of 1J. DO815 outputs are able to drive filament lamp loads up to 10W, but only in Automatic reset mode. The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog timer is retriggered every time the correct module address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent. The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to leave OSP state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values are written. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. 376 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO815 Digital Output Module 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing DO815 provides two protection operation modes. Each channel can be configured to operate in one of the two modes. 1. Automatic reset mode (Default mode): The fault condition will disappear, then the fault disappears and the operation is resumed. 2. Fault latching mode (This mode in not applicable in all controllers): The output is switched off by any of the faultconditions. The fault latch remains in fault condition until reset by temporarily setting the automatic reset mode. The output drivers are current limited and protected against over load. If an output has a short circuit to ground the output current will be limited and the driver will shutdown in order to minimize the power dissipation. In the automatic reset mode the output will switch on again automatically after a defined time interval. If the short circuit condition is still present, the output is turned of again, otherwise the normal operation is resumed. In the fault latching mode the output remains off until the fault condition is not valid and the reset of the fault latch is activated. If any output is shutdown due to fault condition the indication LED (Yellow) on that channel remains on if the channel is activated.The output status of the channel can be read from the module. Four different types of MTUs can be used, TU830 Extended MTU and TU810, TU812 or TU814 Compact MTU have terminals for 24 V output power connection and terminals for the output channels. With use of TU812 the current per group is limited to 5 A. 3BSE 020 924R4101 377 DO815 Digital Output Module 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications A.32.0.3 Technical Data Table A-66 DO815 Digital Output Module Specifications DO815 Digital Output Module Feature 378 Number of channels 8 (2 x 4) Type of output High side driver, current limited Process voltage (L+) Normal Range 24 V d.c. 10 - 32 V d.c. On-state output voltage drop Max. 0.5 V Load current, maximum 2 A @ 24 V, 2,5 A @ 30 V Total permissible current of outputs per group Max. 6 A Short circuit current Max. 4 A Open load detection current(1) < 6 mA Leakage current, maximum Max. 500 µA Output impedance <0.25 ohm Filament lamp load only in Automatic reset mode Max. 10W Inductive load switch off energy Max. 1J Output signal delay Max. 0.2 ms Switching frequency resistive load Max. 200 Hz Switching frequency inductive load Max. 2.5 Hz Maximum Field Cable Length 600 meters (656 yd.) Current consumption +5 V 120 mA, 150 mA max. 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO815 Digital Output Module 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing Table A-66 DO815 Digital Output Module Specifications (Continued) DO815 Digital Output Module Feature Power dissipation (2) 4 W @ 24 V Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(3) Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256 (4), 512, 1024 ms Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Module termination units TU810, TU812(5), TU814 or TU830 MTU keying code AA Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 G3 compliant version According to ISA-S71.04. Marked with “Z” in the type designation. Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.2 kg (0.44 lbs.) (1) On active signal (2) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated. (3) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. (4) 256 ms are used for Master. Set by the user for MOD. (5) Current per group is limited to 5 A. 3BSE 020 924R4101 379 DO815 Digital Output Module 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications A.32.0.4 Block Diagram DO815 BIC CH 1-4 CH 1 OSP X1 RESET ModuleBus Connector DAT DAT-N RS-485 POS0-9 BLOCK EEPROM CH 2 . . CH 4 CTR 4 1-4 / L1+ O1 L1+ O2 . . L1+ O4 L1- Process Connector MBI-1 ASIC L1+ Fault Mode Control WARNING POWER-OK 0V OUTPUTDRIVERS GROUP 2 CH 5-8 ERR. 4 / 5-8 CH 4 5-8 / 4 CTR / 5-8 F 5-8 Fault Mode Contol RUN +5VI +5V F 1-4 ERR. 4 1-4 / FAULT 380 X2 GROUP 1 OUTPUTDRIVERS L2+ L2+ 4 / O 5-8 L2- 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO815 Digital Output Module 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing A.32.0.5 Process Connections Table A-67 DO815 Process Connections Process Connection 3BSE 020 924R4101 TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 Terminal TU830/TU833 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) 0 V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) Ch 1/ L1+ - - B1, B2 Ch 1 Output C1, B1 3, 16 C1, C2 Ch 1/L1- A1 - A1, A2 Ch 2/L1+ - - B3, B4 Ch 2 Output C2, B2 4, 17 C3 Ch 2/, L1- A2 - A3, A4 Ch 3/ L1+ - - B5, B6 Ch 3Output C3, B3 5, 18 C5 Ch 3/ L1- A3 - A5, A6 Ch 4/ L1+ - - B7, B8 Ch 4 Output C4, B4 6, 19 C7 Ch 4/ L1- A4 - A7, A8 Ch 5/ L2+ - - B9, B10 Ch 5 Output C5, B5 7, 20 C9 Ch 5/ L2- A5 - A9, A10 Ch 6/ L2+ - - B11, B12 Ch 6 Output C6, B6 8, 21 C11 Ch 6/ L2- A6 - A11, A12 381 DO815 Digital Output Module 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications Table A-67 DO815 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection 382 TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 Terminal TU830/TU833 Terminal Ch 7/ L2+ - - B13, B14 Ch 7 Output C7, B7 9, 22 C13 Ch 7/ L2- A7 - A13, A14 Ch 8/ L2+ - - B15, B16 Ch 8 Output C8, B8 10, 23 C15 Ch 8/ L2- A8 - A15, A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) 0 V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO815 Digital Output Module 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing Figure A-92 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO815 when installed on a TU830/TU833 Extended MTU. DO815 TU830/TU833 6.3 A Fuse L1+ O1 L1L1+ O2 L1L1+ O3 L1L1+ O4 L1L2+ O5 L2L2+ O6 L2L2+ O7 L2L2+ O8 L26.3 A Fuse EM L1+ L1+ L1L1- Process +24V 0V B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 L1+ Ch1 B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 L1+ Ch2 B5,A6 C5 C6 A5,A6 L1+ Ch3 B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 L1+ Ch4 B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 L2+ Ch6 B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,A16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ Ch7 L2+ L2+ L2L2- L1- L1- L1- L1L2+ Ch5 L2- L2- L2L2+ Ch8 L2+24V 0V Figure A-92 DO815 with TU830/TU833 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 383 DO815 Digital Output Module 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing Appendix A Specifications Figure A-93 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO815 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. TU812 DO815 +24V 0V L1+ UP1 1 1 UP1 14 14 ZP1 2 2 ZP1 15 15 O1 L1- Ch1 S1 3 3 L1+ Ch1 S2 16 16 O2 L1- Ch2 S3 4 4 Ch2 S4 17 17 L1+ Ch3 S5 5 5 O3 L1- Ch3 S6 18 18 L1+ Ch4 S7 6 6 O4 L1L2+ Ch4 S8 19 19 Ch5 S9 7 7 Ch5 S10 20 20 Ch6 S11 8 8 L2+ Ch6 S12 21 21 O6 L2- Ch7 S13 9 9 Ch7 S14 22 22 Ch8 S15 10 10 Ch8 O5 L2- L2+ O7 L2L2+ S16 23 23 +24V UP2 11 11 UP2 24 24 ZP2 12 12 ZP2 25 25 EM 13 13 O8 L20V EM Process Connection Figure A-93 DO815 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 384 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO815 Digital Output Module 24 V, 2 A, Current Sourcing Figure A-94 shows the process connections for the DO815 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. DO815 TU810 (or TU814) Process L1+ +24V L1- 0V L1+ O1 L1- C1 B1 A1 L1- C2 B2 A2 L1- Ch1 L1+ O2 L1- Ch2 L1+ O3 L1- Ch3 C3 B3 A3 L1- C4 B4 A4 L1- L1+ O4 L1L2+ C5 B5 A5 O5 L2- Ch4 Ch5 L2- L2+ C6 B6 A6 O6 L2- Ch6 L2- L2+ O7 L2L2+ O8 L2- EM C7 B7 A7 Ch7 C8 B8 A8 Ch8 L2- L2+ +24V L2- 0V Figure A-94 DO815 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 385 DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Open Appendix A Specifications A.33 DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Open A.33.0.1 Features • 8 channels for 230 V a.c./d.c. relay Normal Open (NO) outputs F R • 8 isolated channels • Output status indicators • OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection 2 • EMC protection 3 • DIN rail mounting. 4 • Also in a G3 compliant version. 5 W O 1 A.33.0.2 Description 6 The DO820 is an 8 channel 230 V a.c./d.c. relay (NO) output module for the S800 I/O. The maximum output voltage is 250 V a.c./d.c. and the maximum continuous output current is 3 A. All outputs are individually isolated. 7 8 DO820 NO 24 - 250V Each output channel consists of optical isolation barrier, output state indication LED, relay driver, relay and EMC protection components. Four LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green), Warning (Yellow) and OSP (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per channel (8) indicate output state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The OSP LED indicates that the module is in the OSP state and that the outputs are set to their OSP values. The relay supply voltage supervision, derived from the 24 V distributed on the ModuleBus, gives an error signal if the voltage disappears, and the Warning LED 386 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Open turns on. The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. This supervision can be enabled/disabled with a parameter. The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received. The watchdog timer which is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog timer is re-triggered every time the correct node address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent. The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values are written. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU831 Extended MTU and TU811 Compact MTU enables two wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The extended MTUs, TU836, provides an individual fuse (3 A max.) per channel on the load outlet terminals. The extended MTUs, TU837, provides an individual fuse (3 A max.) per channel. Outputs can be individually isolated or grouped by bridging. Signal return terminals are provided in two groups of four terminals. 3BSE 020 924R4101 387 DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Open Appendix A Specifications A.33.0.3 Technical Data Table A-68 DO820 Digital Output Module Specifications DO820 Digital Output Module Feature Number of channels 8 Type of output Relay (NO) Voltage range 5 - 250 V a.c./d.c. Load current, maximum 3A Load current, minimum 5 mA Max. make current 30 A, 200ms, L/R >10 ms Max break power a.c. 720 VA @ power factor > 0.4, d.c.40 W L/R < 40 ms Maximum field cable length (d.c., a.c.) 600 meters (656 yd.) Pick-up time, maximum 9 ms Release time, maximum 5 ms Number of operations per hour, maximum 2000 Number of operations per lifetime: Mechanical >20 x 106 Electrical >1 x 106 Current consumption +5 V 60 mA Current consumption +24 V 140 mA Power dissipation (1) Maximum ambient temperature 2.9 W 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 388 256 (3), 512, 1024 ms 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Open Table A-68 DO820 Digital Output Module Specifications (Continued) DO820 Digital Output Module Feature Power supervision 24/12 V Relay power converter monitor Isolation Individually isolated from ground (RIV=250 V) Module termination units TU811, TU831, TU836 or TU837 MTU keying code AD Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 G3 compliant version According to ISA-S71.04. Marked with “Z” in the type designation. Rated insulation voltage 250 V Dielectric test voltage 2000 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.23 kg (0.5 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. (3) 256 ms are used for Master. Set by the user for MOD. 3BSE 020 924R4101 389 DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Open Appendix A Specifications A.33.0.4 Block Diagram DO820 X1 OUTPUT CHANNELS BIC +24V 12V 0V-24V 24V X2 WARNING 12V SUPERVISION ERROR 1-8 OSP POWER-OK 0V DAT DAT-N MBI-1 ASIC CH 1 O 1.1 O 1.2 O 2.1 CH 2 O 2.2 RS-485 POS0-9 BLOCK . . . Process Connector +5VI +5V RESET ModuleBus Connector FAULT RUN . . . O 8.1 EEPROM 390 CH 8 O 8.2 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Open A.33.0.5 Process Connections Table A-69 DO820 Process Connections Process Connection TU811 Terminal TU831 Terminal TU836 Terminal TU837 Terminal Ch 1.1 Output B1 B1 11 (fused) B1 Ch 1.2 Output A1 A1 12 A1 (fused) Ch 2.1 Output C2 B2 21 (fused) B2 Ch 2.2 Output A2 A2 22 A2 (fused) Ch 3.1 Output B3 B3 31 (fused) B3 Ch 3.2 Output A3 A3 32 A3 (fused) Ch 4.1 Output C4 B4 41 (fused) B4 Ch 4.2 Output A4 A4 42 A4 (fused) Ch 5.1 Output B5 B5 51 (fused) B5 Ch 5.2 Output A5 A5 52 A5 (fused) Ch 6.1 Output C6 B6 61 (fused) B6 Ch 6.2 Output A6 A6 62 A6 (fused) Ch 7.1 Output B7 B7 71 (fused) B7 Ch 7.2 Output A7 A7 72 A7 (fused) Ch 8.1 Output C8 B8 81 (fused) B8 Ch 8.2 Output A8 A8 82 A8 (fused) Process Power Source 1 - - L1, N1 N1, N1, 11, 12, 13, 14 Process Power Source 2 - - L2, N2 N2, N2, 25, 26, 27, 28 3BSE 020 924R4101 391 DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Open Appendix A Specifications Figure A-95 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO820 when installed on a TU831 Extended MTU. DO820 TU831 Process 5 - 250V a.c/d.c. O 1.1 O 1.2 B1 A1 Ch1.1 Ch1.2 O 2.1 O 2.2 B2 A2 Ch2.1 Ch2.2 O 3.1 O 3.2 B3 A3 Ch3.1 Ch3.2 O 4.1 O 4.2 B4 A4 Ch4.1 Ch4.2 O 5.1 O 5.2 B5 A5 Ch5.1 Ch5.2 O 6.1 O 6.2 B6 A6 Ch6.1 Ch6.2 O 7.1 O 7.2 B7 A7 Ch7.1 Ch7.2 O 8.1 O 8.2 B8 A8 Ch8.1 Ch8.2 5 - 250V a.c/d.c. EM Figure A-95 DO820 with TU831 Extended MTU Process Connections 392 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Open Figure A-96 shows the process connections for the DO820 when installed on a TU811 or TU813 Compact MTU. DO820 TU811/TU813 Process 5 - 250V a.c/d.c. O 1.1 O 1.2 B1 A1 Ch1.1 Ch1.2 O 2.1 O 2.2 C2 A2 Ch2.1 Ch2.2 O 3.1 O 3.2 B3 A3 Ch3.1 Ch3.2 O 4.1 O 4.2 C4 A4 Ch4.1 Ch4.2 O 5.1 O 5.2 B5 A5 Ch5.1 Ch5.2 O 6.1 O 6.2 C6 A6 Ch6.1 Ch6.2 O 7.1 O 7.2 B7 A7 Ch7.1 Ch7.2 O 8.1 O 8.2 C8 A8 Ch8.1 Ch8.2 5 - 250V a.c/d.c. EM Figure A-96 DO820 with TU811 or TU813 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 393 DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Open Appendix A Specifications Figure A-97 shows the process connections for the DO820 when installed on a TU836 Extended MTU. DO820 TU836 Process L1 L1 5 - 250V a.c/d.c. N1 N1 O 1.1 O 1.2 O 2.1 O 2.2 O 3.1 O 3.2 O 4.1 O 4.2 O 5.1 O 5.2 O 6.1 O 6.2 O 7.1 O 7.2 O 8.1 O 8.2 3.15A 3.15A 3.15A 3.15A 3.15A 3.15A 3.15A 3.15A 11 12 Ch1.1 Ch1.2 21 22 Ch2.1 Ch2.2 31 32 Ch3.1 Ch3.2 41 42 Ch4.1 Ch4.2 51 52 Ch5.1 Ch5.2 61 62 Ch6.1 Ch6.2 71 72 Ch7.1 Ch7.2 81 82 Ch8.1 Ch8.2 L2 L2 EM N2 N2 5 - 250V a.c/d.c. Figure A-97 DO820 with TU836 Extended MTU Process Connections 394 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Open Figure A-98 shows the process connections for the DO820 when installed on a TU837 Extended MTU. TU837 DO820 ZP1 Process 0-250V a.c./d.c. N1 N1 11 12 13 14 O 1.1 O 1.2 B1 A1 Ch1.1 B2 A2 Ch2.1 B3 A3 Ch3.1 Ch3.2 B4 A4 Ch4.1 Ch4.2 3.15A O 2.1 O 2.2 3.15A O 3.1 O 3.2 3.15A O 4.1 O 4.2 0-250V a.c./d.c. 3.15A 0-250V a.c./d.c. B5 A5 O 5.1 O 5.2 3.15A O 6.1 O 6.2 B6 A6 3.15A O 7.1 O 7.2 B7 A7 Ch7.1 Ch7.2 B8 A8 Ch8.1 Ch8.2 3.15A O 8.1 O 8.2 3.15A EM ZP2 0-250V a.c./d.c. 25 26 27 28 N2 N2 0-250V a.c./d.c. Figure A-98 DO820 with TU837 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 395 DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Closed Appendix A Specifications A.34 DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Closed A.34.0.1 Features • 8 channels for 230 V a.c./d.c. relay Normal Closed (NC) outputs F R • 8 isolated channels • Output status indicators • OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection 2 • EMC protection 3 • DIN rail mounting. 4 A.34.0.2 Description The DO821 is an 8 channel 230 V a.c./d.c. relay (NC) output module for the S800 I/O. The maximum output voltage is 250 V a.c. and the maximum continuous output current is 3 A. All outputs are individually isolated. Each output channel consists of optical isolation barrier, output state indication LED, relay driver, relay and EMC protection components. W Remove field power before replacement O 1 5 6 7 8 DO821 NC 24 - 250V Caution Four LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run Since the module has normally closed (Green), Warning (Yellow) and OSP (Yellow). One relay contacts the field power must be removed before replacement. LED (Yellow) per channel (8) indicate output state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The OSP LED indicates that the module is in the OSP state and that the outputs are set to their OSP values. 396 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Closed The relay supply voltage supervision, derived from the 24 V distributed on the ModuleBus, gives an error signal if the voltage disappears, and the Warning LED turns on. The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. This supervision can be enabled/disabled with a parameter. The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received. The watchdog timer which is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog timer is re-triggered every time the correct node address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent. The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values are written. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU831 Extended MTU and TU811 Compact MTU enables two wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The extended MTU, TU836, provides an individual fuse (3 A max.) per channel on the load outlet terminals. The extended MTU, TU837 provides an individual fuse (3 A max.) per channel. Outputs can be individually isolated or grouped by bridging. Signal return terminals are provided in two groups of four terminals. 3BSE 020 924R4101 397 DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Closed Appendix A Specifications A.34.0.3 Technical Data Table A-70 DO821 Digital Output Module Specifications DO821 Digital Output Module Feature Number of channels 8 Type of output Relay (NC) Voltage range 5 - 250 V a.c./d.c. Load current, maximum 3A Load current, minimum 5 mA Max. make current 30 A, 200ms, L/R >10 ms Max break power a.c. 720 VA @ power factor > 0.4, d.c. 40 W L/R < 40 ms Maximum field cable length (d.c., a.c.) 600 meters (656 yd.) Pick-up time, maximum 9 ms Release time, maximum 5 ms Number of operations per hour, maximum 2000 Number of operations per lifetime: Mechanical >20 x 106 Electrical >1 x 106 Current consumption +5 V 60 mA Current consumption +24 V 140 mA Power dissipation (1) Maximum ambient temperature 2.9 W 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 398 256, 512, 1024 ms 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Closed Table A-70 DO821 Digital Output Module Specifications (Continued) DO821 Digital Output Module Feature Power supervision 24/12 V Relay power converter monitor Isolation Individually isolated from ground (RIV=250 V) Module termination units TU811, TU831, TU836 or TU837 MTU keying code CA Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 250 V Dielectric test voltage 2000 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.23 kg (0.5 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 399 DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Closed Appendix A Specifications A.34.0.4 Block Diagram DO821 X1 OUTPUT CHANNELS BIC +24V 12V 0V-24V 24V X2 FAULT RUN WARNING POWER-OK 0V DAT DAT-N MBI-1 ASIC CH 1 O 1.1 O 1.2 O 2.1 CH 2 O 2.2 RS-485 POS0-9 BLOCK . . . Process Connector +5VI +5V RESET ModuleBus Connector 12V SUPERVISION ERROR 1-8 OSP . . . O 8.1 EEPROM 400 CH 8 O 8.2 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Closed A.34.0.5 Process Connections Table A-71 DO821 Process Connections Process Connection TU811 Terminal TU831 Terminal Ch 1.1 Output B1 B1 11 (fused) B1 Ch 1.2 Output A1 A1 12 A1 (fused) Ch 2.1 Output C2 B2 21 (fused) B2 Ch 2.2 Output A2 A2 22 A2 (fused) Ch 3.1 Output B3 B3 31 (fused) B3 Ch 3.2 Output A3 A3 32 A3 (fused) Ch 4.1 Output C4 B4 41 (fused) B4 Ch 4.2 Output A4 A4 42 A4 (fused) Ch 5.1 Output B5 B5 51 (fused) B5 Ch 5.2 Output A5 A5 52 A5 (fused) Ch 6.1 Output C6 B6 61 (fused) B6 Ch 6.2 Output A6 A6 62 A6 (fused) Ch 7.1 Output B7 B7 71 (fused) B7 Ch 7.2 Output A7 A7 72 A7 (fused) Ch 8.1 Output C8 B8 81 (fused) B8 Ch 8.2 Output A8 A8 82 A8 (fused) Process Power Source 1 - - L1, N1 N1, N1, 11, 12, 13, 14 Process Power Source 2 - - L2, N2 N2, N2, 25, 26, 27, 28 3BSE 020 924R4101 TU836 Terminal TU837 Terminal 401 DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Closed Appendix A Specifications Figure A-99 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO821 when installed on a TU831 Extended MTU. DO821 TU831 Process 5 - 250V a.c/d.c. O 1.1 O 1.2 B1 A1 Ch1.1 Ch1.2 O 2.1 O 2.2 B2 A2 Ch2.1 Ch2.2 O 3.1 O 3.2 B3 A3 Ch3.1 Ch3.2 O 4.1 O 4.2 B4 A4 Ch4.1 Ch4.2 O 5.1 O 5.2 B5 A5 Ch5.1 Ch5.2 O 6.1 O 6.2 B6 A6 Ch6.1 Ch6.2 O 7.1 O 7.2 B7 A7 Ch7.1 Ch7.2 O 8.1 O 8.2 B8 A8 Ch8.1 Ch8.2 5 - 250V a.c/d.c. EM Figure A-99 DO821 with TU831 Extended MTU Process Connections 402 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Closed Figure A-100 shows the process connections for the DO821 when installed on a TU811 or TU813 Compact MTU. DO821 TU811/TU813 Process 5 - 250V a.c/d.c. O 1.1 O 1.2 B1 A1 Ch1.1 Ch1.2 O 2.1 O 2.2 C2 A2 Ch2.1 Ch2.2 O 3.1 O 3.2 B3 A3 Ch3.1 Ch3.2 O 4.1 O 4.2 C4 A4 Ch4.1 Ch4.2 O 5.1 O 5.2 B5 A5 Ch5.1 Ch5.2 O 6.1 O 6.2 C6 A6 Ch6.1 Ch6.2 O 7.1 O 7.2 B7 A7 Ch7.1 Ch7.2 O 8.1 O 8.2 C8 A8 Ch8.1 Ch8.2 5 - 250V a.c/d.c. EM Figure A-100 DO821 with TU811 or TU813 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 403 DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Closed Appendix A Specifications Figure A-101 shows the process connections for the DO821 when installed on a TU836 Extended MTU. DO821 TU836 Process L1 L1 5 - 250V a.c/d.c. N1 N1 O 1.1 O 1.2 O 2.1 O 2.2 O 3.1 O 3.2 O 4.1 O 4.2 O 5.1 O 5.2 O 6.1 O 6.2 O 7.1 O 7.2 O 8.1 O 8.2 3.15A 3.15A 3.15A 3.15A 3.15A 3.15A 3.15A 3.15A 11 12 Ch1.1 Ch1.2 21 22 Ch2.1 Ch2.2 31 32 Ch3.1 Ch3.2 41 42 Ch4.1 Ch4.2 51 52 Ch5.1 Ch5.2 61 62 Ch6.1 Ch6.2 71 72 Ch7.1 Ch7.2 81 82 Ch8.1 Ch8.2 L2 L2 EM N2 N2 5 - 250V a.c/d.c. Figure A-101 DO821 with TU836 Extended MTU Process Connections 404 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay Normally Closed Figure A-102 shows the process connections for the DO821 when installed on a TU837 Extended MTU. DO821 TU837 ZP1 Process 230V N1 N1 O 1.1 O 1.2 B1 A1 3.15A O 2.1 O 2.2 3.15A O 3.1 O 3.2 3.15A 11 B2 A2 Ch2.1 Ch2.2 12 Bridging B3 A3 Ch3.1 Ch3.2 13 B4 A4 O 4.1 O 4.2 3.15A 3.15A O 6.1 O 6.2 3.15A O 7.1 O 7.2 3.15A 3.15A B6 A6 Ch6.1 Ch6.2 26 Bridging B7 A7 Ch7.1 Ch7.2 27 28 N2 ZP2 230V Ch5.1 Ch5.2 25 B8 A8 O 8.1 O 8.2 Ch4.1 Ch4.2 14 B5 A5 O 5.1 O 5.2 Ch1.1 Ch1.2 Ch8.1 Ch8.2 230V 230V N2 EM Figure A-102 DO821 with TU837 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 405 DO840 Digital Output Module Appendix A Specifications A.35 DO840 Digital Output Module A.35.0.1 Features • 16 channels for 24 V d.c. current sourcing outputs • 2 isolated groups of 8 channels with process voltage supervision • Advanced on-board diagnostics • Output status indicators • OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection • Redundant or single applications • Current limited and over-temperature protection • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. F R W O A.35.0.2 Description The DO840 is a 16 channel 24 V digital output module for single or redundant application. This module has 16 digital outputs. The maximum continuous output current per channel is 0.5 A. The outputs are current limited and protected against over temperature. The outputs are divided into two groups with eight output channels and one voltage supervision input in each group. DO840 24V, 0.5A Each output channel consists of a current limited and over temperature protected high side driver, EMC protection components, inductive load suppression, output state indication LED and optical isolation barrier. Four LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green), Warning (Yellow) and OSP (Yellow). One LED (Yellow/Red) per channel (16) indicate output state (On = 1 = Yellow, Off = 0 and Error = Red). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if there is error on active channels. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not Configured state. 406 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO840 Digital Output Module In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The OSP LED indicates that the module is in the OSP state and that the outputs are set to their OSP values. External channel error is reported if process power is low and channel has over load. Internal channel error is reported if output driver or main power switch has failed. Module error is reported if internal power has failed or if internal communication link between the modules in redundant applications has failed. The pulse tests inverts all outputs for the group for < 1ms in intervals of 100 ms. That will give a short pulse < 1ms on the output. The pulse tests can be enable/disable by parameter. The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog timer is retriggered every time the correct module address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent. The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values are written. In redundant applications both modules must have the OSP-conditions fulfilled to go to OSP. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. The outputs can be set in two different modes for handling of over load, automatic reset or latch on fault mode. The outputs are current limited and protected against over temperature. If the outputs are overloaded the output current will be limited. In automatic reset mode the power dissipation in the output stage will increase and the output will shutdown if the temperature in the output stage increases above 150 °C (302 °F). The output 3BSE 020 924R4101 407 DO840 Digital Output Module Appendix A Specifications will switch on again automatically as the component temperature has decreased to about 140 °C (284 °F). In Latch on Fault mode the outputs will switch off and stay so until the overload has disappeared and the fault is acknowledged. If any output is shutdown due to overload the indication LED on that channel is also switched to red. Four different types of MTUs can be used for single applications. TU830 Extended MTU and TU810 (or TU814). The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. For redundant applications there are two types of MTUs, TU842 for mounting on a horizontal DIN rail and TU843 for mounting on a vertical DIN rail. 408 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO840 Digital Output Module A.35.0.3 Technical Data Table A-72 DO840 Digital Output Module Specifications DO840 Digital Output Module Feature Number of channels 16 (2 x 8) Type of output Transistor current sourcing, current limited Voltage range 19.2 - 32 V d.c. Load current, maximum 0.5 A Maximum continuos load current total per module 4A @ <40°C 2A @ <55°C Short circuit current, maximum 2.5 A Leakage current, maximum <10 µa On-state voltage drop <0.3 V Maximum Field Cable Length 600 meters (656 yd.) Current consumption +5 V 130 mA Current consumption external 24 V (no external load) 200 mA Power dissipation (1) 4.3 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2) Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256, 512, 1024 ms Process voltage supervision 2 channels (1 per group) Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground (RIV=50 V) Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830, TU842 or TU843 3BSE 020 924R4101 409 DO840 Digital Output Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-72 DO840 Digital Output Module Specifications (Continued) DO840 Digital Output Module Feature MTU keying code CE Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.15 kg (0.33 lbs.) (1) Power dissipation is calculated with 24 V and 4 A total load. (2) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 410 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO840 Digital Output Module A.35.0.4 Block Diagram DO840 FAULT RUN-N WARN-N OSP MSL_txd MSL OUT MSL_rxd1 MSL IN MBI FPGA UP1 UP2 OUT1-8 DO Circuits OUT9-16 DO Circuits CH1-8 CH9-16 UP1 UP2 EM 3BSE 020 924R4101 ZP 411 DO840 Digital Output Module Appendix A Specifications A.35.0.5 Process Connections Table A-73 DO840 Process Connections Process Connection 412 TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 male Terminal Connector(1) TU842 TU843 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ 0 V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- Ch 1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2 - Ch 1 Output C1 3 C1 C1 Ch 2 Output B1 16 C2 C2 Ch 1/Ch 2, L1- A1 - A1, A2 A1, A2 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4 - Ch 3 Output C2 4 C3 C3 Ch 4 Output B2 17 C4 C4 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4 A3, A3 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6 - Ch 5 Output C3 5 C5 C5 Ch 6 Output B3 18 C6 C6 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6 A5, A6 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8 - Ch 7 Output C4 6 C7 C7 Ch 8 Output B4 19 C8 C8 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1- A4 - A7, A8 A7, A8 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10 - Ch 9 Output C5 7 C9 C9 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO840 Digital Output Module Table A-73 DO840 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 male Terminal Connector(1) TU842 TU843 Terminal Ch 10 Output B5 20 C10 C10 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10 A9, A10 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12 - Ch 11 Output C6 8 C11 C11 Ch 12 Output B6 21 C12 C12 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12 A11, A12 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14 - Ch 13 Output C7 9 C13 C13 Ch 14 Output B7 22 C14 C14 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14 A13, A14 Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16 - Ch 15 Output C8 10 C15 C15 Ch 16 Output B8 23 C16 C16 Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16 A15, A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ 0 V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 3BSE 020 924R4101 413 DO840 Digital Output Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-103 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO840 when installed on a TU830/TU833 Extended MTU. DO840 TU830/TU833 6.3 A Supervise Fuse 0V B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- L1+ O3 O4 L1- B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- L1+ O5 O6 L1- B5,A6 C5 C6 A5,A6 L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- L1+ O7 O8 L1L2+ O9 O 10 L2- B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- L2+ O 11 O 12 L2- B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- L2+ O 13 O 14 L2L2+ O 15 O 16 L2- B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,A16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- L2+ L2+ L2L2- +24V Fuse EM +24V L1+ O1 O2 L1- 6.3 A Supervise L1+ L1+ L1L1- Process 0V Figure A-103 DO840 with TU830/TU833 Extended MTU Process Connections 414 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO840 Digital Output Module Figure A-104 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO840 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. DO840 TU810 (or TU814) L1+ L1+ L1- Supervise 0V C1 Ch1 B1 Ch2 A1 L1- L1+ O3 O4 L1- Ch3 C2 Ch4 B2 A2 L1- L1+ O5 O6 L1- Ch5 C3 Ch6 B3 A3 L1Ch7 C4 Ch8 B4 A4 L1C5 Ch9 B5 Ch10 A5 L2- L2+ O 11 O 12 L2- C6 Ch11 B6 Ch12 A6 L2- L2+ O 13 O 14 L2L2+ O 15 O 16 L2- EM +24V L1+ O1 O2 L1- L1+ O7 O8 L1L2+ O9 O 10 L2- Supervise Process C7 Ch13 B7 Ch14 A7 L2C8 Ch15 B8 Ch16 A8 L2L2+ L2+ L2- +24V 0V Figure A-104 DO840 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 415 DO840 Digital Output Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-105 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO840 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. DO840 Supervise TU812 +24V UP1 1 1 UP1 14 14 ZP1 2 2 0V L1+ O1 O2 L1L1+ O3 O4 L1L1+ O5 O6 L1L1+ O7 O8 L1L2+ O9 O 10 L2L2+ O 11 O 12 L2L2+ O 13 O 14 L2L2+ O 15 O 16 L2- ZP1 15 15 Ch1 S1 3 3 Ch2 S2 16 16 Ch3 S3 4 4 Ch4 S4 17 17 Ch5 S5 5 5 Ch6 S6 18 18 Ch7 S7 6 6 Ch8 S8 19 19 Ch9 S9 7 7 Ch10 S10 20 20 Ch11 S11 8 8 Ch12 S12 21 21 Ch13 S13 9 9 Ch14 S14 22 22 Ch15 S15 10 10 Ch16 S16 23 23 +24V UP2 11 11 UP2 24 24 ZP2 12 12 ZP2 25 25 EM 13 13 0V Supervise EM Process Connection Figure A-105 DO840 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 416 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO840 Digital Output Module Figure A-106 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO840 when installed on a TU842 or TU843 Redundant MTU. DO840 Process TU842/TU843 L1+ L1+ L1L1- Supervise +24V 0V O1 O2 L1- C1 C2 A1,A2 Ch1 Ch2 L1- O3 O4 L1- C3 C4 A3,A4 Ch3 Ch4 L1- O5 O6 L1- C5 C6 A5,A6 Ch5 Ch6 L1- O7 O8 L1- C7 C8 A7,A8 Ch7 Ch8 L1- O9 O 10 L2- C9 C10 A9,A10 Ch9 Ch10 L2- O 11 O 12 L2- C11 C12 A11,A12 Ch11 Ch12 L2- O 13 O 14 L2- C13 C14 A13,A14 Ch13 Ch14 L2- C15 C16 A15,A16 Ch15 Ch16 L2- O 15 O 16 L2- L2+ L2+ L2L2- Supervise EM +24V 0V DO840 Supervise --- O1 O2 L1- O 15 O 16 L2Supervise EM Figure A-106 DO840 with TU842 or TU843 Redundant MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 417 DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module Appendix A Specifications A.36 DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module A.36.0.1 Features 418 • 16 channels for 24 V d.c. current sourcing outputs in one isolated group. • Process voltage supervision. • Loop monitoring, supervision of short and open load with configurable limits (see table Table A-74). • Diagnostic of output switches without pulsing on outputs. • Advanced on-board diagnostics. • Output status indicators (activated/error). • Error detection. • Redundant or single configuration. • Current limitation at short and over-temperature protection of switches. • Fault tolerance of 1 (as defined in EN 61508) for output drivers. For ND and CC systems, outputs can still be controlled with error on output drivers. • EMC protection. • DIN rail mounting. • Certified for SIL3 according to EN 61508. – Normally Energized (NE) high demand and low demand – Normally De-energized (ND), low demand – Continuos Control (CC) • Certified for AK6 according to DIN V 19250/DIN V VDE 0801-AK6. • Certified for Category 4 according to EN954-1. 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module A.36.0.2 Description The DO880 is a 16 channel 24 V digital output module for single or redundant application. The maximum continuous output current per channel is 0.5 A. The outputs are current limited and protected against over temperature. Each output channel consists of a current limited and over temperature protected high side driver, EMC protection components, inductive load suppression, output state indication LED and an isolation barrier to the Modulebus. The outputs can be set in two different modes for handling of over load, automatic reset when overload/short is removed or manual reset by operator (forcing output off and on). The outputs are current protected and protected against over temperature. If load increases above 0,6A, the output will be switched off and an external channel error reported. Four different types of MTUs can be used for single configuration. TU830 Extended MTU and TU810 (or TU814). The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process. For redundant configuration there are two types of MTUs, TU842 for mounting on a horizontal DIN rail and TU843 for mounting on a vertical DIN rail. Self-diagnostic Functions The module cyclically performs comprehensive self-diagnostic. Detected failures are grouped and reported as described below: • Errors in External power supply and detected field loop fault will be reported as External error. • Errors in circuits only affecting specific channels on the module (short circuits, open circuits, stuck-at faults) will be reported as Internal channel error. • Errors in internal power supplies, Errors in micro controller, FPGA and Memory will be reported as Module Error. Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow): 3BSE 020 924R4101 419 DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module 420 Appendix A Specifications • The RUN LED starts flashing when the module is ready to be configured and is steady lit when the module has reached operational state. • The WARNING LED indicates external errors or internal channel errors. • The FAULT LED indicates that there is Module errors present or that the module is in Init state. 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module A.36.0.3 Technical Data Table A-74 DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module Specifications DO880 Digital Output Module Feature Number of channels 16 Type of output Transistor current sourcing, current limited Voltage range 19.2 - 32 V Load current, maximum 0.5 A Maximum continuos load current total per module 8A @ <40°C 4A @ <60°C Short circuit current, maximum See Figure A-107 Leakage current, maximum <100 µA Loop monitoring Configurable for loop resistance from 50 Ω to 2 kΩ dependent of configuration and mode of operation De-energized safe voltage at fault <5 V De-energized safe current at fault <35 mA On-state voltage drop <0.8 V Maximum field cable length 600 meters (656 yd.) Current consumption +5 V 10 mA Current consumption ModuleBus 24 V 55 mA (max) Current consumption +24 V (field supply) 10 mA + channel output current Power dissipation 5.6 W (0,5 A x 16 channels) Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F) 3BSE 020 924R4101 421 DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-74 DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module Specifications (Continued) DO880 Digital Output Module Feature 422 Process voltage supervision 16 (1 per channel) Isolation Yes Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830, TU842, TU843 MTU keying code FE Propagation delay Modulebus output 10 ms max Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.20 kg (0.44 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module A 40 35 30 25 Redundant 20 Singel 15 10 5 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 1 3 5 7 <20 ms Figure A-107 Short circuit current, worst case The short circuit current is dependent on the power supply and the cable resistance. A configuration with a power supply with very low internal resistance and a very low cable resistance represents the worst case. 3BSE 020 924R4101 423 DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module Appendix A Specifications A.36.0.4 Block Diagram DO880 FPGA FS R W CH1 SHUNT F MUX CH1 CH16 MCU MUX CH16 SHUNT FS 424 3.3V 24V 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module A.36.0.5 Process Connections Table A-75 DO880 Process Connections Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 male Terminal Connector(1) TU842 TU843 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ 0 V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- Ch 1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2 - Ch 1 Output C1 3 C1 C1 Ch 2 Output B1 16 C2 C2 Ch 1/Ch 2, L1- A1 - A1, A2 A1, A2 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4 - Ch 3 Output C2 4 C3 C3 Ch 4 Output B2 17 C4 C4 Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4 A3, A3 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6 - Ch 5 Output C3 5 C5 C5 Ch 6 Output B3 18 C6 C6 Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6 A5, A6 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8 - Ch 7 Output C4 6 C7 C7 Ch 8 Output B4 19 C8 C8 Ch 7/Ch 8, L1- A4 - A7, A8 A7, A8 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10 - Ch 9 Output C5 7 C9 C9 3BSE 020 924R4101 425 DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-75 DO880 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 TU830/TU833 male Terminal Connector(1) TU842 TU843 Terminal Ch 10 Output B5 20 C10 C10 Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10 A9, A10 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12 - Ch 11 Output C6 8 C11 C11 Ch 12 Output B6 21 C12 C12 Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12 A11, A12 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14 - Ch 13 Output C7 9 C13 C13 Ch 14 Output B7 22 C14 C14 Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14 A13, A14 Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16 - Ch 15 Output C8 10 C15 C15 Ch 16 Output B8 23 C16 C16 Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16 A15, A16 +24 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ 0 V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 426 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module Figure A-108 shows the process connections for the High Integrity Digital Output Module DO880 when installed on a TU830/TU833 Extended MTU. DO880 TU830/TU833 6.3 A Fuse 0V B1,B2 C1 C2 A1,A2 L1+ Ch1 Ch2 L1- L1+ O3 O4 L1- B3,B4 C3 C4 A3,A4 L1+ Ch3 Ch4 L1- L1+ O5 O6 L1- B5,A6 C5 C6 A5,A6 L1+ Ch5 Ch6 L1- L1+ O7 O8 L1L2+ O9 O 10 L2- B7,B8 C7 C8 A7,A8 B9,B10 C9 C10 A9,A10 L1+ Ch7 Ch8 L1L2+ Ch9 Ch10 L2- L2+ O 11 O 12 L2- B11,B12 C11 C12 A11,A12 L2+ Ch11 Ch12 L2- L2+ O 13 O 14 L2L2+ O 15 O 16 L2- B13,B14 C13 C14 A13,A14 B15,A16 C15 C16 A15,A16 L2+ Ch13 Ch14 L2L2+ Ch15 Ch16 L2- L2+ L2+ L2L2- +24V Fuse EM +24V L1+ O1 O2 L1- 6.3 A Supervise L1+ L1+ L1L1- Process 0V Figure A-108 DO880 with TU830/TU833 Extended MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 427 DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-109 shows the process connections for the High Integrity Digital Output Module DO880 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU. DO880 TU810 (or TU814) L1+ L1+ L1- 0V C1 Ch1 B1 Ch2 A1 L1- L1+ O3 O4 L1- Ch3 C2 Ch4 B2 A2 L1- L1+ O5 O6 L1- Ch5 C3 Ch6 B3 A3 L1Ch7 C4 Ch8 B4 A4 L1C5 Ch9 B5 Ch10 A5 L2- L2+ O 11 O 12 L2- C6 Ch11 B6 Ch12 A6 L2- L2+ O 13 O 14 L2L2+ O 15 O 16 L2- EM +24V L1+ O1 O2 L1- L1+ O7 O8 L1L2+ O9 O 10 L2- Supervise Process C7 Ch13 B7 Ch14 A7 L2C8 Ch15 B8 Ch16 A8 L2L2+ L2+ L2- +24V 0V Figure A-109 DO880 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections 428 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module Figure A-110 shows the process connections for the High Integrity Digital Output Module DO880 when installed on a TU812 Compact MTU. DO880 TU812 +24V UP1 1 1 UP1 14 14 ZP1 2 2 0V L1+ O1 O2 L1L1+ O3 O4 L1L1+ O5 O6 L1L1+ O7 O8 L1L2+ O9 O 10 L2L2+ O 11 O 12 L2L2+ O 13 O 14 L2L2+ O 15 O 16 L2- ZP1 15 15 Ch1 S1 3 3 Ch2 S2 16 16 Ch3 S3 4 4 Ch4 S4 17 17 Ch5 S5 5 5 Ch6 S6 18 18 Ch7 S7 6 6 Ch8 S8 19 19 Ch9 S9 7 7 Ch10 S10 20 20 Ch11 S11 8 8 Ch12 S12 21 21 Ch13 S13 9 9 Ch14 S14 22 22 Ch15 S15 10 10 Ch16 S16 23 23 +24V UP2 11 11 UP2 24 24 ZP2 12 12 ZP2 25 25 EM 13 13 0V Supervise EM Process Connection Figure A-110 DO880 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 429 DO880 High Integrity Digital Output Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-111 shows the process connections for the High Integrity Digital Output Module DO880 when installed on a TU842 or TU843 Redundant MTU. DO880 Process TU842/TU843 L1+ L1+ L1L1- +24V 0V O1 O2 L1- C1 C2 A1,A2 Ch1 Ch2 L1- O3 O4 L1- C3 C4 A3,A4 Ch3 Ch4 L1- O5 O6 L1- C5 C6 A5,A6 Ch5 Ch6 L1- O7 O8 L1- C7 C8 A7,A8 Ch7 Ch8 L1- O9 O 10 L2- C9 C10 A9,A10 Ch9 Ch10 L2- O 11 O 12 L2- C11 C12 A11,A12 Ch11 Ch12 L2- O 13 O 14 L2- C13 C14 A13,A14 Ch13 Ch14 L2- C15 C16 A15,A16 Ch15 Ch16 L2- O 15 O 16 L2- L2+ L2+ L2L2- Supervise EM +24V 0V DO880 --- O1 O2 L1- O 15 O 16 L2Supervise EM Figure A-111 DO880 with TU842 or TU843 Redundant MTU Process Connections 430 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module A.37 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module A.37.0.1 Features • Two channels • Interface for RS422, 5 V, 12 V, 24 V and 13 mA transducer signal levels • Simultaneous pulse count and frequency measurement • Pulse count (length/position) by accumulation in a bidirectional 29 bit counter • Frequency (speed) measurement 0.25 Hz - 1.5 MHz • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. A.37.0.2 Description The DP820 module consists of two identical independent channels. Each channel can be used for independent pulse count (length/position) and frequency (speed) measurement. F R W O PX1 UP1 ST1 DI1 SY1 DO1 TP1 UL1 PX2 UP2 ST2 DI2 SY2 DO2 TP2 UL2 DP820 A.37.0.3 Transducer Connection Each channel has four inputs (A, B, ST and DI) and one output (DO). The input signals A and B are used as pulse inputs. The input signals ST and DI is used for synchronizing, sampling and gated count purposes. The balanced inputs A, B and ST can be connected to pulse transducers with RS422, 5 V, 12 V, 24 V and 13 mA signal levels if an extended MTU is used (TU830). Adaption to different signal levels is made by using different terminals on the MTU (see section about process connection). Only pulse transducers with RS422, 5 V and 13 mA signal levels can be used if an compact MTU is used (TU810, TU812 or TU814). 3BSE 020 924R4101 431 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications The unipolar input (DI) is intended for 24 V unipolar signal level. The DO output is a current limited digital output, current sourcing type, 24 V d.c., 0.5 A. All signals are individually isolated. All inputs have overvoltage protection. A maximum voltage of 30 V can be connected without any damages. Shielded twisted pair cables with characteristic impedance=100 (+/- 25%) ohm shall be used for connection of transducers with RS422/5 V /13 mA signals. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master after power is applied. Input Filter Each DP820 input has a configurable input filter (see Technical Data). Notice the following restrictions for selection of filters for inputs A or B: The 1µs filter shall always be used when 12 V and 24 V inputs are used. Unfiltered inputs can be used if RS422/+5 V /13 mA inputs are used, but cables between transducers and the DP820 module must then be separated from other cables to avoid that extra pulses occur due to EMI. A.37.0.4 Pulse Encoding The following different methods for pulse encoding are supported by DP820: • Input A is used for counting up, input B is used for counting down, u/d. • Input A is used for pulse counting, input B is used to determine count direction, c/d, B=0: down, B=1: up. • Input A and B is used for a quadrature encoded signals. Multiplication factors x 1, x 2 and x 4 can be specified. Count direction is determined by A and B phase shift: : ... 00 : ... 11 432 10 10 11 00 01 01 00 11 10 10 ... ... 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module A B PULSE COUNT 0 -1 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 3 2 Figure A-112 Up/Down Pulse Mode A B PULSE COUNT 0 -1 0 Figure A-113 Count/Direction Mode A B PULSE COUNT 0 1 2 3 UP 3 4 2 1 0 DOWN Figure A-114 Quadrature Mode, #1 (Count on Pos. Edge Input A) 3BSE 020 924R4101 433 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications A B PULSE COUNT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 UP 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 DOWN Figure A-115 Quadrature Mode, #2 (Count on Pos. Edge and Neg. Edge Input A) A B PULSE COUNT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 UP 13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 DOWN Figure A-116 Quadrature Mode, #4 (Count on Pos. Edge and Neg. Edge Input A and Input B) A.37.0.5 Pulse Count (Length/Position) Measurement Pulse count is done by pulse accumulation in a 29-bit (28bit + sign) bidirectional pulse counter. The pulse counter value is normally continuously loaded into the pulse register (see block diagram). A pulse count sample condition can be specified by the user. When a sample condition is fulfilled is the value in the pulse register “freezed”. The value in the pulse register will remain “freezed” until a freeze disable command is received from the controller. The pulse accumulation in the pulse counter continues during the time when the pulse register is frozen. 434 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module The value of the pulse register (that is, actual pulse count value or “freezed” value) is read by the CPU, and transferred to the controller. The pulse counter is synchronized (that is, set to zero) if a user selectable synchronization condition is fulfilled. A comparator is used to compare the value of the pulse counter with the content of the compare register. The value of the compare register is specified by the user. A “coincidence” occur when a equal condition is detected by the comparator. The coincidence function can be used to control the digital output signal (DO), as pulse count sample condition, as synchronization condition and as frequency sample condition (see below). The pulse counter has overflow detection. A.37.0.6 Gated Count Mode In gated count mode the pulse counter only counts when the gate is active. The gate is controlled by the DI input. The gate can be controlled in two different ways: The DI input is level sensitive, that is, the counter only counts when DI = high. The DI input is edge sensitive, that is, the counter starts count on a positive edge on the DI input, stops on the next positive edge, continues on the next positive edge, and so forth. A Level sensitive DI Counter Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 Edge sensitive DI Counter Value Figure A-117 Gated Count Mode in Two different Ways 3BSE 020 924R4101 435 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications Synchronization and sample conditions which uses the DI signal as part of the condition can not be used in gated count mode. A.37.0.7 Frequency (speed) Measurement. The frequency measurement function consists of two counters, that is, the SX and SR counters (see block diagram). The SX counter is used to count number of pulses (Sx) from the unknown input frequency. The SR counter is used to count the number of pulses (Sr) from a reference frequency source with frequency FREF. The frequency value (Fx) is calculated as: Fx = FREF x Sx / Sr The SX counter is implemented by a 24 bit up/down counter (23 bit + sign). The SR counter is implemented by a 24 bit up-counter. The SX and SR counters accumulates pulses during a measurement period. The measurement period can be determined in two different ways (user selectable): By a measurement interval timer. By the coincidence comparator function. With the first method is a measurement interval for each channel defined by the user in increments of 1 ms from 1 to 2.700 ms. By changing the measurement interval the user can select a suitable filter time (integration time) with respect to the application’s requirements. With the second method is the measure interval controlled by the coincidence function, that is, a measurement interval is started when a coincidence is detected. Next coincidence terminates the measurement interval, and starts a new measurement interval. At the end of each measurement period are the SX and SR registers is updated with the value of the SX and SR counters. The CPU reads the content in the SX and SR registers and calculates a frequency value. It is possible to synchronize frequency measurements between the two channels, that is, the measurement period from one of the channels is then used by both channels. A frequency sample condition can be specified by the user. When a sample condition is fulfilled is the value in the SX and SR registers “freezed”. The value in 436 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module the SX and SR registers will remain “freezed” until a freeze disable command is received from the controller. The pulse accumulation in the SX and SR counters continues during the time when the SX and SR registers is frozen The reference counter (SR) has a overflow detection function. The SR overflow will be activated if no incoming pulses has been detected during 4.3 s. When the CPU detects SR overflow, is the frequency value set to zero. A.37.0.8 Digital Output The digital output function can be configured in four different ways: 1. The digital output DO is activated when coincidence occur, and inactivated after a configurable pulse-length (1ms - 65535 ms). 2. The digital output DO is activated when DOVALUE =1, and inactivated after a configurable pulse-length (1ms - 65535 ms). The function is retriggable. 3. The digital output DO is activated when DOVALUE=1, and deactivated DOVALUE=0. 4. The digital output DO is activated when coincidence occur and the DOVALUE =1, and inactivated when DOVALUE=0. 1. DOTIME, 1ms - 65535 ms DO COINC 2. DOTIME, 1ms - 65535 ms DO DOVALUE=1 3. DO DOVALUE=1 4. DOVALUE=0 DO COINC and DOVALUE=1 DOVALUE=0 Figure A-118 Configuration of Digital Output Function 3BSE 020 924R4101 437 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications A.37.0.9 OSP Function The digital outputs will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received. The watchdog timer is retriggered every time the correct module address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state. The function in OSP state, and when reentering the operational state, will be different depending on how the DO function is configured (see Digital Output 1 - 4 above): 438 1. Function in OSP state: No more pulses will be activated as long as the module remains in OSP state. The DO pulse is always completed if the OSP-state is entered during an active DO pulse (this is, the pulse width is always in accordance with the DOTIME value). Function when reentering operational state: The coincidence function has to be enabled before normal DO function will start. 2. Function in OSP state: Same as in 1. above. Function when reentering operational state: A new DO-pulse will be started as soon as a modulebus frame with DOVALUE=1 is received. 3. Function in OSP state: The digital outputs are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use last good value sent. Function when reentering operational state: The outputs keeps the OSP value until a modulebus frame with a new DOVALUE value is received. 4. Same as 3. 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module A.37.0.10 LED Indicators For description about the LED-indicators with comments see Table A-76 Table A-76 Description of LED-Indicators Name Name Color PX1 PX2 Yellow Activated on each pulse on A or B input (>0.5s flash) UP1 UP2 Yellow Activated when count direction = up ST1 ST2 Yellow Activated on each pulse on ST input (>0.5s flash) DI1 DI2 Yellow Activated on each pulse on DI input (>0.5s flash) SY1 SY2 Yellow Activated on PSX counter sync. (>0.5s flash) DO1 DO2 Yellow Activated when DO is activated (>0.5s flash) TP1 TP2 Green Transducer power OK 3BSE 020 924R4101 Comments 439 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications A.37.0.11 Technical Data Table A-77 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Specifications DP820 Digital Pulse Counter Feature Number of channels 2 Power Supply voltage 24 V d.c. (12 to 32 V d.c.) Max non-destructive voltage on inputs A, B, ST or DI 30 V d.c. Maximum field cable length 200 m Cable type Characteristic impedance Shielded, twisted pair 100 (+/- 25%) ohm Configurable input filters Input A and B Unfiltered or 1 µs Input ST 1 µs or 1 ms Input DI 1 ms or 5 ms Max input frequency / Min pulse width, input A and B RS422/+5 V /13 mA - range Filter = unfiltered Pulse encoding = u/d or c/d Pulse encoding = quadrature 1.5 MHz / 333 ns 750 kHz / 667 ns Filter = 1 µs Pulse encoding = u/d or c/d Pulse encoding = quadrature 200 kHz / 2.5 µs 100 kHz / 5 µs 12 V - range (only TU830) 440 Filter = unfiltered Not allowed Filter = 1 µs Pulse encoding = u/d or c/d Pulse encoding = quadrature 200 kHz / 2.5 µs 100 kHz / 5 µs 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Table A-77 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Specifications (Continued) DP820 Digital Pulse Counter Feature 24 V - range (only TU830) Filter = unfiltered Not allowed Filter = 1 µs Pulse encoding = u/d or c/d Pulse encoding = quadrature 200 kHz / 2.5 µs 100 kHz / 5 µs Max. input frequency/Min. pulse width, input ST All voltage ranges Filter = 1 µs Filter = 1 ms 200 kHz / 2.5 µs 1 kHz / 500 µs Max. input frequency/Min. pulse width, input DI Filter = 1 µs 1 kHz / 500 µs Filter = 1 ms 0.1 kHz / 5 µs Input impedance, A, B and ST -inputs RS422/+5 V /13 mA - range 100 Ω(1) characteristic impedance 12 V - range (only TU830) 1 kΩ 24 V - range (only TU830) 2 kΩ Input impedance, DI - input 2.5 kΩ 3BSE 020 924R4101 441 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-77 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Specifications (Continued) DP820 Digital Pulse Counter Feature Input signal voltage range Input A, B, ST RS422/+5 V /13 mA - range “1” 2.5 V to 30 V “0” -30 V to 1.0 V 12 V - range (external resistance) (2) “1” 8 V to 30 V “0” 24 V - range (only TU830) -30 V to 2.0 V (3) “1” 15 V to 30 V “0” -30 V to 5.0 V Input DI “1” 15 V to 30 V “0” -30 V to 5.0 V Digital output, max. load current 0.5 A Digital output, max. short circuit current 2.4 A Digital output, max. leakage current 10 µA Digital output, max. output impedance 0.4 Ω Max. frequency measurement error Relative error [260/(MEASTIMEx in ms)] ppm Absolute error (Temperature drift included) [(260/(MEASTIMEx in ms)) +100] ppm DP820 current consumption, +5 V 120 mA Power dissipation 2.5 W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(4) 442 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Table A-77 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Specifications (Continued) DP820 Digital Pulse Counter Feature Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256, 512, 1024 ms Process voltage supervision 2 channels (1 per group) Isolation Individually isolated channels Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830 or TU833 MTU keying code CB Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.15 kg (0.33 lbs.) (1) Load 20 mA at 5 V, 8 mA at 2.5 V (2) With TU830 external resistor 1.8 kΩ, see Figure A-122. With TU810, TU814 external resistor ca 920 Ω, see Figure A-119. (3) With external resistor also TU810, TU814 External resistor 1.8 kΩ, see Figure A-119. (4) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules or S800L-modules mounted on vertical DIN rail. 3BSE 020 924R4101 443 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications A.37.0.12 Block Diagram DP820 FAULT RUN WARNING X1 (MODULE BUS COMM.) CLK- RS485 POS0-6 BLOCK COMPARE REGISTER COINC COINC COMP FREQUENCY COUNT SX SX DIR REGISTER COUNTER Fref SR SR REGISTER COUNTER CHANNEL2 (FPGA) OSP PX1 PX2 UP1 UP2 ST1 ST2 CPU DI2 (CONTROL OF MODULE SY1 SY2 BUS COMM.) DO1 DO2 (FREQUENCY TP1 TP2 CALC.) PULSE COUNT COUNT PULSE PULSE DIR REGISTER COUNTER COMPARE REGISTER COINC COINC COMP DI1 UL1 444 UL2 FREQUENCY COUNT SX SX DIR REGISTER COUNTER Fref SR SR REGISTER COUNTER A1 PULSE DECODER B1 ST1 DI1 DO1 A2 B2 PULSE DECO- ST2 DER DI2 DO2 TP2 L1+ X2 CA+_1 CA-_1 VA_11, VA_12 CB+_1 CB-_1 VB_11, VB_12 CST+_1 CST-_1 VST_11, VST_12 DI_1 DO_1 CA+_2 CA-_2 VA_21, VA_22 PROCESS CONNECTOR DAT+ CLK+ TP1 COUNT PULSE PULSE DIR REGISTER COUNTER MBI2 DAT- RS485 CHANNEL1 (FPGA) PULSE COUNT RESET MODULEBUS CONNECTOR +5VI +5V POWER-OK 0V CB+_2 CB-_2 VB_21, VB_22 CST+_2 CST-_2 VST_21, VST_22 DI_2 DO_2 L2+ 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module A.37.0.13 Process Connections Table A-78 DP820 Process Connections Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 Male Connector (1) TU830/TU833 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) 0 V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) Ch1, CA+ C1 3 C1 Ch1, CA- B1 16 C2 Ch1, VA_1 - - B1 Ch1, VA_2 - - B2 Ch1, Zp A1 - A1, A2 Ch1, CB+ C2 4 C3 Ch1, CB- B2 17 C4 Ch1, VB_1 - - B3 Ch1, VB_2 - - B4 Ch1, Zp A2 - A3, A4 Ch1, CST+ C3 5 C5 Ch1, CST- B3 18 C6 Ch1, VST_1 - - B5 Ch1, VST_2 - - B6 Ch1, Zp A3 - A5, A6 Ch1, DI C4 6 C7 Ch1, DO B4 19 C8 Ch1, L1+ - - B7 3BSE 020 924R4101 445 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-78 DP820 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection 446 TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 Male Connector (1) TU830/TU833 Terminal Ch1, L1+ - - B8 Ch1, Zp A4 - A7, A8 Ch2, CA+ C5 7 C9 Ch2, CA- B5 20 C10 Ch2, VA_1 - - B9 Ch2, VA_2 - - B10 Ch2, Zp A5 - A9, A10 Ch2, CB+ C6 8 C11 Ch2, CB- B6 21 C12 Ch2, VB_1 - - B11 Ch2, VB_2 - - B12 Ch2, Zp A6 - A11, A12 Ch2, CST+ C7 9 C13 Ch2, CST- B7 22 C14 Ch2, VST_1 - - B13 Ch2, VST_2 - - B14 Ch2, Zp A7 - A13, A14 Ch2, DI C8 10 C15 Ch2, DO B8 23 C16 Ch2, L2+ - - B15 Ch2, L2+ - - B16 Ch2, Zp A8 - A15, A16 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Table A-78 DP820 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection TU810 (or TU814) Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 Male Connector (1) TU830/TU833 Terminal +24 V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) 0 V d.c. (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 3BSE 020 924R4101 447 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-119 shows the process connections for DP820 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 MTU. PROCESS RS422 +24V 0V V+ 0V + A - L1+ L1+ L1C1 +24V 0V B1 A1 + B - + ST - V+ 0V A L1+ L1CA+_1 VA_11 DP820 CA-_1 VA_12 C2 CB+_1 VB_11 B2 A2 CB-_1 VB_12 C3 CST+_1 VST_11 B3 A3 CST-_1 VST_12 C4 DI_1 L1+ B4 DO_1 L1+ A4 * TU810 or TU814 * R C5 CA+_2 VA_21 B5 CA-_2 VA_22 A5 B R C6 CB+_2 VB_21 B6 CB-_2 VB_22 A6 ST R C7 CST+_2 VST_21 B7 CST-_2 VST_22 A7 V+ 0V * R = 0 Ω for 5 V R = ca 920 Ω for 12 V R = 1.8 kΩ for 24 V +24V 0V C8 DI_2 L2+ B8 DO_2 L2+ A8 L2+ L2+ L2- L2+ L2- EM Figure A-119 DP820 with TU810 or TU814 MTU Process Connections 448 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Figure A-120 shows the process connections for DP820 when installed on a TU812 MTU. PROCESS CONNECTION 1 1 14 2 15 3 14 2 15 3 L1+ L1CA+_1 VA_11 16 16 CA-_1 VA_12 4 4 CB+_1 VB_11 17 17 CB-_1 VB_12 5 5 CST+_1 VST_11 18 18 CST-_1 VST_12 6 6 DI_1 L1+ 19 19 DO_1 L1+ 7 7 CA+_2 VA_21 20 20 CA-_2 VA_22 8 8 CB+_2 VB_21 21 21 CB-_2 VB_22 9 9 CST+_2 VST_21 22 22 CST-_2 VST_22 10 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 23 11 24 12 25 13 DI_2 L2+ DO_2 L2+ L2+ L2- TU812 DP820 EM Figure A-120 DP820 with TU812 MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 449 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-121 shows the process connections for DP820 when installed on a TU830 MTU, and with RS422 transducer connected to channel 1 and +5 V transducer to channel 2. L1+ +24V L1+ L10V L1C1 B1 A1 C2 B2 A2 PROCESS RS422 + A - L1+ L1CA+_1 VA_11 + ST - V+ 0V A CB+_1 VB_11 CB-_1 VB_12 CST+_1 VST_11 CST-_1 VST_12 C7 B7 A7 C8 B8 A8 DI_1 L1+ C9 B9 A9 C10 B10 A10 CA+_2 VA_21 DO_1 L1+ CA-_2 VA_22 CB+_2 VB_21 C11 B11 A11 C12 B12 A12 C13 B13 A13 C14 B14 A14 B ST V+ 0V +24V 0V C15 B15 A15 C16 B16 A16 L2+ L2+ L2L2- DP820 CA-_1 VA_12 C3 B3 A3 C4 B4 A4 C5 B5 A5 C6 B6 A6 + B - 5V TU830/TU833 6.3A Fuse CB-_2 VB_22 CST+_2 VST_21 CST-_2 VST_22 DI_2 L2+ DO_2 L2+ 6.3A Fuse L2+ L2- EM Figure A-121 DP820 with TU830 MTU Process Connections and with Transducer Connections 450 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Figure A-122 shows the process connections for DP820 when installed on a TU830 MTU, and with +24 V transducer connected to channel 1 and +12 V transducer to channel 2. PROCESS L1+ +24V L1+ L1L10V C1 B1 A1 C2 B2 A2 24V A CB+_1 VB_11 C5 B5 A5 C6 B6 A6 CST+_1 VST_11 C7 B7 A7 C8 B8 A8 DI_1 L1+ CA+_2 VA_21 1.8k C9 B9 A9 C10 B10 A10 CB+_2 VB_21 1.8k C11 B11 A11 C12 B12 A12 CST+_2 VST_21 1.8k C13 B13 A13 C14 B14 A14 C15 B15 A15 C16 B16 A16 L2+ L2+ L2L2- DI_2 L2+ ST 12V A B ST 0V +24V 0V DP820 CA-_1 VA_12 C3 B3 A3 C4 B4 A4 B V+ TU830/TU833 L1+ L1CA+_1 VA_11 6.3A Fuse CB-_1 VB_12 CST-_1 VST_12 DO_1 L1+ CA-_2 VA_22 CB-_2 VB_22 CST-_2 VST_22 DO_2 L2+ 6.3A Fuse L2+ L2- EM Figure A-122 DP820 with TU830 MTU Process Connections and Transducer Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 451 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications A.38 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module A.38.0.1 Features • 8 channels • The modules can be used in both single and redundant applications. • Interface for NAMUR, 12 V and 24 V transducer signal levels. • Each channel can be configured for pulse count or frequency measurement. • The inputs can also be read as DI signals. • Pulse count by accumulation in a 16 bit counter. • Frequency (speed) measurement 0.5 Hz - 20 kHz. • Advanced on-board diagnostics. F R W P 1Px 1F 2Px 2F 3Px 3F 4Px 4F 5Px 5F 6Px 6F • EMC protection • DIN rail mounting. • Also in a G3 compliant version. 7Px 7F 8Px 8F DP840 Pulse/Freq A.38.0.2 Description The DP840 module consists of 8 identical independent channels. Each channel can be used for pulse count or frequency (speed) measurement. The inputs can also be read as DI signals. Each channel has a configurable input filter. The module perform self-diagnostics cyclically. Module diagnostics include among other things: 452 • Transmitter power supply error, power supply error (process side), short circuit and open wire. These errors will be reported as External Channel Error. • Counter supervision. This will be reported as Internal Channel Error. 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module • Error in data/address bus supervision will be reported as Module Error. • Synchronization error will be reported as Module Warning. The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK comes from the ModuleBus master or controller after power is applied. Four LED indicate module status Fault (red), Run (green), Warning (yellow) and Primary (yellow). Two LED per channel indicate input state (Px yellow) and channel fault (F red). The Primary LED is on if the module is primary in a redundant pair. The Px LED is on if pulse (high signal) on the input and F LED is on if the channel is faulty. A.38.0.3 Transducer Connection Each channel has inputs for 12 V, 24 V and NAMUR input signals and a configurable transducer power output. The configurable transducer power is set on module (not channel vise) for all channels to either NAMUR, 12 V or 24V. The module distribute the external transmitter supply to each channel. This adds a simple connection to distribute the supply to 2 or 3-wire transmitters. The transmitter power is supervised and current limited. The inputs can be supervised for short circuit and open wire. The supervision can be enabled/disabled per module (not channel vise). The 2-wire transducers should be connected by shielded twisted pair cable. The MTU have to be chosen with consideration to function and signal range, see Table A-79. Type of sensor to be used is defined by parameters. The parameter set 3BSE 020 924R4101 453 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications the sensor power output for NAMUR sensors to 8.2 V, for 12 V sensors to 12 V and for 24 V sensors to 24 V. Table A-79 Function and Signal Range with Different MTUs Redundant configuration MTU type Namur sensors 12 V sensors 24 V sensors Single configuration Namur sensors TU810/TU812/TU814 X TU830 X TU842/TU843 TU844/TU845 X X X X X 12 V sensors 24 V sensors X X X The parameter for internal and external shunt shall only be set to External when DP840 is used with TU844 or TU845. A.38.0.4 Pulse Count Measurement Pulse count is done by pulse accumulation in a 16 bit pulse counter. The pulse counter value is continuously loaded into the pulse register. The value of the pulse register (that is, actual pulse count value) is read by the CPU, and transferred to the ModuleBus master. A.38.0.5 Frequency (speed) Measurement. The frequency measurement function consists of two counters, that is, the SX and SR counters. The SX counter is used to count number of pulses (Sx) from the unknown input frequency. The SR counter is used to count the number of pulses (Sr) from a reference frequency source with frequency FREF. The frequency value (Fx) is calculated as: Fx = FREF x Sx / Sr The SX counter is implemented by a 12 bit up-counter. The SR counter is implemented by a 20 bit up-counter. 454 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module The SX and SR counters accumulates pulses during a measurement period. The measurement interval for each channel defined by the user to 10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms or 100 ms. By changing the measurement interval the user can select a suitable filter time (integration time) with respect to the application’s requirements. At the end of each measurement period are the SX and SR registers is updated with the value of the SX and SR counters. The CPU reads the content in the SX and SR registers and calculates a frequency value. The reference counter (SR) has a overflow detection function. The SR overflow will be activated if no incoming pulses has been detected during 3 s. When the CPU detects SR overflow, is the frequency value set to zero. A.38.0.6 Redundant Applications In a redundant application one module is set to primary and one to backup. The primary module synchronize the counter on the backup module every 10 seconds. After start-up it will take about 30 s before the backup has been synchronized. 3BSE 020 924R4101 455 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications A.38.0.7 Technical Data Table A-80 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Specifications DP840 Digital Pulse Counter Feature Number of channels 8 Power Supply voltage 24 V d.c. (19.2 to 30 V d.c.) Max non-destructive voltage on inputs 30 V d.c. Maximum field cable length 200 m Cable type Twisted pair(1) Frequency range 10 µs input filter: 0.5 Hz - 20 kHz 100 µs input filter(2): 0.5 Hz - 5 kHz 800 µs input filter(2): 0.5 Hz - 625 Hz 6400 µs input filter(2): 0.5 Hz - 78 Hz Min pulse width (“1” or “0”) 10 µs input filter: 10 µs 100 µs input filter: 100 µs 800 µs input filter: 800 µs 6400 µs input filter: 6400 µs Input thresholds, NAMUR Open wire: IIN< 0.1 mA Contact open: 0.1 mA < IIN< 1.6 mA Contact closed: 1.6 mA < IIN< 6.0 mA Short circuit: IIN > 6.0 mA Input thresholds, 12V / 24 V Open wire: VIN < 0.1 V Contact open: 0.1 V < VIN < 1.6 V Contact closed: 1.6 V < VIN < 6.0 V Short circuit: VIN > 6.0 V With external resistor for cable supervision Input threshold, 12 V No resistors for cable supervision Input threshold, 24 V No resistors for cable supervision 456 Contact open: VIN < 5.0 V Contact closed: VIN > 5.0 V Contact open: VIN < 8.3 V Contact closed: VIN> 8.3 V 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Table A-80 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Specifications (Continued) DP840 Digital Pulse Counter Feature Maximum pulse frequency 20 kHz(3) Hysteresis (ION - IOFF) / Input threshold: >20% or (VON - VOFF) / Input threshold: >20% Input impedance NAMUR: 1 kΩ, +/-10% 12 V range: 2.8 kΩ, +/-10% 24 V range: 4.0 kΩ, +/-10% Sensor supply voltage level (max. 20 mA/channel) NAMUR: 8.2 V, +/-10% 12 V range: 12 V +/-10% 24 V range: VL+ - (3.0 +/-1.0) V Sensor supply current limit All ranges: <40 mA (single) <80 mA (redundant) Max. measurement error, frequency measurement Max relative error(4): PRIT = 10 ms: 300 ppm PRIT = 20 ms: 150 ppm PRIT = 50 ms: 60 ppm PRIT = 100 ms: 30 ppm Max error in crystal oscillator: 120 ppm + 5 ppm/year Max absolute error = rel. error + oscillator error (PRIT = 10 ms, age < 16 year): 500 ppm (= 0.05%) Min. sampling interval when used in pulse count mode fMAX - Maximum expected input frequency: 216 x (1/fMAX) fMAX = 20 kHz: 3.27 s Synchronization accuracy +/-1 pulse DP840 current consumption, +5 V 115 mA 3BSE 020 924R4101 457 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-80 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Specifications (Continued) DP840 Digital Pulse Counter Feature 458 External power supply consumption (Internal load + external load) NAMUR = 56 + 0.5 x external load [mA] 12 V = 89 + 0.7 x external load [mA] 24 V = 97 + external load [mA] External power supply 24 V d.c. (19.2 to 30 V d.c.) Power dissipation 4W Maximum ambient temperature 55/40°C (131/104°F)(5) Process voltage supervision 1 channel Module termination units, single applications TU810, TU812, TU814, TU830, TU833 Module termination units, redundant applications TU842/TU843 or TU844/TU845 MTU keying code CF Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 G3 compliant version According to ISA-S71.04. Marked with “Z” in the type designation. Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 45 mm (1.77”) Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Table A-80 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Specifications (Continued) Feature DP840 Digital Pulse Counter Height 119 mm (4.7”) Weight 0.15 kg (0.33 lbs) (1) (2) (3) (4) Shielded cables for 2-wire transmitters Symmetric input pulse (i.e. 50% duty cycle) Input channel pulse supervision does not work with pulse frequency <2 Hz Relative error - Max difference in frequency measurement between two channels on the same module connected to the same source. (5) 40°C (104°F) applies to compact MTUs with I/O-modules. 3BSE 020 924R4101 459 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications A.38.0.8 Block Diagram DP840 L+ 5VP Fault (F) Sensor Power Run (R) Warning (W) SP 24V Primary (P) 1Px 1F Ch 1 12V NAMUR +5V FPGA 8Px 8F ModuleBus Int Shunt CLK OW SC det SP 24V Ch 8 Data MCU Block 12V NAMUR SYNC SYNC DATA 460 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module A.38.0.9 Process Connections Table A-81 DP840 Process Connections Process Connection TU810 or TU814 Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 Male Connector(1) TU830 or TU833 Terminal TU842 or TU843 Terminal TU844 or TU845 Terminal +24 V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ (2) L1+ (2) 0 V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- (2) L1- (2) I1, NAMUR C1 3 C1 C1 B2 U1 - - B1 B1 B1 ZP - - A1 A1 A1 I1, 24 V B1 16 C2 C2 - I1, 12 V - - B2 B2 - ZP A1 - A2 A2 A2 I2, NAMUR C2 4 C3 C3 B4 U2 - - B3 B3 B3 ZP - - A3 A3 A3 I2, 24 V B2 17 C4 C4 - I2, 12 V - - B4 B4 - ZP A2 - A4 A4 A4 I3, NAMUR C3 5 C5 C5 B6 U3 - - B5 B5 B5 ZP - - A5 A5 A5 I3, 24 V B3 18 C6 C6 - I3, 12 V - - B6 B6 - ZP A3 - A6 A6 A6 3BSE 020 924R4101 461 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications Table A-81 DP840 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection TU810 or TU814 Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 Male Connector(1) TU830 or TU833 Terminal TU842 or TU843 Terminal TU844 or TU845 Terminal I4, NAMUR C4 6 C7 C7 B8 U4 - - B7 B7 B7 ZP - - A7 A7 A7 I4, 24 V B4 19 C8 C8 - I4, 12 V - - B8 B8 - ZP A4 - A8 A8 A8 I5, NAMUR C5 7 C9 C9 B10 U5 - - B9 B9 B9 ZP - - A9 A9 A9 I5, 24 V B5 20 C10 C10 - I5, 12 V - - B10 B10 - ZP A5 - A10 A10 A10 I6, NAMUR C6 8 C11 C11 B12 U6 - - B11 B11 B11 ZP - - A11 A11 A11 I6, 24 V B6 21 C12 C12 - I6, 12 V - - B12 B12 - ZP A6 - A12 A12 A12 I7, NAMUR C7 9 C13 C13 B14 U7 - - B13 B13 B13 ZP - - A13 A13 A13 462 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Table A-81 DP840 Process Connections (Continued) Process Connection TU810 or TU814 Terminal TU812 D-Sub 25 Male Connector(1) TU830 or TU833 Terminal TU842 or TU843 Terminal TU844 or TU845 Terminal I7, 24 V B7 22 C14 C14 - I7, 12 V - - B14 B14 - ZP A7 - A14 A14 A14 I8, NAMUR C8 10 C15 C15 B16 U8 - - B15 B15 B15 ZP - - A15 A15 A15 I8, 24 V B8 23 C16 C16 - I8, 12 V - - B16 B16 - ZP A8 - A16 A16 A16 L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ (2) L2+ (2) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (2) L2- (2) (1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM. 3BSE 020 924R4101 463 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-123 shows the process connections for DP840 when installed on a TU810 or TU814 MTU. PROCESS 24 V Supply 24 V sensor 2-wire TU810/TU814 L1+ L1+ L1C1 B1 A1 C2 B2 A2 C3 B3 24 V sensor 3-wire A3 C4 B4 10 kΩ 33 kΩ SC/OW supervision A4 C5 B5 NAMUR sensor A5 C6 B6 A6 C7 B7 8.2 V Supply Channel supervision can be enabled/disabled for the module (not channel vice). A7 C8 B8 A8 L2+ L2+ L2- DP840 I1, NAMUR U1 ZP I1, 24 V I1, 12 V ZP I2, NAMUR U2 ZP I2, 24 V I2, 12 V ZP I3, NAMUR U3 ZP I3, 24 V I3, 12 V ZP I4, NAMUR U4 ZP I4, 24 V I4, 12 V ZP I5, NAMUR U5 ZP I5, 24 V I5, 12 V ZP I6, NAMUR U6 ZP I6, 24 V I6, 12 V ZP I7, NAMUR U7 ZP I7, 24 V I7, 12 V ZP I8, NAMUR U8 ZP I8, 24 V I8, 12 V ZP EM Figure A-123 DP840 with TU810 or TU814 MTU Process Connections 464 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Figure A-124 shows the process connections for DP840 when installed on a TU812 MTU. PROCESS 24 V Supply 24 V sensor 2-wire TU812 1 14 2, 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 24 V sensor 3-wire 6 19 10 kΩ 33 kΩ SC/OW supervision 7 20 NAMUR sensor 8 21 9 22 8.2 V Supply Channel supervision can be enabled/disabled for the module (not channel vice). 10 23 DP840 I1, NAMUR U1 ZP I1, 24 V I1, 12 V ZP I2, NAMUR U2 ZP I2, 24 V I2, 12 V ZP I3, NAMUR U3 ZP I3, 24 V I3, 12 V ZP I4, NAMUR U4 ZP I4, 24 V I4, 12 V ZP I5, NAMUR U5 ZP I5, 24 V I5, 12 V ZP I6, NAMUR U6 ZP I6, 24 V I6, 12 V ZP I7, NAMUR U7 ZP I7, 24 V I7, 12 V ZP I8, NAMUR U8 ZP I8, 24 V I8, 12 V ZP 11 24 12, 25 13 EM Figure A-124 DP840 with TU812 MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 465 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-125 shows the process connections for DP840 when installed on a TU830 MTU. PROCESS 24 V Supply 24 V sensor 2-wire 24 V sensor 3-wire 1) 12 V sensor 2-wire 1) NAMUR sensor 1) 4.7 kΩ SC/OW 2) supervision 12 V 15 kΩ 1) 10 kΩ SC/OW 2) supervision 33 kΩ 1) The figure shows how to connect NAMUR, 12V, 24V sensors and voltage-free contact with, or without, short circuit and open wire detection. But notice that only one type of sensor power supply can be distributed from the module at time. The sensor power can be set to either NAMUR, 12 V or 24 V. 2) Notice that the NAMUR input connection always must be used for 12V and 24V signal range when external resistors are used to achieve short circuit/ open wire supervision. Channel supervision can be enabled/disabled for the module (not channel vice). 24 V L1+ TU830/TU833 L1+ L1L1C1 B1 A1 C2 B2 A2 C3 B3 A3 C4 B4 A4 C5 B5 A5 C6 B6 A6 C7 B7 A7 C8 B8 A8 C9 B9 A9 C10 B10 A10 C11 B11 A11 C12 B12 A12 C13 B13 A13 C14 B14 A14 C15 B15 A15 C16 B16 A16 L2+ L2+ L2L2- DP840 I1, NAMUR U1 ZP I1, 24 V I1, 12 V ZP I2, NAMUR U2 ZP I2, 24 V I2, 12 V ZP I3, NAMUR U3 ZP I3, 24 V I3, 12 V ZP I4, NAMUR U4 ZP I4, 24 V I4, 12 V ZP I5, NAMUR U5 ZP I5, 24 V I5, 12 V ZP I6, NAMUR U6 ZP I6, 24 V I6, 12 V ZP I7, NAMUR U7 ZP I7, 24 V I7, 12 V ZP I8, NAMUR U8 ZP I8, 24 V I8, 12 V ZP EM Figure A-125 DP840 with TU830 MTU Process Connections 466 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Figure A-126 shows the process connections for DP840 when installed on a TU842 or TU843 MTU. PROCESS 24 V Supply 24 V sensor 2-wire 24 V sensor 3-wire 1) 12 V sensor 2-wire 1) The figure shows how to connect NAMUR, 12V, 24V sensors and voltage-free contact. But notice that only one type of sensor power supply can be distributed from the module at time. The sensor power supply can be set to either NAMUR, 12 V or 24 V. L1+ L1+ L1L1C1 B1 A1,A2 C2 B2 C3 B3 A3,A4 C4 B4 C5 B5 A5,A6 C6 B6 C7 B7 A7,A8 C8 B8 C9 B9 A9,A10 C10 B10 C11 B11 A11,A12 C12 B12 C13 B13 A13,A14 C14 B14 C15 B15 A15,A16 C16 B16 L2+ L2+ L2L2- TU842/TU843 DP840 I1, NAMUR U1 ZP I1, 24 V I1, 12 V I2, NAMUR U2 ZP I2, 24 V I2, 12 V I3, NAMUR U3 ZP I3, 24 V I3, 12 V I4, NAMUR U4 ZP I4, 24 V I4, 12 V I5, NAMUR U5 ZP I5, 24 V I5, 12 V I6, NAMUR U6 ZP I6, 24 V I6, 12 V I7, NAMUR U7 ZP I7, 24 V I7, 12 V I8, NAMUR U8 ZP I8, 24 V I8, 12 V EM DP840 I1, NAMUR U1 ZP I1, 24 V I1, 12 V I8, NAMUR U8 ZP I8, 24 V I8, 12 V EM Figure A-126 DP840 with TU842 or TU843 MTU Process Connections 3BSE 020 924R4101 467 DP840 Incremental Pulse Counter Module Appendix A Specifications Figure A-127 shows the process connections for DP840 when installed on a TU844 or TU845 MTU. PROCESS 24 V Supply NAMUR sensor 4.7 kΩ 1) 15 kΩ 10 kΩ 1) 33 kΩ 12 V SC/OW supervision 24V SC/OW supervision 1) The figure shows how to connect NAMUR, voltage-free contact with short circuit and open wire detection. But notice that only one type of sensor power supply can be distributed from the module at time. The sensor power supply can be set to either NAMUR, 12 V or 24 V. Channel supervision can be enabled/disabled for the module (not channel vice). TU844 or TU845 L1+ L1+ L1L1Shunt sticks B1 B2 A1,A2 B3 B4 A3,A4 B5 B6 A5,A6 B7 B8 A7,A8 B9 B10 A9,A10 B11 B12 A11,A12 B13 B14 A13,A14 B15 B16 A15,A16 L2+ L2+ L2L2- DP840 U1 I1, NAMUR ZP U2 I2, NAMUR ZP U3 I3, NAMUR ZP U4 I4, NAMUR ZP U5 I5, NAMUR ZP U6 I6, NAMUR ZP U7 I7, NAMUR ZP U8 I8, NAMUR ZP EM DP840 U1 I1, NAMUR ZP U8 I8, NAMUR ZP EM Figure A-127 DP840 with TU844 or TU845 MTU Process Connections 468 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU805 Terminal Unit A.39 TU805 Terminal Unit A.39.0.1 Features • Enables 2- and 3-wire connections of process signals. • Direct mounting on the I/O module. • Requires no extra space. A.39.0.2 Description The TU805 is a 16 channel 50 V terminal unit for the S800L I/O modules DI801 and DO801. The Terminal Unit is a passive unit for distribution of external process power. The module has 2 x 2 connections for external power and 2 x 16 connections for distribution. 3BSE 020 924R4101 469 TU805 Terminal Unit Appendix A Specifications A.39.0.3 Technical Data Table A-82 TU805 Compact MTU Specifications Item Process Connections Value 18 2 x 2 Process power terminals 2 x 16 Process power distribution terminals Rated maximum continuous current per 1 A terminal Acceptable Wire Sizes Solid: 0.2 - 1.5 mm2 Stranded: 0.2 - 1.5 mm2, 24- 16 AWG Recommended torque 0.3 Nm 470 Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 85 mm (3.35”) Depth 39 mm (1.54”) including connector, 30 mm (1.18”) installed Height 31,5 mm (1.24”) Weight 0.05 kg (0.11 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU805 Terminal Unit A.39.0.4 Block Diagram TU805 _ TU805 L + L 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 24 V L+ L- 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 L L 3BSE 020 924R4101 471 TU810 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications A.40 TU810 Compact MTU Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules • Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module • Latching device to DIN rail for grounding • DIN rail mounting. • Also in a G3 compliant version. A E F • D Up to 16 channels of field signals and process power connections D • A Row C L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 B Compact installation of I/O modules using one-wire connections C • B 50 Volt applications - use with AI810, AI820, AI830, AI835, AI845, AO810, AO820, AO845, DI810, DI811, DI814, DI830, DI831, DI840, DI880, DI885, DO810, DO814, DO815, DO840, DO880, DP820 and DP840 I/O modules C • E F A.40.0.1 Features 7 C8 L2+ A.40.0.2 Description The TU810 is a 16 channel 50 V compact module termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. 472 Row B Row A L1+ B1 2 L1- A1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 B8 L2+ 7 A8 L2- 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU810 Compact MTU The TU810 MTU can have up to 16 I/O channels and two process voltage connections. The maximum rated voltage is 50 V and maximum rated current is 2A per channel. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. The process signal terminals are divided into 2 equal and individually isolated groups. Each group consists of 8 I/O connections, one process voltage connection and 5 common L- connections. The top part of the MTU can be removed to replace the termination board even with an operational system. Such a need can be caused by a damaged terminal screw. 3BSE 020 924R4101 473 TU810 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications A.40.0.3 Technical Data Table A-83 TU810 Compact MTU Specifications Item Process Connections Value 30 up to 16 I/O channels 2 x 2 Process power terminals 5 x 2 Process power 0 V Rated maximum continuous current per 2 A I/O channel Rated maximum continuous current per 5 A process voltage connection (L+) ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution Maximum 24 V current distribution 1.5 A 1.5 A Acceptable Wire Sizes Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm2 Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG Recommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm 474 Mechanical Keys (2) 36 different combinations I/O Module Lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 G3 compliant version According to ISA-S71.04. Marked with “Z” in the type designation. Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 64 mm (2.52”) including connector, 58.5 mm (2.3”) edge to edge installed 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU810 Compact MTU Table A-83 TU810 Compact MTU Specifications (Continued) Item Value Depth 64 mm (2.52”) including terminals Height 170 mm (6.7”) including latch Weight 0.17 kg (0.37 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 475 TU810 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications A.40.0.4 Connections Table A-84 TU810 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) Position Row B Row C 1 L1- L1+ L1+ 2 A1 (L1-) B1 C1 3 2 (L1-) 2 2 4 3 (L1-) 3 3 5 4 (L1-) 4 4 6 5 (L2-) 5 5 7 6 (L2-) 6 6 8 7 (L2-) 7 7 9 A8 (L2-) B8 C8 L2- L2+ L2+ 10 476 Row A 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU810 Compact MTU A.40.0.5 Block Diagram TU810 TU810 C ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male A B I/O module UP1 UP1 EM ZP1 I1 ZP1 I1 1 I 21 I2 BLOCK ZP11 I3 I4 2 ZP12 Module Process Connector ModuleBus Connector Metral Female 3 / / 3 2 / 2 / 7 / I3 2 I4 I5 I5 3 I6 3 I6 I7 I8 4 I8 I9 I 10 I9 5 I 11 I 12 I 11 6 I 13 I 14 I 13 7 I 15 I 15 8 I16 ZP1 3 I7 4 ZP1 4 I 10 5 ZP2 5 I 12 6 ZP2 6 I 14 7 ZP2 7 I 16 8 UP2 +5V 0V +24V, 0V24 POS 0 - 6 POWOK DAT, DAT-N ZP2 8 ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female 3BSE 020 924R4101 ZP2 UP2 ZP2 EM 477 TU811 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications A.41 TU811 Compact MTU A.41.0.1 Features 250 Volt applications - use with DI820, DI821, DO820, and DO821 I/O modules • Compact installation of I/O modules • Up to 8 isolated channels of field signals • Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules • Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module • Latching device to DIN rail for grounding • DIN rail mounting. • Also in a G3 compliant version. E F • D A E F B C D A B C A.41.0.2 Description The TU811 is a 8 channel 250 V compact module termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. Row C Row B C 2 B1 A1 2 4 3 6 5 3 4 C8 7 5 6 B 7 A8 Row A The TU811 MTU can have up to 8 I/O channels. The maximum rated voltage is 250 V and maximum rated current is 3 A per channel. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. 478 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU811 Compact MTU The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. The process signal terminals has 8 individually isolated I/O channels. Each channel has two connections. The TU811 is primarily intended for modules with individually isolated channels. The top part of the MTU can be removed to replace the termination board even with an operational system. Such a need can be caused by a damaged terminal screw. 3BSE 020 924R4101 479 TU811 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications A.41.0.3 Technical Data Table A-85 TU811 Compact MTU Specifications Item Process connections Value 16 up to 8 I/O channels (2 terminals per channel) Rated maximum continuous current per 3 A I/O channel ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution Maximum 24 V current distribution 1.5 A 1.5 A Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm2 Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG Recommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm 480 Mechanical keys (2) 36 different combinations I/O Module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 G3 compliant version According to ISA-S71.04. Marked with “Z” in the type designation. Rated insulation voltage 250 V Dielectric test voltage 2000 V a.c. Width 64 mm (2.52”) including connector, 58.5 mm (2.3”) edge to edge installed Depth 64 mm (2.52”), including terminals Height 170 mm (6.7”) including latch Weight 0.17 kg (0.37 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU811 Compact MTU A.41.0.4 Connections Table A-86 TU811 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) Position (1) Row A Row B Row C 1 NC NC NC 2 A1 B1 NC 3 2 NC C2 4 3 3 NC 5 4 NC 4 6 5 5 NC 7 6 NC 6 8 7 7 NC 9 A8 NC C8 10 NC NC NC (1) All positions marked NC are not mounted in the connector. 3BSE 020 924R4101 481 TU811 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications A.41.0.5 Block Diagram TU811 TU811 ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male C I/O module B S1 1 I 1.1 I 1.2 EM I 2.1 S2 1 S3 2 I 2.2 S4 2 S5 3 I 3.2 Module Process Connector ModuleBus Connector Metral Female BLOCK I 3.1 I 4.1 S6 3 S7 4 I 4.2 S8 4 S9 5 I 5.1 S10 5 I 5.2 I 6.1 S11 6 I 6.2 S12 6 S13 7 I 7.1 2 I 8.1 I 8.2 +5V 0V +24V, 0V24 S14 7 3 / / 3 / / 7 / 2 I 7.2 POS 0 - 6 POWOK DAT, DAT-N A S15 8 S16 8 EM ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female 482 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU812 Compact MTU A.42 TU812 Compact MTU 50 Volt applications - use with AI810, AI820, AI830, AI835, AI845, AO810, AO820, AO845, DI810, DI811, DI814, DI830, DI831, DI840, DI880, DI885, DO810, DO814, DO840, DO880, DP820 and DP840 I/O modules • Compact installation of I/O modules using D-sub connector. • Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules • Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module D • E F A.42.0.1 Features A E F D DIN rail mounting. A B • C Latching device to DIN rail for grounding B C • A.42.0.2 Description The TU812 is a 50 V compact module termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O system with 16 signal connections. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. The TU812 MTU can have up to 16 I/O signals. The maximum rated voltage is 50 V and maximum rated current is 2A per channel. The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. 3BSE 020 924R4101 483 TU812 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. The process signal connector is a D-Sub 25 pin (male). The top part of the MTU can be removed to replace the termination board even with an operational system. Such a need can be caused by a damaged terminal screw. 484 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU812 Compact MTU A.42.0.3 Technical Data Table A-87 TU812 Compact MTU Specifications Item Process connections Value 25 pin (male) D-Sub connector up to 16 I/O signals Rated maximum continuous current per 2 A I/O channel ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution Maximum 24 V current distribution 1.5 A 1.5 A Mechanical keys (2) 36 different combinations I/O Module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 64 mm (2.52”) including connector, 58.5 mm (2.3”) edge to edge installed Depth 64 mm (2.52”), including terminals Height 170 mm (6.7”) including latch Weight 0.17 kg (0.37 lbs.) Rated max. continuos current per process voltage connection Up/Zp. 5A 3BSE 020 924R4101 485 TU812 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications A.42.0.4 Connections Table A-88 TU812 Process Connection D-Sub Connector (X1) 486 Position Row A 1 UP1 2 ZP1 3 S1 4 S3 5 S5 6 S7 7 S9 8 S11 9 S13 10 S15 11 UP2 12 ZP2 13 EM 14 UP1 15 ZP1 16 S2 17 S4 18 S6 19 S8 20 S10 21 S12 22 S14 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU812 Compact MTU Table A-88 TU812 Process Connection D-Sub Connector (X1) (Continued) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Position Row A 23 S16 24 UP2 25 ZP2 487 TU812 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications A.42.0.5 Block Diagram TU812 TU812 ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male I/O module UP1 UP1 1 UP1 14 EM ZP1 3 / / 3 2 / Module Process Connector Ch1 S1 3 Ch2 S2 16 Ch3 S3 4 Ch4 S4 17 Ch5 S5 5 Ch6 S6 18 Ch7 S7 6 Ch8 S8 19 Ch9 S9 7 Ch10 S10 20 Ch11 S11 8 Ch12 S12 21 Ch13 S13 9 Ch14 S14 22 Ch15 S15 10 Ch16 S16 23 UP2 UP2 11 ZP2 +5V 0V / 2 ModuleBus Connector Metral Female BLOCK ZP1 15 UP2 24 +24V, 0V24 7 / POS 0 - 6 POWOK DAT, DAT-N ZP1 2 ZP2 12 ZP2 25 EM EM 13 ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female 488 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU813 Compact MTU A.43 TU813 Compact MTU A.43.0.1 Features • 250 Volt applications - use with DI820, DI821, DI825, DO820, DO821 and AI825 I/O modules • Compact installation of I/O modules • Up to 8 isolated channels of field signal connections with crimped snap-in connectors. • Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules • Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module • Latching device to DIN rail for grounding • DIN rail mounting. A.43.0.2 Description The TU813 is a 8 channel 250 V compact module termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The TU813 has three rows of crimp snapin connectors for field signals and process power connections. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. The maximum rated voltage is 250 V and maximum rated current is 3 A per channel. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. 3BSE 020 924R4101 489 TU813 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the I/O module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the I/O module in its init state until it is locked in its position. The process signal terminals has 8 individually isolated I/O channels. Each channel has two connections. The TU813 is primarily intended for modules with individually isolated channels. The top part of the MTU can be removed to replace the termination board even with an operational system. Such a need can be caused by a damaged terminal. Crimp terminals are provided for connection to field wiring and insertion into the 3 snap-on connectors. Once the contacts are correctly placed in the connectors, the cable can be easily inserted and removed without future wiring errors. This assembly function can be performed before the cables are delivered to the site. Crimp snap in connectors are not included in TU813. To provide protection of Hazardous Voltage all plugs must be connected. 490 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU813 Compact MTU A.43.0.3 Technical Data Table A-89 TU813 Compact MTU Specifications Item Process connections Value 16 up to 8 I/O channels (2 terminals per channel) Rated maximum continuous current per 3 A I/O channel ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution Maximum 24 V current distribution 1.5 A 1.5 A Stranded: 0.2 - 0.5 mm2, 24 - 20 AWG Acceptable wire sizes 0.5 - 1.0 mm2, 20 - 18 AWG attached to crimped snap-in connectors (1) 1.5 - 2.5 mm2, 16 - 14 AWG (3) Mechanical keys (2) 36 different combinations I/O Module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 250 V Insulation test voltage Channel to EM 2300 V a.c. Channel to Channel 1350 V a.c. 24 V modulebus to EM 500 V a.c. Width 64 mm (2.52”) including connector, 58.5 mm (2.3”) edge to edge installed Depth 64 mm (2.52”), including terminals Height 170 mm (6.7”) including latch Weight 0.17 kg (0.37 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 491 TU813 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications (1) Supplied by Phoenix Contact: Cable plug Crimp snap in connector: Crimping tool: Remove insulation tool: 492 1808890 1879531 3190564 3190551 1204038 1204384 MSTBC 2.5/8/STZF-5.08 MSTBC-MT 0.2 -0.5 or MSTBC-MT 0.5-1.0 or MSTBC-MT 1.5-2.5 CRIMPFOX MT 2.5 QUICK WIREFOX 6 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU813 Compact MTU A.43.0.4 Connections Table A-90 TU813 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) Position (1) Row A Row B Row C 1 NC NC NC 2 A1 B1 NC 3 2 NC C2 4 3 3 NC 5 4 NC 4 6 5 5 NC 7 6 NC 6 8 7 7 NC 9 A8 NC C8 10 NC NC NC FE (1) All positions marked NC are not mounted in the connector. D FE B C A D B C A Contact crimping tool for installation is not supplied. Phoenix part - CRIMPFOX MT2.5 Connection is made with removable contacts crimped to the wires 3BSE 020 924R4101 493 TU813 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications A.43.0.5 Block Diagram TU813 TU813 ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male C I/O module B S1 1 I 1.1 I 1.2 EM I 2.1 S2 1 S3 2 I 2.2 S4 2 S5 3 I 3.2 Module Process Connector ModuleBus Connector Metral Female BLOCK I 3.1 I 4.1 S6 3 S7 4 I 4.2 S8 4 S9 5 I 5.1 S10 5 I 5.2 I 6.1 S11 6 I 6.2 S12 6 S13 7 I 7.1 2 I 8.1 I 8.2 +5V 0V +24V, 0V24 S14 7 3 / / 3 / / 7 / 2 I 7.2 POS 0 - 6 POWOK DAT, DAT-N A S15 8 S16 8 EM ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female 494 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU814 Compact MTU A.44 TU814 Compact MTU Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules • Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module • Latching device to DIN rail for grounding • DIN rail mounting. A E F • D Up to 16 channels of field signals and process power connections with crimped snap-in connectors D • A B Compact installation of I/O modules using one-wire connections C • B 50 Volt applications - use with AI810, AI820, AI830, AI835, AI845, AO810, AO820, AO845, DI810, DI811, DI814, DI830, DI831, DI840, DI880, DI885, DO810, DO814, DO815, DO840, DO880, DP820 and DP840 I/O modules C • E F A.44.0.1 Features Row C A.44.0.2 Description Row B The TU814 is a 16 channel 50 V compact module termination unit (MTU) for the Row A S800 I/O. The TU814 has three rows of crimp snap-in connectors for field signals and process power connections. The MTU Snap-on connector positions is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. 3BSE 020 924R4101 495 TU814 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications The TU814 MTU can have up to 16 I/O channels and two process voltage connections. The maximum rated voltage is 50 V and maximum rated current is 2 A per channel. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. The process signal terminals are divided into 2 equal and individually isolated groups. Each group consists of 8 I/O connections, 2 process voltage connection and 5 common L- connections. The top part of the MTU can be removed to replace the termination board even with an operational system. Such a need can be caused by a damaged terminal screw. Crimp terminals are provided for connection to field wiring and insertion into the 3 snap-on connectors. Once the contacts are correctly placed in the connectors, the cable can be easily inserted and removed without future wiring errors. This assembly function can be performed before the cables are delivered to the site. Cable plugs and crimp snap in connectors are not included in TU814. 496 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU814 Compact MTU A.44.0.3 Technical Data Table A-91 TU814 Compact MTU Specifications Item Process connections Value 30 up to 16 I/O channels 2 x 2 process power terminals 2 x 5 process power 0 V Rated maximum continuous current per 2 A I/O channel Rated maximum continuous current per 5 A process voltage connection (L+) ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution: Maximum 24V current distribution: 1.5 A 1.5 A Acceptable wire sizes Stranded: 0.2 - 0.5 mm2, 24 - 20 AWG attached to crimped snap-in connectors 0.5 - 1.0 mm2, 20 - 18 AWG (1) (3) 1.5 - 2.5 mm2, 16 - 14 AWG Mechanical keys (2) 36 different combinations I/O module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 64 mm (2.52”) including connector, 58.5 mm (2.3”) edge to edge installed Depth 64 mm (2.52”), including terminals Height 170 mm (6.7”) including latch Weight 0.17 kg (0.37 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 497 TU814 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications (1) Supplied by Phoenix Contact: Cable plug Crimp snap in connector: Crimping tool: Remove insulation tool: 498 1808890 1879531 3190564 3190551 1204038 1204384 MSTBC 2.5/10-ST-5.08 MSTBC-MT 0.2-0.5 or MSTBC-MT 0.5-1.0 or MSTBC-MT 1.5-2.5 CRIMPFOX MT 2.5 QUICK WIREFOX 6 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU814 Compact MTU A.44.0.4 Connections Table A-92 TU814 Process Connection Crimp Connector (X1) Position Row A Row B Row C 1 L1- L1+ L1+ 2 A1 (L1-) B1 C1 3 2 (L1-) 2 2 4 3 (L1-) 3 3 5 4 (L1-) 4 4 6 5 (L2-) 5 5 7 6 (L2-) 6 6 8 7 (L2-) 7 7 9 A8 (L2-) B8 C8 L2- L2+ L2+ FE 10 D FE B C A D B C A Contact crimping tool for installation is not supplied. Phoenix part - CRIMPFOX MT2.5 Connection is made with removable contacts crimped to the wires 3BSE 020 924R4101 499 TU814 Compact MTU Appendix A Specifications A.44.0.5 Block Diagram TU814 TU814 C ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male B A I/O module UP1 UP1 EM ZP1 I1 ZP1 I1 1 I2 1 I2 BLOCK ZP1 1 I3 I4 2 ZP12 I5 Module Process Connector ModuleBus Connector Metral Female 2 3 / / 3 / 2 / 7 / I3 2 I4 I5 3 I6 3 I6 I7 I7 4 I8 I9 I 10 I8 4 ZP1 4 I9 5 I 10 5 I 11 I 12 I 11 I 13 I 14 I 13 7 I 15 I 15 8 I 16 ZP1 3 ZP2 5 I 12 6 ZP2 6 I 14 7 ZP2 7 I 16 8 UP2 +5V 0V +24V, 0V24 POS 0 - 6 POWOK DAT, DAT-N ZP2 8 ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female 500 ZP2 UP2 ZP2 EM 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU830 Extended MTU Row C Row B 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 E F B D A B C 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 L2+L2+ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 L2- L2- E F 8 8 3BSE 020 924R4101 A C DIN rail mounting. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 C1619 20 • 4 Latching device to DIN rail for grounding 3 • C1 2 Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module 5 • 4 Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules 3 • 2 Up to 16 channels of field signals and process power connections L1+L1+ 1 • 5 Complete installation of I/O modules using 3-wire connections, fuses and field power distribution 4 • 3 50 Volt applications - use with AI810, AI820, AI830, AI835, AI843, AI845, AO810, AO820, AO845, DI810, DI811, DI814, DI830, DI831, DI840, DI880, DI885, DO810, DO814, DO815, DO840, DO880, DP820 and DP840 I/O modules L1- L1- A1 2 • D A.45.0.1 Features Row A A.45 TU830 Extended MTU Fuse Holder 501 TU830 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.45.0.2 Description The TU830 is a 16 channel 50 V extended module termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. The TU830 MTU can have up to 16 I/O channels and two process voltage connections. Each channel has two I/O connections and one ZP connection. The process voltage can be connected to two individually isolated groups. Each group has a 6.3 A fuse. The maximum rated voltage is 50 V and maximum rated current is 2 A per channel. It is recommended that the fuse rating be chosen to meet the applications needs. The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. The process signal terminals are divided into 2 equal and individually isolated groups. Each group consists of 8 I/O channels, process voltage connection and a 6.3 A fuse (as delivered). Each I/O channel has two I/O connections and one ZP connection. For input modules, field power is provided by the B-row. 502 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU830 Extended MTU A.45.0.3 Technical Data Table A-93 TU830 Extended MTU Specifications Item Process Connections Value 56 up to 16 I/O channels 4 Process terminals 6.3 A 10 x 2 Process power 0 V Rated maximum continuous current per 2 A I/O channel Rated maximum continuous current per 5 A process voltage connection (L+) ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution Maximum 24 V current distribution 1.5 A 1.5 A Fuse (2) 6.3 A (fast glass tube, 5x20 mm) Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm2 Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG Recommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm Mechanical keys (2) 36 different combinations I/O module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 126 mm (5”) including connector, 120.5 mm (4.74”) edge to edge installed Depth 64 mm (2.52”) including terminals 3BSE 020 924R4101 503 TU830 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications Table A-93 TU830 Extended MTU Specifications (Continued) Item 504 Value Height 110 mm (4.3”) Weight 0.28 kg (0.6 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU830 Extended MTU A.45.0.4 Connections Table A-94 TU830 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) Position (1) Row A Row B Row C 1 L1- L1+ NC 2 L1- L1+ NC 3 A1 B1 C1 4 2 2 2 5 3 3 3 6 4 4 4 7 5 5 5 8 6 6 6 9 7 7 7 10 8 8 8 11 9 9 9 12 10 10 10 13 11 11 11 14 12 12 12 15 13 13 13 16 14 14 14 17 15 15 15 18 A16 B16 C16 19 L2- L2+ NC 20 L2- L2+ NC (1) All positions marked NC are not mounted in the connector. 3BSE 020 924R4101 505 TU830 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.45.0.5 Block Diagram TU830 TU830 C ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male I/O module UP1 6.3A UP1 UP1 ZP1 EM I1 U1 A B ZP1 ZP1 I1 1 U1 1 ZP11 BLOCK I2 Module Process Connector ModuleBus Connector Metral Female ZP12 I3 3 I4 U4 I4 4 I5 U5 I5 5 I6 U6 I6 6 I7 U7 I7 7 I8 U8 I8 8 2 3 / / 3 / 2 / . . . I16 U16 I9 9 U3 3 ZP13 U4 4 ZP14 U5 5 ZP15 U6 6 ZP16 U7 7 U8 8 U9 9 I16 16 ZP17 ZP18 ZP29 . . . U1616 ZP216 +5V 0V +24V, 0V24 7 / POS 0 - 6 POWOK DAT, DAT-N U2 2 I3 U3 I9 U9 ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female 506 I 22 U2 UP2 ZP2 EM 6.3A UP2 UP2 ZP2 ZP2 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU831 Extended MTU 6 Latching device to DIN rail for grounding 5 • 4 Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module 3 • 2 Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules B1 • D 7 A E F B C B8 A8 DIN rail mounting. 7 • E F 6 Up to 8 isolated channels of field signals 5 • 4 Greater connection area for larger wires 3 • 2 250 Volt applications - use with DI820, DI821, DO820, and DO821 I/O modules A1 • Row B A.46.0.1 Features Row A A.46 TU831 Extended MTU D B C A.46.0.2 Description A The TU831 is a 8 channel 250 V extended module termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. The TU831 MTU can have up to 8 I/O channels. The maximum rated voltage is 250 V and maximum rated current is 3 A per channel. The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. 3BSE 020 924R4101 507 TU831 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. The process signal terminals has 8 individually isolated I/O channels. Each channel has two connections. 508 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU831 Extended MTU A.46.0.3 Technical Data Table A-95 TU831 Compact MTU Specifications Item Process connections Value 16 up to 8 I/O channels (2 terminals per channel) Rated maximum continuous current per 3 A I/O channel ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution Maximum 24 V current distribution 1.5 A 1.5 A Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 6mm2 Stranded: 0.2 - 4 mm2, 24 - 10 AWG Recommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm Mechanical keys (2) 36 different combinations I/O Module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 250 V Dielectric test voltage 2000 V a.c. Width 126 mm (5”) including connector, 120.5 mm (4.74”) edge to edge installed Depth 64 mm (2.52”) including terminals Height 110 mm (4.3”) Weight 0.22 kg (0.48 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 509 TU831 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.46.0.4 Connections Table A-96 TU831 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) 510 Position Row A Row B 1 A1 B1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 A8 B8 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU831 Extended MTU A.46.0.5 Block Diagram TU831 TU831 ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male B I/O module O 1.1 S1 1 S2 1 O 1.2 EM O 2.1 S3 2 S4 2 O 2.2 S5 3 O 3.2 O 4.1 Module Process Connector ModuleBus Connector Metral Female BLOCK O 3.1 S6 3 S7 4 O 4.2 O 5.1 S8 4 S9 5 S10 5 O 5.2 O 6.1 S11 6 O 6.2 O 7.1 S12 6 S13 7 2 / / 3 / / 3 O 8.2 +5V 0V +24V, 0V24 POS 0 - 6 POWOK DAT, DAT-N 7 / 2 O 7.2 O 8.1 A S14 7 S15 8 S16 8 EM ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female 3BSE 020 924R4101 511 TU833 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.47 TU833 Extended MTU A.47.0.1 Features • 50 Volt applications - use with AI810, AI820, AI830, AI835, AI843, AI845, AO810, AO820, AO845, DI810, DI811, DI814, DI830, DI831, DI840, DI880, DI885, DO810, DO814, DO815, DO840, DO880, DP820 and DP840 I/O modules • Complete installation of I/O modules using 3-wire connections, fuses and field power distribution. • Up to 16 channels of field signals and process power connections. • Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules. • Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module. • Latching device to DIN rail for grounding. • DIN rail mounting. • Spring-case terminal A.47.0.2 Description The TU833 is a 16 channel 50 V extended module termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. 512 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU833 Extended MTU The TU833 MTU can have up to 16 I/O channels and two process voltage connections. Each channel has two I/O connections and one ZP connection. The process voltage can be connected to two individually isolated groups. Each group has a 6.3 A fuse. The maximum rated voltage is 50 V and maximum rated current is 2 A per channel. It is recommended that the fuse rating be chosen to meet the applications needs. The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. The process signal terminals are divided into 2 equal and individually isolated groups. Each group consists of 8 I/O channels, process voltage connection and a 6.3 A fuse (as delivered). Each I/O channel has two I/O connections and one ZP connection. For input modules, field power is provided by the B-row. The process connection terminals are of spring-case type. Only one wire per terminal is recommended. 3BSE 020 924R4101 513 TU833 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.47.0.3 Technical Data Table A-97 TU833 Extended MTU Specifications Item Process Connections Value 56 up to 16 I/O channels 4 Process terminals 6.3 A 10 x 2 Process power 0 V Rated maximum continuous current per 2 A I/O channel Rated maximum continuous current per 5 A process voltage connection (L+) ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution Maximum 24 V current distribution 1.5 A 1.5 A Fuse (2) 6.3 A (fast glass tube, 5x20 mm) Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 -12 AWG Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG Only one wire per terminal 514 Mechanical keys (2) 36 different combinations I/O module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 126 mm (5”) including connector, 120.5 mm (4.74”) edge to edge installed Depth 64 mm (2.52”) including terminals 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU833 Extended MTU Table A-97 TU833 Extended MTU Specifications (Continued) Item Value Height 105 mm (4.1”) Weight 0.28 kg (0.6 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 515 TU833 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.47.0.4 Connections Table A-98 TU833 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) Position (1) Row A Row B Row C 1 L1- L1+ NC 2 L1- L1+ NC 3 A1 B1 C1 4 2 2 2 5 3 3 3 6 4 4 4 7 5 5 5 8 6 6 6 9 7 7 7 10 8 8 8 11 9 9 9 12 10 10 10 13 11 11 11 14 12 12 12 15 13 13 13 16 14 14 14 17 15 15 15 18 A16 B16 C16 19 L2- L2+ NC 20 L2- L2+ NC (1) All positions marked NC are not mounted in the connector. 516 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU833 Extended MTU A.47.0.5 Block Diagram TU833 TU833 C ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male I/O module UP1 6.3A UP1 UP1 ZP1 EM I1 U1 A B ZP1 ZP1 I1 1 U1 1 ZP11 BLOCK I2 Module Process Connector ModuleBus Connector Metral Female ZP12 I3 3 I4 U4 I4 4 I5 U5 I5 5 I6 U6 I6 6 I7 U7 I7 7 I8 U8 I8 8 3 / / 3 2 / 2 / . . . I16 U16 I9 9 U3 3 ZP13 U4 4 ZP14 U5 5 ZP15 U6 6 ZP16 U7 7 U8 8 U9 9 I16 16 ZP17 ZP18 ZP29 . . . U1616 ZP216 +5V 0V +24V, 0V24 7 / POS 0 - 6 POWOK DAT, DAT-N U2 2 I3 U3 I9 U9 ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female 3BSE 020 924R4101 I 22 U2 UP2 ZP2 EM 6.3A UP2 UP2 ZP2 ZP2 517 TU835 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.48 TU835 Extended MTU Latching device to DIN rail for grounding • DIN rail mounting. E F A B • A C Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module L2- L2- • X12 B Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules C • L2+L2+ Process voltage can be connected to 2 individually isolated groups L1+L1+ • 11 12 21 22 31 32 41 42 5152 61 62 71 72 8182 Each channel has one fused transducer power terminal and one signal connection L1-L1- • X11 E F Up to 8 channels of field signals and process power connections Row B • D 50 Volt applications - use with the AI810 and AI845 modules D • Row A A.48.0.1 Features X13 A.48.0.2 Description The TU835 is a 8 channel 50 V extended module termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. 518 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU835 Extended MTU The TU835 MTU can have up to 8 I/O channels. The maximum rated voltage is 50 V and maximum rated current is 2 A per channel. The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. The process signal terminals has 8 individually isolated I/O channels. Each channel has two connections: one fused transducer power terminal and one signal connection. Process voltage can be connected to two individually isolated groups. 3BSE 020 924R4101 519 TU835 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.48.0.3 Technical Data Table A-99 TU835 Compact MTU Specifications Item Value Process connections 16 up to 8 I/O channels (2 terminals per channel) Rated maximum continuous current per I/O channel 2A ModuleBus: Maximum 5 current distribution Maximum 24 V current distribution 1.5 A 1.5 A Fuse (8) 100 mA (fast glass tube, 5x20 mm) Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm2 Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG Recommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm 520 Mechanical keys (2) 36 different combinations I/O Module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 126 mm (5”) including connector, 120.5 mm (4.74”) edge to edge installed Depth 64 mm (2.52”) including terminals Height 110 mm (4.3”) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU835 Extended MTU Table A-99 TU835 Compact MTU Specifications (Continued) Item Value Weight 0.26 kg (0.57 lbs.) Rated max. continuos current per process voltage connection Up/Zp. 8A A.48.0.4 Connections Table A-100 TU835 Process Power Source Connections (X11, X13) Position Row A Row B X11 - 1 L1- L1+ X11 - 2 L1- L1+ X13 - 1 L2- L2+ X13 - 2 L2- L2+ Table A-101 TU835 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X12) Position 3BSE 020 924R4101 Row A 1 11 (F1, L1+ power) 2 12 (signal) 3 21 (F2, L1+ power) 4 22 (signal) 5 31 (F3, L1+ power) 6 32 (signal) 7 41 (F4, L1+ power) 8 42 (signal) 521 TU835 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications Table A-101 TU835 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X12) (Continued) Position 9 522 Row A 51 (F5, L2+ power) 10 52 (signal) 11 61 (F6, L2+ power) 12 62 (signal) 13 71 (F7, L2+ power) 14 72 (signal) 15 81 (F8, L2+ power) 16 82 (signal) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU835 Extended MTU A.48.0.5 Block Diagram TU835 TU835 ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male I/O module X11 B UP1 A L1+ 1 L1+ 2 ZP1 EM L1- 1 L1- 2 X12 A F1 U1 F2 U2 21 3 22 4 F3 U3 31 5 32 6 F4 U4 41 7 42 8 F5 U5 51 9 52 10 F6 U6 61 11 62 12 F7 U7 71 13 72 14 F8 U8 81 15 82 16 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 X13 3 / / 3 2 / / 7 / 2 S8 B ZP2 +5V 0V +24V, 0V24 POS 0 - 6 POWOK DAT, DAT-N UP2 ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female 3BSE 020 924R4101 11 1 2 12 S2 Module Process Connector ModuleBus Connector Metral Female BLOCK S1 A L2+ 1 L2+ 2 L2- 1 L2- 2 EM EM 523 TU836 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.49 TU836 Extended MTU • DIN rail mounting. A B Latching device to DIN rail for grounding A C • N2 N2 Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module L2 L2 • X12 E F Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules E F • B Process voltage can be connected to 2 individually isolated groups C • 11 12 21 22 31 32 41 42 51 52 61 62 71 72 81 82 Each channel has one fused load power terminal and one signal return connection X11 N1 N1 • Row B Two groups with 4 channels of field signals and process power connections D • D 250 Volt applications - use with the DO820, and DO821 modules L1 L1 • Row A A.49.0.1 Features X13 A.49.0.2 Description The TU836 is a 8 channel 250 V extended module termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. The TU836 MTU can have up to 8 I/O channels. The maximum rated voltage is 250 V and maximum rated current is 3 A per channel. 524 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU836 Extended MTU The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. The process signal terminals are divided into 2 equal and individually isolated groups. Each groups consists of 4 I/O connections and process voltage connection. Each channel has two connections: one fused load outlet terminal and one signal return connection. 3BSE 020 924R4101 525 TU836 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.49.0.3 Technical Data Table A-102 TU836 Extended MTU Specifications Item Value Process connections 16 up to 8 I/O channels (2 terminals per channel) Rated maximum continuous current per process voltage connection (L1, L2, N1, N2) 10 A Rated maximum continuous current per I/O channel 3A ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution Maximum 24 V current distribution 1.5 A 1.5 A Fuse (8) 3.15 A (fast glass tube, 5x20 mm) Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm2 Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG Recommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm 526 Mechanical keys (2) 36 different combinations I/O Module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 250 V Dielectric test voltage 2000 V a.c. Width 126 mm (5”) including connector, 120.5 mm (4.74”) edge to edge installed Depth 64 mm (2.52”) including terminals 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU836 Extended MTU Table A-102 TU836 Extended MTU Specifications (Continued) Item Value Height 110 mm (4.3”) Weight 0.26 kg (0.57 lbs.) Connections Table A-103 TU836 Process Power Source Connections (X11, X13) Position Row A Row B X11 - 1 N1 L1 X11 - 2 N1 L1 X13 - 1 N2 L2 X13 - 2 N2 L2 Table A-104 TU836 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X12) Position 3BSE 020 924R4101 Row A 1 11 (F1, L1 power) 2 12 (signal return) 3 21 (F2, L1 power) 4 22 (signal return) 5 31 (F3, L1 power) 6 32 (signal return) 7 41 (F4, L1 power) 8 42 (signal return) 527 TU836 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications Table A-104 TU836 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X12) (Continued) Position 528 Row A 9 51 (F5, L2 power) 10 52 (signal return) 11 61 (F6, L2 power) 12 62 (signal return) 13 71 (F7, L2 power) 14 72 (signal return) 15 81 (F8, L2 power) 16 82 (signal return) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU836 Extended MTU A.49.0.4 Block Diagram TU836 TU836 X11 ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male A B I/O module UP1 L1 1 L1 2 ZP1 N1 1 EM N1 2 X12 A F1 S11 S1 BLOCK 12 F2 S21 21 3 22 4 Module Process Connector ModuleBus Connector Metral Female S2 2 S3 F3 S31 31 5 32 6 S4 F4 S41 41 7 42 8 S5 F5 S51 51 9 52 10 S6 F6 S61 61 11 62 12 S7 F7 S71 71 13 72 14 S8 F8 S81 81 82 15 16 3 / / 3 2 / 2 / 7 / 11 1 UP2 +5V 0V +24V, 0V24 POS 0 - 6 POWOK DAT, DAT-N X13 B ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female 3BSE 020 924R4101 ZP2 A L2 1 L2 2 N2 1 N2 2 EM 529 TU837 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.50 TU837 Extended MTU 250 Volt applications - use with the DO820, and DO821 modules • Allows a mix of isolated and grouped channels • Process voltage return can be connected to 2 individually isolated groups B1 Each channel has two terminals and one is fused N1 11 12 • A1 Up to 8 individually isolated channels of field signals and process power connections Fuse Holders X11 N1 13 14 • Row B • Row A A.50.0.1 Features 2 2 3 3 4 4 D E F B C 7 D A B C B8 25 26 N2 DIN rail mounting 6 • 27 28 N2 Latching device to DIN rail for grounding A8 • 7 Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module A 6 Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules • E F 5 5 • X12 X13 A.50.0.2 Description The TU837 is a 8 channel 250 V extended module termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. 530 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU837 Extended MTU The TU837 MTU can have up to 8 I/O channels. The maximum rated voltage is 250 V and maximum rated current is 3 A per channel. The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. The process signal terminals has 8 individually isolated I/O channels. Each channel has two connections, one is fused. There are 2 individually isolated groups for signal return connections. 3BSE 020 924R4101 531 TU837 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.50.0.3 Technical Data Table A-105 TU837 Extended MTU Specifications Item Process connections Value 28 up to 8 I/O channels (2 terminals per channel) 2 x 6 power common terminals Rated maximum continuous current per 10 A signal return connection (N1, N2) Rated maximum continuous current per 3 A I/O channel ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution: Maximum 24 V current distribution: 1.5 A 1.5 A Fuse (8) 3.15 A (fast glass tube, 5x20 mm) Acceptable wire sizes Signal connection Return connection Solid: 0.2 - 6 mm Stranded: 0.2 - 4 mm2, 24 - 10 AWG Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG Recommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm 532 Mechanical keys (2) 36 different combinations I/O Module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 250 V Dielectric test voltage 2000 V a.c. Width 126 mm (5”) including connector, 120.5 mm (4.74”) edge to edge installed 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU837 Extended MTU Table A-105 TU837 Extended MTU Specifications (Continued) Item Value Depth 64 mm (2.52”) including terminals Height 110 mm (4.3”) Weight 0.26 kg (0.57 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 533 TU837 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.50.0.4 Connections Table A-106 TU837 Process Power Connection X11 Row A Row B Terminal Signal Marking Signal Marking 1 ZP1 N1 ZP1 N1 2 ZP1 13 ZP1 11 3 ZP1 14 ZP1 12 Table A-107 TU 837 Process Power Connection X13 Row A Row B Terminal Signal Marking Signal Marking 1 ZP2 27 ZP2 25 2 ZP2 28 ZP2 26 3 ZP2 N2 ZP2 N2 Table A-108 TU 837 Process Connection Terminals X12 Row A Row B Terminal 534 Signal Marking Signal Marking 1 S21 (F1) A1 S1 B1 2 S41 (F2) 2 S3 2 3 S61 (F3) 3 S5 3 4 S81 (F4) 4 S7 4 5 S101 (F5) 5 S9 5 6 S121 (F6) 6 S11 6 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU837 Extended MTU Table A-108 TU 837 Process Connection Terminals X12 (Continued) Row A Row B Terminal 3BSE 020 924R4101 Signal Marking Signal Marking 7 S141 (F7) 7 S13 7 8 S161 (F8) A8 S15 B8 535 TU837 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.50.0.5 Block Diagram TU837 B TU837 X11 I/O module ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male N1 1 X12 B S1 S2 A N1 1 ZP1 A B1 1 F1 A1 1 S21 EM 11 2 S3 S4 2 2 F2 2 2 S41 S6 3 3 F3 3 3 S61 13 2 Module Process Connector ModuleBus Connector Metral Female BLOCK 12 3 S5 S7 S8 4 4 F4 S81 4 4 14 3 5 5 S9 S10 F5 S101 5 5 25 1 S11 S12 6 6 F6 S121 6 6 26 2 3 F7 S141 27 1 S16 B8 8 F8 S161 A8 8 28 2 0V +5V 7 7 / 3 / 2 / / S14 7 7 S15 +24V, 0V24 DAT, DAT-N POWOK POS 0 - 6 7 / 2 S13 EM ZP2 N2 3 ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female N2 3 A B X13 536 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU838 Extended MTU A.51 TU838 Extended MTU A.51.0.1 Features • Complete installation of I/O modules using 3-wire connections, fuses and field power distribution • Up to 16 channels of field signals and 8 process power connections • Two channels share one fused transducer power terminal 9 Process voltage can be connected to 2 individually isolated groups, if the I/O module supports it 13 Row B Row A 50 Volt applications - use with the AI810, AI845, DI810, DI811, DI814, DI830, DI831, DI840 and DI880 modules 5 Module connector • Fuse Holders L1 + L1 L1 + L1 - B 1 A 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 10 11 E F 10 12 D 11 E F 14 14 D 15 15 A B C B 16 A 16 L2 + L2 L2 + L2 - • Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules • Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module • Latching device to DIN rail for grounding • DIN rail mounting. 3BSE 020 924R4101 B 13 C 12 • A Screw terminals 537 TU838 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.51.0.2 Description The TU838 is a 16 channel 50 V extended module termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. The TU838 MTU can have up to 16 I/O channels. The maximum rated voltage is 50 V and maximum rated current is 3 A per channel. The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. The process signal terminals are divided into two equal and individually isolated groups. Each group consists of 8 I/O channels, 4 fused transducer power outlets, 4 return connections and process voltage connection. Process voltage can be connected to two individually isolated groups, only valid if the I/O module supports that. 538 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU838 Extended MTU A.51.0.3 Technical Data Table A-109 TU838 Extended MTU Specifications Item Process connections Value 40 up to 16 I/O channels 8 fused field power distributions 4 process power 12 process power (0 V) Rated maximum continuous current per 10 A process voltage connection ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution Maximum 24 V current distribution 1.5 A 1.5 A Rated max. continuos current per channel 3A Fuse (8) Only on delivery:100 mA (fast glass tube, 5x20 mm) Otherwise: Max. 3,5 A Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm2 Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG Recommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm Mechanical keys (2) 36 different combinations I/O Module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. 3BSE 020 924R4101 539 TU838 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications Table A-109 TU838 Extended MTU Specifications (Continued) Item 540 Value Width 126 mm (5”) including connector, 120.5 mm (4.74”) edge to edge installed Depth 64 mm (2.52”) including terminals Height 110 mm (4.3”) Weight 0.26 kg (0.57 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU838 Extended MTU A.51.0.4 Connections Table A-110 TU838 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) Row A 3BSE 020 924R4101 Row B L1- (L1- power) L1+ (L1+ power) L1- (L1- power) L1+ (L1+ power) A1 (F1, L1+) B1 (signal) A2 (L1-) B2 (signal) A3 (F2, L1+) B3 (signal) A4 (L1-) B4 (signal) A5 (F3, L1+) B5 (signal) A6 (L1-) B6 (signal) A7 (F4, L1+) B7 (signal) A8 (L1-) B8 (signal) A9 (F5, L2+) B9 (signal) A10 (L2-) B10 (signal) A11 (F6, L2+) B11 (signal) A12 (L2-) B12 (signal) A13 (F7, L2+) B13 (signal) A14 (L2-) B14 (signal) A15 (F8, L2+) B15 (signal) A16 (L2-) B15 (signal) L2- (L2- power) L2+ (L2+ power) L2- (L2- power) L2+ (L2+ power) 541 TU838 Extended MTU Appendix A Specifications A.51.0.5 Block Diagram TU838 TU838 I/O module ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male B UP1 ZP1 L1+ 1 L1- 1 L1+ 2 EM S1 S2 S3 BLOCK S4 S5 S7 Module Process Connector ModuleBus Connector Metral Female S6 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 / 3 3 / B3 5 F2 U2 B4 6 B5 7 F3 U3 B6 8 B7 9 F4 U4 B8 10 B9 11 F5 U5 B1012 L1- 2 A1 3 A2 4 A3 5 A4 6 A5 7 A6 8 A7 9 A8 10 A9 11 A10 12 B1113 F6 U6 A11 13 B1214 A12 14 B1315 F7 U7 A13 15 B1416 A14 16 B1517 F8 U8 A15 17 B1618 A16 18 L2+ 19 L2- 19 L2- 20 0V 2 / / B1 3 F1 U1 B2 4 L2+ 20 ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male 542 S16 UP2 ZP2 +5V +24V, 0V24 POS 0 - 6 POWOK DAT, DAT-N 7 / 2 S15 A EM 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU842 Redundant Horizontal MTU A.52 TU842 Redundant Horizontal MTU A.52.0.1 Features • 50 Volt applications - use with AI843, AO845, DI840, DI880, DO840, DO880 and DP840 I/O modules • Complete installation of I/O modules using 3-wire connections and field power distribution • Up to 16 channels of field signals and process power connections • Connections to two ModuleBuses and I/O modules • Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module • Latching device to DIN rail for grounding • DIN rail mounting. A.52.0.2 Description The TU842 is a 16 channel module termination unit (MTU) for redundant S800 I/O modules and for mounting on a horizontal DIN rail. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. The TU842 MTU can have up to 16 I/O channels and 2+2 process voltage connections. Each channel has two I/O connections and one ZP connection. The maximum rated voltage is 50 V and maximum rated current is 3 A per channel. 3BSE 020 924R4101 543 TU842 Redundant Horizontal MTU Appendix A Specifications The MTU distributes the two ModuleBuses to each I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O modules by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. Four mechanical keys, two for each I/O module, are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. Each I/O channel has two I/O connections and one ZP connection. For input modules, field power is provided by the B-row. 544 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU842 Redundant Horizontal MTU A.52.0.3 Technical Data Table A-111 TU842 Redundant Horizontal MTU Specifications Item Process Connections Value 56 up to 16 I/O channels 4 Process terminals 20 Process power 0 V Rated maximum continuous current per 3 A I/O channel Rated maximum continuous current per 10 A process voltage connection (L+) ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution Maximum 24 V current distribution 1.5 A 1.5 A Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm2 Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG Recommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm Mechanical keys (2+2) 36 different combinations I/O module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 131 mm (5.16”) including connector, 124 mm (4.88”) edge to edge installed Depth 64 mm (2.52”) including terminals 3BSE 020 924R4101 545 TU842 Redundant Horizontal MTU Appendix A Specifications Table A-111 TU842 Redundant Horizontal MTU Specifications (Continued) Item Value Height 186.5 mm (7.34”) including locking device Weight 0.6 kg (1.3 lbs.) A.52.0.4 Connections Table A-112 TU842 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) Position 546 Row A Row B Row C 1 L1- L1+ 2 L1- L1+ 3 A1 B1 C1 4 2 2 2 5 3 3 3 6 4 4 4 7 5 5 5 8 6 6 6 9 7 7 7 10 8 8 8 11 9 9 9 12 10 10 10 13 11 11 11 14 12 12 12 15 13 13 13 16 14 14 14 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU842 Redundant Horizontal MTU Table A-112 TU842 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) (Continued) Position 3BSE 020 924R4101 Row A Row B Row C 17 15 15 15 18 A16 B16 C16 19 L2- L2+ 20 L2- L2+ 547 TU842 Redundant Horizontal MTU Appendix A Specifications A.52.0.5 Block Diagram TU842 TU842 C A B MSL UP1 ModuleBus Connector A L1+ L1+ B ZP S1 U1 1 S2 U2 2 S3 U3 3 S4 U4 4 S5 U5 5 S6 U6 6 S7 U7 7 S8 U8 8 S9 U9 9 S10 U10 10 S11 U11 11 S12 U12 12 S13 U13 13 S14 U14 14 S15 U15 15 S16 U16 16 L1L11 1 2 2 3 ModuleBus Process Connector I/O Module A ModuleBus Connector BLOCK 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 UP2 EM A B 13 14 14 15 15 16 L2+ L2+ 16 L2L2- - - - - - - I/O Module B BLOCK MSL UP1 ZP S1 U1 13 S16 U16 UP2 EM ModuleBus Connector 548 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU843 Redundant Vertical MTU A.53 TU843 Redundant Vertical MTU A.53.0.1 Features • 50 Volt applications - use with AI843, AO845, DI840, DI880, DO840, DO880 and DP840 I/O modules • Complete installation of I/O modules using 3-wire connections and field power distribution • Up to 16 channels of field signals and process power connections • Connections to two ModuleBuses and I/O modules • Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module • Latching device to DIN rail for grounding • DIN rail mounting. A.53.0.2 Description The TU843 is a 16 channel module termination unit (MTU) for redundant S800 I/O modules and for mounting on a vertical DIN rail. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. The TU843 MTU can have up to 16 I/O channels and 2+2 process voltage connections. Each channel has two I/O connections and one ZP connection. The maximum rated voltage is 50 V and maximum rated current is 3 A per channel. 3BSE 020 924R4101 549 TU843 Redundant Vertical MTU Appendix A Specifications The MTU distributes the two ModuleBuses, one to each the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O modules by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. Four mechanical keys, two for each module, are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. Each I/O channel has two I/O connections and one ZP connection. For input modules, field power is provided by the B-row. 550 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU843 Redundant Vertical MTU A.53.0.3 Technical Data Table A-113 TU843 Redundant Vertical MTU Specifications Item Process Connections Value 56 up to 16 I/O channels 4 Process terminals 20 Process power 0 V Rated maximum continuous current per 3 A I/O channel Rated maximum continuous current per 10 A process voltage connection (L+) ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution Maximum 24 V current distribution 1.5 A 1.5 A Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm2 Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG Recommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm Mechanical keys (2+2) 36 different combinations I/O module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 131 mm (5.16”) including connector, 124 mm (4.88”) edge to edge installed Depth 64 mm (2.52”) including terminals 3BSE 020 924R4101 551 TU843 Redundant Vertical MTU Appendix A Specifications Table A-113 TU843 Redundant Vertical MTU Specifications (Continued) Item Value Height 186.5 mm (7.34”) including locking device Weight 0.6 kg (1.3 lbs.) A.53.0.4 Connections Table A-114 TU843 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) Position 552 Row A Row B Row C 1 L1- L1+ 2 L1- L1+ 3 A1 B1 C1 4 2 2 2 5 3 3 3 6 4 4 4 7 5 5 5 8 6 6 6 9 7 7 7 10 8 8 8 11 9 9 9 12 10 10 10 13 11 11 11 14 12 12 12 15 13 13 13 16 14 14 14 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU843 Redundant Vertical MTU Table A-114 TU843 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) (Continued) Position 3BSE 020 924R4101 Row A Row B Row C 17 15 15 15 18 A16 B16 C16 19 L2- L2+ 20 L2- L2+ 553 TU843 Redundant Vertical MTU Appendix A Specifications A.53.0.5 Block Diagram TU843 TU843 C A B MSL UP1 ModuleBus Connector A L1+ L1+ B ZP S1 U1 1 S2 U2 2 S3 U3 3 S4 U4 4 S5 U5 5 S6 U6 6 S7 U7 7 S8 U8 8 S9 U9 9 S10 U10 10 S11 U11 11 S12 U12 12 S13 U13 13 S14 U14 14 S15 U15 15 S16 U16 16 L1L11 1 2 2 3 ModuleBus Process Connector I/O Module A ModuleBus Connector BLOCK 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 UP2 EM A B 13 14 14 15 15 16 L2+ L2+ 16 L2L2- - - - - - - I/O Module B BLOCK MSL UP1 ZP S1 U1 13 S16 U16 UP2 EM ModuleBus Connector 554 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU844 Redundant Horizontal MTU A.54 TU844 Redundant Horizontal MTU A.54.0.1 Features • 50 Volt applications - use with AI845, AI880 and DP840 modules • Complete installation of I/O modules using 2-wire connections and field power distribution • Up to 8 channels of field signals and process power connections • Connections to two ModuleBuses and I/O modules • Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module • Latching device to DIN rail for grounding • DIN rail mounting A.54.0.2 Description The TU844 is a 8 channel module termination unit (MTU) for redundant S800 I/O modules and for mounting on a horizontal DIN rail. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. The TU844 MTU can have up to 8 I/O channels and 2+2 process voltage connections. Each channel has two I/O connections and one ZP connection. Input signals are connected via individual shunt sticks, TY801. The shunt stick is used to 3BSE 020 924R4101 555 TU844 Redundant Horizontal MTU Appendix A Specifications choose between voltage and current input. The maximum rated voltage is 50 V and maximum rated current is 2 A per channel. The MTU distributes the two ModuleBuses, one to each I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O modules by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. Four mechanical keys, two for each I/O module, are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. 556 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU844 Redundant Horizontal MTU A.54.0.3 Technical Data Table A-115 TU844 Redundant Horizontal MTU Specifications Item Process Connections Value 40 up to 8 I/O channels 4 Process terminals 20 Process power 0 V Rated maximum continuous current per 2 A I/O channel Rated maximum continuous current per 5 A process voltage connection (L+) ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution Maximum 24 V current distribution 1.5 A 1.5 A Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm2 Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG Recommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm Mechanical keys (2+2) 36 different combinations I/O module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 131 mm (5.16”) including connector, 124 mm (4.88”) edge to edge installed Depth 64 mm (2.52”) including terminals 3BSE 020 924R4101 557 TU844 Redundant Horizontal MTU Appendix A Specifications Table A-115 TU844 Redundant Horizontal MTU Specifications (Continued) Item Value Height 186.5 mm (7.34”) including locking device Weight 0.6 kg (1.3 lbs.) A.54.0.4 Connections Table A-116 TU844 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) Position 558 Row A Row B 1 L1- L1+ 2 L1- L1+ 3 A1 B1 4 2 2 5 3 3 6 4 4 7 5 5 8 6 6 9 7 7 10 8 8 11 9 9 12 10 10 13 11 11 14 12 12 15 13 13 16 14 14 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU844 Redundant Horizontal MTU Table A-116 TU844 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) (Continued) Position 3BSE 020 924R4101 Row A Row B 17 15 15 18 A16 B16 19 L2- L2+ 20 L2- L2+ 559 TU844 Redundant Horizontal MTU Appendix A Specifications A.54.0.5 Block Diagram TU844 TU844 MSL UP1 ModuleBus Connector A B Shunt stick B A L1+ L1+ ModuleBus Process Connector I/O Module A ModuleBus Connector BLOCK ZP U1 1 S1 2 U2 3 S2 4 5 S3 6 I/O Module B 560 5 6 U4 7 S4 8 U5 9 7 8 9 S5 10 U6 11 S6 12 U7 13 S7 14 U8 15 10 11 12 13 14 15 S8 16 UP2 L2+ 16 L2+ L2L2- MSL UP1 ZP U1 S1 BLOCK B 3 4 - - - - - - A 2 U3 EM ModuleBus Connector L1L11 U8 S8 UP2 EM 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU845 Redundant Vertical MTU A.55 TU845 Redundant Vertical MTU A.55.0.1 Features • 50 Volt applications - use with AI845, AI880 and DP840 modules • Complete installation of I/O modules using 2-wire connections and field power distribution • Up to 8 channels of field signals and process power connections • Connections to two ModuleBuses and I/O modules • Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O module • Latching device to DIN rail for grounding • DIN rail mounting. • Include 8 individual shunt sticks A.55.0.2 Description The TU845 is a 8 channel module termination unit (MTU) for redundant S800 I/O modules and for mounting on a vertical DIN rail. The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. 3BSE 020 924R4101 561 TU845 Redundant Vertical MTU Appendix A Specifications The TU845 MTU can have up to 8 I/O channels and 2+2 process voltage connections. Each channel has two I/O connections and one ZP connection. Input signals are connected via individual shunt sticks, TY801. The shunt stick is used to choose between voltage and current input. The maximum rated voltage is 50 V and maximum rated current is 2 A per channel. The MTU distributes the two ModuleBuses, one to each I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the I/O modules by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU. The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch can be released with a screwdriver. Four mechanical keys, two for each I/O module, are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver. The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position. 562 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU845 Redundant Vertical MTU A.55.0.3 Technical Data Table A-117 TU845 Redundant Vertical MTU Specifications Item Process Connections Value 40 up to 8 I/O channels 4 Process terminals 20 Process power 0 V Rated maximum continuous current per 2 A I/O channel Rated maximum continuous current per 5 A process voltage connection (L+) ModuleBus: Maximum 5 V current distribution Maximum 24 V current distribution 1.5 A 1.5 A Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm2 Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG Recommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm Mechanical keys (2+2) 36 different combinations I/O module lock Locks module and enables operation Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated insulation voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 131 mm (5.16”) including connector, 124 mm (4.88”) edge to edge installed Depth 64 mm (2.52”) including terminals 3BSE 020 924R4101 563 TU845 Redundant Vertical MTU Appendix A Specifications Table A-117 TU845 Redundant Vertical MTU Specifications (Continued) Item Value Height 186.5 mm (7.34”) including locking device Weight 0.6 kg (1.3 lbs.) A.55.0.4 Connections Table A-118 TU845 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) Position 564 Row A Row B 1 L1- L1+ 2 L1- L1+ 3 A1 B1 4 2 2 5 3 3 6 4 4 7 5 5 8 6 6 9 7 7 10 8 8 11 9 9 12 10 10 13 11 11 14 12 12 15 13 13 16 14 14 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TU845 Redundant Vertical MTU Table A-118 TU845 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1) (Continued) Position 3BSE 020 924R4101 Row A Row B 17 15 15 18 A16 B16 19 L2- L2+ 20 L2- L2+ 565 TU845 Redundant Vertical MTU Appendix A Specifications A.55.0.5 Block Diagram TU845 TU845 MSL UP1 ModuleBus Connector A B Shunt stick B A L1+ L1+ ModuleBus Process Connector I/O Module A ModuleBus Connector BLOCK ZP U1 1 S1 2 U2 3 S2 4 5 S3 6 I/O Module B 566 5 6 U4 7 S4 8 U5 9 7 8 9 S5 10 U6 11 S6 12 U7 13 S7 14 U8 15 10 11 12 13 14 15 S8 16 UP2 L2+ 16 L2+ L2L2- MSL UP1 ZP U1 S1 BLOCK B 3 4 - - - - - - A 2 U3 EM ModuleBus Connector L1L11 U8 S8 UP2 EM 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TY801 Shunt Stick A.56 TY801 Shunt Stick A.56.0.1 Features • Passive unit used for configuration of signal type. • Used with TU844 and TU845 together with AI845. Current/voltage indicator A.56.0.2 Description The TY801 Shunt Stick is used to adjust the input for current or voltage signals. In the upper corner of the shunt stick there is a part of the circuit board that is visible. If the visible part is to the left, the shunt stick is configured for voltage and if it is to the right it is configured for current. 3BSE 020 924R4101 567 TY801 Shunt Stick Appendix A Specifications A.56.0.3 Technical Data Table A-119 TY801 Shunt Stick Specifications Item 568 Value Module catch Attaches module MTU TU844/TU845 Internal resistance 2 x 125 Ω, 0.05% Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection Rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated Insulation Voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 11 mm (0.43”) Depth 15,5 mm (0.61”) Height 62 mm (2.44”) Weight 6 g (0.013 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TY801 Shunt Stick A.56.0.4 Block Diagram TY801 125 Ω 125 Ω 3BSE 020 924R4101 569 TY804 Shunt Stick Appendix A Specifications A.57 TY804 Shunt Stick A.57.0.1 Features • Passive unit used for configuration of signal type. • Used on TU844 and TU845 together with DP840. Visible part of circuit board A.57.0.2 Description The TY804 Shunt Stick is used to adjust the input current to a voltage signal. In the upper corner of the shunt stick there is a part of the circuit board that is visible. The visible part shall be turned to the right (current input) when the shunt stick is mounted. 570 3BSE 020 924R4101 Appendix A Specifications TY804 Shunt Stick A.57.0.3 Technical Data Table A-120 TY804 Shunt Stick Specifications Item Value Module catch Attaches module MTU TU844/TU845 Internal resistance 1.08 kΩ 1% Equipment class Class I according to IEC 61140; (earth protected) Protection Rating IP20 according to IEC 60529 Rated Insulation Voltage 50 V Dielectric test voltage 500 V a.c. Width 11 mm (0.43”) Depth 15,5 mm (0.61”) Height 62 mm (2.44”) Weight 6 g (0.013 lbs.) 3BSE 020 924R4101 571 TY804 Shunt Stick Appendix A Specifications A.57.0.4 Block Diagram TY804 1 kΩ 572 3BSE 020 924R4101 INDEX A AI801 47, 69 AI810 38, 76 AI820 38, 88 AI825 39, 98 AI830 39, 106 AI835 39, 117 AI843 39, 130 AI845 39, 142 AI880 40, 156 AI880A 40, 156 Analog input module AI801 47, 69 AI810 38, 76 AI820 88 AI825 98 AI830 106 AI835 117 AI843 130 AI845 39, 142 AI880 40, 156 AI880A 40, 156 Analog output module AO801 48, 164 AO810 40, 172 AO820 182 AO845 40, 192 AO801 48, 164 AO810 40, 172 AO820 40, 182 AO845 40, 192 D B Bipolar analog output module AO820 40 3BSE 020 924R4101 C Compact MTU 34, 483 TU810 34, 472 TU811 34, 478 TU812 34, 483 TU813 34, 489 TU814 34, 495 DI801 48, 204 DI802 48, 211 DI803 48, 218 DI810 41, 225 DI811 41, 236 DI814 41, 247 DI820 41, 258 DI821 42, 266 DI825 42, 274 DI830 42, 282 DI831 43, 293 DI840 43, 304 DI880 43, 316 DI885 43, 329 Differential analog input module AI820 38 Digital input module DI801 48, 204 DI802 48, 211 DI803 48, 218 DI810 41, 225 DI811 41, 236 DI814 41, 247 DI820 258 DI821 42, 266 DI825 42, 274 573 Index DI830 42, 282 DI831 43, 293 DI840 43, 304 DI880 43, 316 DI885 43, 329 Digital input module, SOE 275, 294, 330 Digital output module DO801 48, 340 DO802 49, 347 DO810 44, 354 DO814 44, 364 DO815 44, 375 DO820 45, 386 DO821 45, 396 DO840 45, 406 DO880 45, 418 DO801 48, 340 DO802 49, 347 DO810 44, 354 DO814 44, 364 DO815 44, 375 DO820 45, 386 DO821 45, 396 DO840 45, 406 DO880 45, 418 DP820 46, 431 DP840 46, 452 E Extended MTU TU830 34, 501, 512 TU831 35, 507 TU833 35 TU835 35, 518 TU836 35, 524 TU837 36, 530 TU838 36, 537 F Frequency measuring DP820 46, 431 DP840 46, 452 I I/O modules S800 53 S800L 53 I/O station 24 Incremental pulse counter DP820 46, 431 DP840 46, 452 L LEDs S800L I/O module 58 S800M I/O module 55 M Module termination units 28 ModuleBus master 24 MTU TU805 469 TU810 472 TU811 478 TU812 483 TU813 489 TU814 495 TU830 501, 512 TU831 507 TU835 518 TU836 524 TU837 530 TU838 537 TU842 36, 543 TU843 37, 549 TU844 37, 555 TU845 37, 561 MTUs 65 FCI 24 574 3BSE 020 924R4101 Index O OSP 45 P Process connection terminals TU837 534 Process connections AI801 74 AI820 93, 103 AI830 112 AI835 124 AI843 137 AO801 169 AO810 177 AO820 187 AO845 198 DI801 209 DI802 216 DI803 223 DI810 230 DI811 241 DI814 252 DI820 263, 279 DI821 271 DI830 287 DI831 298 DI840 309 DI880 322 DI885 336 DO801 345 DO802 352 DO810 359 DO814 369 DO815 381 DO820 391 DO821 401 DO840 412 DO880 425 DP820 445 DP840 461 3BSE 020 924R4101 TU810 476 TU811 481, 493 TU812 486 TU814 499 TU830 505, 516 TU831 510 TU835 521 TU842 546 TU843 552 TU844 558 TU845 564 Process power connections TU837 534 Process power source connections TU835 521 TU836 527 R RTD input module AI830 39, 106 S S800 I/O module replacement 61 S800 I/O modules 38 S800L I/O module replacement 66 S800L I/O modules 46 Sequence of event 282, 293, 329 Shunt stick TY801 37, 567 TY804 37, 570 SOE 282, 293, 329 T Terminal Unit TU805 33, 469 Thermocouple/mV input module AI835 39, 117 AI843 39, 130 TU805 33, 469 TU810 34, 472 575 Index TU811 TU812 TU813 TU814 TU830 TU831 TU833 TU835 TU836 TU837 TU838 TU842 TU843 TU844 TU845 TY801 TY804 576 34, 478 34, 483 34, 489 34, 495 34, 501, 512 35, 507 35 35, 518 35, 524 36, 530 36, 537 36, 543 37, 549 37, 555 37, 561 37, 567 37, 570 3BSE 020 924R4101 3BSE 020 924R4101. Printed in Sweden June 2005 Copyright © 2005 by ABB. All Rights Reserved ® Registered Trademark of ABB. ™ Trademark of ABB. http://www.abb.com/control Automation Technology Products Västerås, Sweden www.abb.com/processautomation email: processautomation@se.abb.com Automation Technology Products Wickliffe, Ohio, USA www.abb.com/processautomation email: industrialitsolutions@us.abb.com Automation Technology Products Mannheim, Germany www.abb.de/processautomation email: marketing.control-products@de.abb.com
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Encryption : Standard V2.3 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Copy, Extract, Print high-res Page Mode : UseNone XMP Toolkit : 3.1-701 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 5.0 (Windows) Create Date : 2005:05:26 08:54:57Z Modify Date : 2005:06:16 11:40:16-04:00 Metadata Date : 2005:06:16 11:40:16-04:00 Creator Tool : FrameMaker 6.0 Format : application/pdf Creator : ABB Title : S800 I/O, Modules and Termination Units Description : Control IT Document ID : uuid:85ac27a0-7a7a-4ef9-9e0b-c55e9f4a7535 Instance ID : uuid:aacd1e88-b310-4aef-a79b-40539e6a533b Page Count : 578 Page Layout : SinglePage Subject : Control IT Author : ABBEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools